A NEW 
THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL 

FRENCH GRAMMAR, 

FOUNDED 

V)N AN EASIER SYSTEM THAN HAS HITHERTO 
BEEN ADOPTED; 

AND 

CALCULATED GREATLY TO FACILITATE THE 

) ATTAINMENT OF THIS LANGUAGE, BY MEANS OF 

EASY COMPOSITIONS. 

7 1 " . 

BY C. RACINE, 

PROFESSOR OF THE FRENCH, LATIN, AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, 
ON PHILOSOPHICAL PRINCIPLES. 



SECOND EDITION, 

REVISED, WITH ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS. 




Printed for the Author bij J. M'Creery, Black- Horse- Court, 

AND SOLD BY DULAU AND CO. SOHO SQUARE; 

AND ALL OTHER BOOKSELLERS, 

1820. 



.^3 



TO THE PUBLIC. 



*e Author of the present work having con- 
itly the whole of his time engrossed by 
tfring, intended, at first, merely to have 
pted his New System of Grammar to the 
a of a work, once popular on account of its 
plicity, for the use of his own pupijs ; but, 
lie proceeded, he soon found himself under 
necessity of altering, not only the plan, but 
most of the examples, having found them, gene- 
rally, of too complicated a nature for elementary 
instruction. He ventures to flatter himself, that, 
in simplifying, in a great degree, both the theory 
and the practice of Grammar, he may hope to 
attract the attention of the scholar, as well as of 
the student, towards a performance which has 
no particular claim to their attention, otherwise 
than as it may enliven and make easy the diffi- 
cult and forbidding toil of elementary study. 



IV 

1 



Of the learned, if any such should honour this 
performance by a perusal, he craves indulgence 
for the errors, unavoidable in a work written 
under such circumstances ; to readers of this 
description the Preface, he trusts, will be found 
to offer a very serious subject for their consi- 
deration; that of rendering the elements of lan- 
guage an interesting study, which has hitherto 
been, to almost all, a source of uneasiness and 
of labour through many years of life. By the 
simple and philosophic process of accounting 
to the pupil for the use of every word in each 
sentence, the burthen will be lightened, and a 
rapid improvement be the certain consequence. 



PREFACE. 



After the great number of Grammars which issue yearly 
from the press, and the little advantage resulting from 
them, if we consider how very few people obtain a true 
grammatical knowledge of a language through their means, a 
doubt may naturally arise, whether in reality, these works are 
well calculated to convey that knowledge which is expected 
to be derived from them. 

That the knowledge of grammar is in itself a useful and 
indispensable acquirement, no man in his senses has, 01* 
ever will attempt to deny ; but if, on the one hand, all are 
agreed upon the utility of this science, on the other, there 
is a great variance of opinion as to the best mode of teach- 
ing it ; so much so., that, after reading a great deal on this 
subject, the mind is more unhinged, the ideas more con- 
fused, and the knowledge more obscured than before. 

What inference then can be drawn from this undeniable 
truth ? — That grammar, a necessary requisite to every well- 
educated person, is generally taught in too obscure and 
metaphysical a maimer, to come within the comprehension 
of the learner ; that most grammarians, by theoretic and 
idle subtleties, have darkened light itself, buried reason, 
as it were, under the weight of authority, and, having der- 
prived us of our only sure guide in human science, there 

a3 



VI 

must ensue, as is really the case, much obscurity and un- 
certainty in all their works ; that they themselves, lost in 
their conjectures, are reduced to give us their vague re- 
marks for rules, their presumptuous assertions for facts, 
their errors for the results of truth. 

But, it will perhaps be said, were it not for these 
grammars we should be in greater darkness still ; this may 
be true ; for it is certain, that sparks of light issue now 
and then from such works ; these sparks, therefore, ought 
to be carefully saved, and brought together into one focus, 
to produce a body of light sufficiently strong to guide us 
through the paths of this winding and tortuous labyrinth, 
through which the human mind has too often wandered 
and strayed. The object then of this work is avowedly to 
simplify the theory of grammar, as far as it is suscepti- 
ble, in order to render the practice of it more easy, and 
consequently more attractive ; far then from affecting a 
display of new expressions, very often void of meaning, 
the author has rejected all that are unnecessary, and will 
endeavour, to the best of his capacity, to make those 
plainly understood, which, sanctioned by reason and ages, 
are indispensable to convey their pure sense into the minds 
of learners. 

If the above remarks be applicable to grammars in 
general, how much more so with regard to those which 
are intended to give the knowledge of any other language 
than our own vernacular tongue ? The attempt to teach 
another language by free translations, as is universally the 
case, is so preposterous, that, torture it as you will, such 



Vll 

a work must necessarily appear replete with contradictions 
and errors, through which the learner is condemned to wade 
for years, before his mind can unravel the mystery, if he be 
ever able to accomplish this labour. 

A practical grammar, therefore, the object of which is, 
and can only be, to teach us how to compose in a foreign 
language, must pre-suppose, as a foundation to this super- 
structure, the exact knowledge of the words of that lan- 
guage, not according to those with which they may happen 
to correspond in a free translation, as is the case in gram- 
mars, which meaning may alter every moment, but ac- 
cording to the indelible and constant image they offer to 
the mind of the well-informed native ; in other words, he 
who wants to compose in a foreign language, must first 
have a just idea of every word he is to use, a knowledge 
which can never be obtained by grammars or diction- 
aries, (works which tend, in proportion to their size and 
bulk, to confuse), but from literal and grammatical trans- 
lations, the only sure means of arriving at the truth, 
and most certainly the speediest ; but let it be understood, 
that these translations, to deserve the appellation of gram- 
matical, ought to convey scrupulously, that is, without any 
deviation, at least as far as possible, the genuine meaning 
and grammatical arrangement of the author translated ; 
and not imperfectly, as the literal translations of the 
Classics, for instance, which translations are neither pure 
English nor pure Latin, being a mixture of both idioms, 
and forming only a kind of vitiated English, which the young 
learner is too apt to imitate in his best compositions; 



vm 

hence the just observation; that many youths leave college 
without being able to express themselves decently in their 
mother tongue, an evil which might be easily obviated, 
were they to admit, in the instruction of youth, of the ne- 
cessity of two translations, the one literal and grammatical, 
which could never be mistaken for good English ; the 
other free and unshackled, which would soon accustom 
them to give full scope to their judgment and taste. This 
is perhaps the best opportunity to shew how prejudicial to 
learning is the opinion of such as conceit, that a sentence, 
unusual in their own tongue, must be accounted absurd on 
that very score ; as if the mode, nearly infinite, of expressing 
human thoughts, were to be confined to our partial view of 
the subject ; rather let the contrary opinion be as prevalent 
as possible, that each language, out of that mode, almost 
infinite, of expressing our thoughts, may chuse forms often 
peculiar to itself, which it is the object of the learner to 
acquire by the quickest possible means. 

Now, can it be done more speedily than by the literal 
and grammatical translations we here recommend to a dis- 
cerning public. In fine, what is required for the acquisi- 
tion of a language ? Two things only. The true meaning 
of each word, and its proper place in the sentence. The 
literal and grammatical translation does all this without am- 
biguity, without confusion, — We might add, without trouble. 

The necessity of literal and grammatical translations 
thus far proved, the author, in his humble opinion, pre- 
sumes to offer, as the only elementary work of this kind yet 
intended, the grammatical translation of the French phrases, 



IX 

which are to form the Key* of this Grammar, which he ten- 
ders to the public, as a compilation of plain and easy sen- 
tences at first, wherein have been avoided with peculiar 
care, unnecessary idioms, obsolete turns of phrases, (for all 
that is found in authors is not equally fit for imitation), and 
above all, lofty and far-fetched sentences, as least suited to 
works of this kind, wherein every thing ought to tend to 
make the attainment of the language clear, easy, and smooth. 
Having written and learnt a part of the Key, or the whole, 
if the pupil be very young, he may be brought to compose 
the exercises from the Grammar, provided the master pre- 
pare the exercise with his pupil, by means of the literal, in 
the Key upon the English sentences of the Grammar, which 
points forcibly to the learner the difference of expression, 
and every observation he is to attend to in the composing 
of his exercise. The general practice of letting the learners 
compose from their own heads, or at least from the recol- 



* The Public are respectfully informed, that a Key to this Grammar 
is intended to be published, containing, first, like all other works of this 
kind, the translation in French of each English sentence contained in 
the Grammar ; and annexed to it, a literal and grammatical translation 
in English of every French sentence, after the idiom of that language ; 
and long explanatory notes at the bottom of each page, to shew the 
reason and necessity of such translations; with many useful observa- 
tions, elucidatory of the principles of that language, and to be found no 
where else : a work which, it is hoped, will prove a valuable acquisition 
to English mothers of families, governesses, and others, who take a part 
in the teaching of that language; in short, to those who wish to acquire 
a sound and perfect knowledge of it, and who are not contented with 
a mere smattering. 



lection and too often misapplication of a multiplicity of 
rules from a grammar made to suit each exercise, without 
a reason assigned for such rules, is attended with the worst 
of consequences ; the first impressions being the strongest, 
and of longest standing, the student retains unavoidably 
his own mistakes before the corrections ; hence the fright- 
ful compositions of many ; whereas, by preparing and rea- 
soning his task with the pupil, there remains for him only 
to write it carefully, more with the view of fixing in the 
mind what is already learned, than of learning it ; from 
which practice he derives a great advantage, that of hardly 
ever writing bad language, and that greater one of not 
being disheartened by almost insuperable difficulties. In 
proportion as the learner improves, it becomes necessary 
to make him parse, but, at first, in English only, and word 
after word, decomposing even sometimes a word into two 
or more parts of speech, the better to make him understand 
the nature of the language and its original formation, accord- 
ing to the image each distinct word presents to the mind, 
and never mechanically, with the help of dictionaries ; and 
above all, never suffering him, when learning, to make one 
part of speech of two or more words, as is often done in 
elementary books. Whatever specious reasons may be given 
in favour of such a practice, it is most certainly attended 
with incalculable mischief to learners ; it makes them fall 
into numberless errors and contradictions, and creates in 
their minds that confusion of ideas, which is more or less 
observable in almost all grammars. 

The scholar being well grounded in the parsing of his 



XI 

own language, will, without hesitation, decide the parts of 
speech in another, by merely referring the foreign word to 
the corresponding one in his own ; hence we see again the 
advantage of strictly literal and grammatical translations, 
without which it may be fairly asserted, that no sound learn- 
ing is to be obtained. Such is the rational principle from 
which the author has never departed, and which has secured 
to him a success perhaps never equalled, if it is considered 
by how feeble an instrument it has been obtained. A most 
sincere zeal for the progress of the learner has supported 
him throughout this dry task of elementary compositions, 
as well as a strong wish of being useful to a nation for 
which he always entertained a predilection. It remains for 
an enlightened and impartial public to judge how far he has 
succeeded : their approbation will be the best reward of 
his labour. Conscious of the purity of his motives, he 
awaits their decision with respectful deference ; but he 
humbly craves the favour of an impartial and unprejudiced 
hearing : if he is often forced to deviate from opinions long 
accredited and even admitted as axioms, it is not from a 
love of novelty, but to be enabled to establish truth upon 
a solid basis, and to avoid what he censures, with some de- 
gree of foundation, in the common methods, viz. their often 
falling into contradiction with themselves. 

In order to form a just idea of a new system, upon any 
subject, it would be unfair and uncandid to judge it from 
data which this new system condemns, and which the 
author has been under the necessity of rejecting, as being 
the greatest obstacle in the pursuit of truth ; but, on the 
contrary, the impartial reader is expected to carry his in- 



XII 

diligence so far as to admit, (at least until it is proved erro- 
neous after investigation), whatever does not offend his rea- 
son, however it may his practice, and oppose the writer only 
when he falls into contradiction with himself. 

Were the present system to be judged by all such critics 
only, the author might anticipate the most encouraging re- 
ception ; and what emboldens him to speak so confidently, 
is the very favorable impression it has made for these five 
and twenty years upon the minds of his numerous pupils, 
who have bestowed upon it the most flattering encomiums — 
the more valuable, as they seemed to be the result of con- 
viction ; — for which he retains the liveliest sentiments of 
gratitude, and to whom he begs leave on this occasion to 
return his warmest and most unfeigned thanks. 

The Author has abstained designedly from giving rules 
on Pronunciation, because experience proves that those 
foreigners who bestow most pains upon the application of 
such rules, succeed often least, and that it can be acquired 
much more quickly, and more safely, by imitating well edu- 
cated natives. 

N. B. To accommodate the persons who would wish 
to be instructed in this system, farther than can well be 
done by books, Mr. Racine and Son give lessons at home 
and abroad, on moderate terms. As to those Ladies and 
Gentlemen who do not want any lessons, and may be de- 
sirous to have a key to this grammar upon the plan herein 
announced, Mr. R. begs of them to notify it by letter, (post 
paid) directed to his house, No. 84, Dean Street, Soho 
Square, with their ow 7 n address. — The price of the Gram- 
mar is 5s, bound. The Key will be 7s. bound. 



Xlll 



TABLE OF THE CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

Dedication to the Public - - - iii 

Preface ------- v 

Introduction -------1 

Parts of Speech ------ 2 

General Explanation - 3 

CHAPTER I. 
Of Articles -------5 

CHAPTER II. 

Of Nouns - - - - - - -11 

Declension of Nouns ------ 12 

Of Genders ------- i&. 

Of Numbers ------- ift. 

Of Cases - - 13 

Remarks on Nouns Adjective - - - 19 

Concordance of Nouns Adjective 20 

Degrees of Quality or Accidence 25 

Of Numbers as Adjectives - - - - 29 

CHAPTER III. 

Of Pronouns -------37 

§ 1. Of Pronouns personal - - i&. 



XIV 



PAGE 



Rules for placing personal Pronouns 40 

§11. Of Pronouns possessive 42 

^ III. Of Pronouns demonstrative 46 

§ IV. Of Pronouns relative - - • - - 60 



CHAPTER IV. 
Of Participles - -58 

CHAPTER V. 

Of Verbs 

Conjugation of Verbs - • ' ' - 
Of Moods 

Of the Indicative Mood - 

Of the Imperative Mood - - 

O/^Ae Optative Mood - 

Of the Subjunctive Mood - 

Of the Infinitive Mood - 

Cy Tenses - 

Q/~ £Ae Present ------- 

Of the Past ------- 

Of the Future ------- 

O/* £^e Tenses of the Optative Mood - - - 

Of the Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood 

Of Numbers and Persons - 

Of the Number of Conjugations _ _ - 

Conjugation of the Verb Etre, To be 

General Observation ------ 

Conjugation of the Verb Avoir, To have - 
Remark on the Verb Avoir - 
Of the first Conjugation, ending in er 
Of the second Conjugation } ending in ir 
Of the third Conjugation, ending m oir 
Of the fourth Conjugation \ 9 ending in re 



XV 



rxae 



121 

126 
J 56 



Conjugation of the most irregular Verb, ending 
in er - . . ' s 

Irregular Verbs of the second Conjugation in ir~ 
Irregular Verbs of the third Conjugation in oir 

Irregular ferbs of the fourth Conjugation in re 176 

Conjugation of a Reflective Verb - . o! 

Conjugation of a Reciprocal Verb - . q«H 

Of Impersonal Verbs ... tZ 

Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb y avoir - \b. 



247 



CHAPTER VI. 

Of Adverbs - 

An alphabetical list of English Adverbs that have 

no corresponding ones in French, Letter A. - 248 

Continuation of the Adverbs . Letter B Zll 

Continuation of the Adverbs . L etter B ' o\ 

Continuation of the Adverbs - Letter g' - Sfi 

Continuation of the Adverbs - Letter I ' o«. 

Continuation of the Adverbs - Letter L. I 264 

Continuation of the Adverbs - Letter P . St 

Continuation of the Adverbs - Letter S o,A 

Continuation of the Adverbs - Letter T ' oVl 

Continuation of the Adverbs - Letter Vf. '. %% 

CHAPTER VII. 

O/" Prepositions 

R G^ivTca;: p y osit i m »*> < * £ 

i^ o/f/w Prepositions for the Accusative Case - SS 

^rjcsonthe preceding Prepositions . SI 

fe„ 0/ l ^ P l £ P 6 ^nsfor the Ablative Case - 2Q^ 

Remarks on the preceding P repositions -_ fg 



280 

$. 

83 
B7 
288 



XVI 



CHAPTER VIII. 



Of Conjunctions 

Remarks on the Conjunctions 



PAGE 

295 



CHAPTER IX. 



Of Interjections 



297 



CHAPTER X. 

Of Adverbial Expressions 



299 



CHAPTER XI. 

Containing a List of English Verbs and Idioms 

requiring to be turned otherwise in trench 
Appendix - 
Conclusion 



307 
330 
331 



ERRATA. 



Page 36, 

— 43, 

— 43, 

— 43, 

— 49, 

— 51, 

— 55, 

— 60, 

— 62, 

— 92. 

— 101, 

— 118, 

— 175, 

— 191, 

— 291, 

— 263, 

— 307, 



instead of memoir e, m. read memoir e, f. 

instead of e, read —-— e. 

instead of propriety read proprete. 

instead of epouse, read epouse. 

instead of ricolte, read recolte. 

of the Exercise, instead of ce qu ilsvculeuf, 



under Hue 13, 
under line 5, 
under line 7 , 
underline 17. 
under line 10, 
under line 8 

unTerl^f^Sstfeadof trap. adj. read trap, adv. 
under Se 14 insta of «#*«, read *#««. 
under line 10, insteau of fltwir, read twr. 
Hue 8 of the Exercise, instead of sung read sa^. 
under line 14, instead of Tel, read tel. 
?,nS£ 1 ne 1. instead of essaj/e, read ewuye. 
underline £ instead of ridtani., read «nfl»*. 
line 1, instead of /tim read he. 

iustead of CAopfer XXX. read CA<*pf«r XX. 



A NEW 

THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL 

jfrencf) Grammar. 

INTRODUCTION. 

Grammar is the art of rightly expressing our thoughts by 
words or writing. 

Grammar is of two kinds, general and particular. 

General grammar considers language in itself, and ex- 
plains those principles which are common to every tongue. 

Particular Grammar applies these common principles to 
a particular language, and furnishes certain rules and obser- 
vations which are either mediately or immediately deducible 
from them. 

A grammar of the French Tongue must be formed agree- 
ably to the best established usage, and even those erroneous 
modes of expression, to which time has given its sanction. 
It has therefore for its object, in common with all other 
grammars, the consideration of letters, syllables, words, and 
sentences. 

In the French alphabet there are twenty-five letters, viz. 
a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k,* 1, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, 
x, y, z. 



* The K, is but of late a French letter, for it was to be found before 
only in foreign words ; they write of late the beginning of several of 
their names of measure by the letter K, as Kilogramme. 

B 



Six of these are vowels or voices, viz. a, e, i, o, u, y : 
the others are consonants, because sounded together, and 
by means of some vowel heard before or after it. 

A syllable, whether composed of one or more letters, re- 
quires in the pronunciation no more than a single impulse 
of the voice, as, I, thou, he, &c. Te, tu, M, fyc. 

A word is a part of speech which may consist of one, 
two, three, or more syllables forming one meaning ; as, a, 
the, one, many, several, &c. 

A sentence or phrase is an assemblage of words duly ar- 
ranged, so as to form a sense more or less complete. Ex- 
amples : 

You sing very well. Vous chant ez tres bien. 

I met your sister yesterday Je rencontrai hier voire 
in the street. saiur dans la rue. 

A Period may consist of several phrases, either single or 
compound, depending on one another, to form a complete 
sense : each part of the period is called a member of the 
period. Examples : 

All men wish to be happy; Tons les hommes soupirent 

every man seeks for happi- apres le bonheur ; chaque 

ness in his own way ; but it hornme le cherche a sa ma- 

can be found only in vir- nihre; mais on ne pent le 

tue. trout er que dans la vertu. 

A discourse or speech is an assemblage of sentences or 
phrases, and periods joined together, and arranged accord- 
ing to the rules of language. 

PARTS OF SPEECH. 

There are in the French language nine different sorts of 
words generally called parts of speech, viz. 

1. The Article, IJ Article. 

2. The Noun, Le Norn. 

3. The Pronoun, Le Pronom. 



4. The Participle, Le Participt. 

5. The Verb, Le Verbe. 
fi. The Adverb, L Adverbe. 

7. The Preposition, La Preposition. 

8. The Conjunction, La Conjunction. 

9. The Interjection, L' Interjection. 

Five of them are declinable, that is, they admit of varia- 
tions in their endings ; these are the Article, the Noun, the 
Pronoun, the Participle, and the Verb. The four last, as 
they never vary their terminations, are therefore called in- 
declinable. 

GENEPcAL EXPLANATION. 

The Articles are little words used with nouns to deter- 
mine the extent of their signification, and which in French, 
help to know the gender of the substantives to which they 
are occasionally attached. These in French are, Le } La, 
Les, in English, The. 

TJti, une, is strictly the adjective, one, often rendered bj 
a, or an. As to de and a, they are never articles, but the 
prepositions meaning of ami from, to or at; they are some- 
times detached, oftener joined with the articles, as in du, 
des; au, aux, meaning of the, to the, sing, and plural. 

The Noun, in general, is a word which expresses any 
thing which is the object of discourse, as, wood, bois; ink, 
encre ; wise, sage ; grand, grand. 

The Pronoun is a word which calls to mind the idea of 
the noun. 

I met your master, and I Tai rencontre votremaitre 7 
spoke to him of you. et je lui at parte de vous. 

The word vous is used to call to mind the name or noun 
understood by this pronoun. x 

The participle partakes both of the nature of the verb, 
and of the noun substantive or adjective : as, 

Singing, chant ant, praying, priant. 

Sung, chant i, e. f. „ prayed, prie, e. f. 

b 2 



The Verb is a word which expresses essentially the state 
of the subject, whether simple, as, 

God is, Dieu est. 

or implying an act, as, 

I write a grammar, J'ecris une grammaire. 

The moderns have no passive verbs. They are supplied 
by the verb substantive to be, and a participle past : as, 

He is loved, 77 est aime. 

The Verb admits of voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and 
persons. 

The Adverb adds a new idea to the verb expressed or 
understood ; as, Speak sincerely, parlez sinctrement ; very 
good, tres bon. 

The Preposition sets forth the position of objects re- 
spectively; as, 

He is in the garden, 11 est dans le jar din. 

Come with me, Venet avec moi. 

The Conjunction connects the several parts of speech, 
as, for, car ; but, mais. Ex. 

You and I, Vous et moi. 

The Interjection is a word which expresses the affections 
of the heart, as, 

Alas, my God, Helas, mon Dieu ! 

A more particular delineation of these nine parts of 
speech, and their use in the composition of sentences or 
periods, and speeches, will be the subject of the following 
chapters. 



CHAPTER I. 

OF ARTICLES. 

There are two sorts of Articles in English: The, and ft, 
or an ; the first is rendered in French by le, la, I', for the 
singular only ; le, before a masculine noun beginning by a 
consonant, or h, aspirated, as, leroi, leheros; la, before 
feminines beginning by a consonant : /', before words be- 
ginning by a vowel, or h, mute : les before plurals. 

The same article is often blended with the prepositions 
de and a, as in the double words ; du, des; au, aux; sig- 
nifying of the or from (he, and to the, or at the, but the 
mind must never lose sight of these words being, in reality, 
two distinct parts of speech: the confounding them under 
the denomination of mere articles, is an endless source of 
errors and unintelligible rules. 

With regard to the English article a, or an, the French 
render it by the adjective un, une, one ; so that in all in- 
stances where the adjective, one, cannot be substituted for 
the article a, consistently with the sense of the passage, it 
cannot be used at all, but must be either suppressed or 
turned by the article the, according to the genius or idiom 
of that language. 

The definite article must be placed before all nouns in 
French used in a general sense, or denoting a whole species 
of objects, though the English admit of none in this case • 

Man is an animal. L'homme est un animal. 

Likewise before countries of some extent, or importance 
to the French ; as, Corsica, La Corse ; because it belongs 
to France This article being declinable in French, and 
consequently admitting of variations, is to be repeated with 
3very substantive Id a sentence, and to agree with each in 
gender and number ; as, 





Bread, meat, and water, Le pain, la viande, et Veau, 
are things necessary to life. sont des ckoses necessaires 

a la vie. 

On the contrary, this article, though expressed in Eng- 
lish, must be omitted in French before substantives joined 
to a former one as accident, that is, in the sense of an ad- 
jective or title ; as, 

John, the son of Peter. Jean, jils de Pierre. 

He resides in London, the II demeure a Londres, 

capital of England. Capita/e de V Angleterre. 

In several instances the definite article is expressed nei- 
ther in French nor in English, before substantives, when 
they are used in an infinite or illimited sense, in which case 
they correspond with the infinitives of verbs ; as, 

Honor, reputation, credit, Honneur, reputation, cre-> 
he has lost every thing ; he dit, il a tout perdu ; il n'a 
has neither money nor friends, ni argent ni amis. 

TABLE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, EITHER DE- 
TACHED OR JOINED BY CONTRACTION; WITH 

one of the two prepositions — de, of or from ; 
and a, to or at. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Masc. Fern. Before a vowel and h mute. Masc. and Fern. 
The Le, la, V les. 

Of the Du, de la, de V des. 

To the Au, a la, a V aux. 

exercises upon the preceding rules. 

Virtue is estimable. The carriage is at the door. — 

z'crtu, f. est. * voiture, f. 'parte, f. 



* The words that are spelt alike in both languages, will be marked 

by a line, thus with an m. or an f. to denote the gender, if 

names of inanimate things. 



The diligent love study. The lazy hate trouble. — 

aiment, v. *etude, f. paresseux haissent peine, f. 

The life of Man is very uncertain. Peace and 

vie, f. *homme % incertaine, adj. f. 

crime cannot dwell under the same roof. • 

nepeuvent, v. demeurer, v. toit, m. 

Leave the child here. — — Content in this world is 

Laissez, v. ici, adv. tement, m. monde, m. 

the reward of the virtuous. She is gone to church. 

recompense, f. vertueux. allee : pp. eglise, f. 

We speak of America and not of Europe. — I hate ceremony. 

parlons,v. iquenonpas , f . hais,v> nie, f. 

The wall is very thick.— Beer (is not) 

muraille, f. epaisse, adj. f. Biere ?i'est pas 

wholesome after milk and fruit. iEneas the son of 

saine,adj.f. lait, m. m. Enee fils 

Anchises, and the father of lulus was surnamed the 
Anchise, pere fat, v. 

Pious. The children are gone out with the maid.— 

Pieux,- enfans, pi. sortis, pp. servants 

I have passed through France, Spain, and Portugal. — 
J' ai. v. par. pr. Espagne, f. -, m. 

Charity is the love of God and of men.- The 

te, f. amour, m. Dicu, homme. 

servant has found the letter on the table in the 
a, v. dans, pr. 

parlour.— The dictionary is in the drawing-room, 

salle, f. salon, m. 

and the grammar is in the closet. He expects two 

maire, f. cabinet, m. attend, v. 



* They are words of one syllable only that lose the e mute before a 
vowel, or an h mute, in French. 

X The words designing substantives masculine or feminine by nature 
are not marked : the learner must be accustomed to decide in such 
cases by reflection, which in the learning of a language is of far greater 
use than transient memory. 



8 

of his nieces from the East Indies. Do you prefer 

nieces Oriental, adj. Inde, f. %/yk 

beer or cider to wine ? Bring the loaf and the 

biere,f. cidre,m. vin,m. Aportez,\\ pain, m. 

cheese, The meat is in the larder. The cook is 

Jromage, m. viande. f. office, m. cuisiniere, f. 

in the kitchen. The enemies have been attacked 

cuisine, f. ennemi, m. ont, v. que pp. 

in the plain, and they have fled into the woods. — 

ne, f. fui, pp. dans, pr. bois, m. 

War is the scourge of humanity.- Rome, the 

Guerre, f. Jieau, m. te, f. , f. 

capital of Italy, was once the mistress of the world.— 

le, f. fut,v.jadis,adv. maitresse ??ionde,m. 

Envy and jealousy are the failings of weak 2 minds. 1 
4 e, f, jalousie, f. defaut, m. foible, adj. esprit, m. 
Shun idleness the parent of every vice. 
Fuyez, v. paresse 9 f. mere , m. 

The words which grammarians call partitive articles, are the 
preposition de, of ; followed by the definite articles, singular 
or plural, to shew in French when part and not the whole 
of any thing or things whatsoever is meant, in which case 
the substantive is used in English without either article or 
preposition; as, Give him money and clothes — Dormez- 
lui de V argent et des habits; as if we said in English 
of the money and of the clothes. 

And then the word portion is still understood in French ; 
for th$ sentence complete is : Give him a portion of the 
money and of the clothes, taken in the most general sense 
of the w r ord. 



i) 

Table of the definite article, either detached or joined 
by contraction, with one of the two prepositions, de, of or 
from, and a, to or at. 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern, both bef. vow. Masc. and Fern. 
The Le la f* les. 

Of the Da de la de V des. 

To the Aa a la aV aux. 

EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Virtue is estimable. — The carriage is at the door. 

vertu, f. est, v. 1 votture, f, porte, f. 

— My sister will go to the Park.— -Do you like apples 
Ma, pro. scpw'% ira,x. parc,m. — Aimez,v. pommej. 

and pears ? Prefer peace of mind to riches. 

poire, f. Ptefe.ez, v. richesses, f. 

You have eaten the strawberries. — The brother, the 

Vous, pro. avez, v. mange, pp. f aise, f. fi ere 

sister, and the uncle will be here very soon. The 

sceur oncle seront, v. ici, adv. bientot, adv. 

diligent love study. — The lazy hate trouble. 

diligens,iA\* aunent,\. etude, f. paresseux ha'issent,v, peine, f. 

1 prefer the scarlet to all other colours. 

prefere, v. ecarlate, f. toutes autres couleurs, f. 

The life of man is very uncertain. Peace and 

vie,L homme tres ince taine,a.dj.f. Paix,f. 

crime cannot dwell under the same roof. 

, m. nepeuvent,\\ demeurer,x. sous,\>v. meme toit,iv. 

— Do it at your leisure. Content in 

Faites, v. le, pro. voire, pro. loisir, rn. Contentement, m. dans 

* Words of one syllable only, always lose the e mute before a vowel. 

t The words that are spelt alike in both languages will be marked by 
a line, thus : . 

t The words masc. or fern, by nature are not marked : the learner 
must be accustomed to decide those cases by reflection. 

B 3 



10 

this world is the reward of the virtuous. — She is 

cc monde,m. recompense, f. vertueux. Elle est, v. 

gone to church. We speak of America and 

allee, pp. eglise, f. Nous parlous, v. Amirique, f. 

not of Europe. — I hate ceremony. The wall 

non pas, adv. -, f. hais, v. nie, f. muraille, f. 

is very thick.- Beer (is not) wholesome 

tres, adv. epaisse, adj. f. Mere, f. rtest pas^ saine, adj. f. 

after milk and fruit. iEneas was the son of 

apres lait, m. , m. Enee etoit, v. jils 

.Anchises and Venus, and the father of lulus.— — The 

Anchise — pere Inle 

children are gone out with the nurse. — 

enfant, m. sont, v. sortis, pp. avec, pre. bonne, s.f. 

I have travelled through France and Spain. 



J'ai, ir. voyage, pp. par, pr. --, f. Espagne, f. 

Charity is the love of God and of men. 



-te, f. amour, m. Dieu homme 



The servant has found the letter on the table 

te, f. a, v. trouve, pp. lettve, f. sur 

in the parlour. — The dictionary is in the drawing-room, 
dans, pr. salle,f. dictionnaire, m. salion, m. 

and the grammar is in the closets He expects 

grammaire,f. cabinet., m. II, pro. attend, v, 

two of his nieces from the East Indies. Do you 

de&r ses niece Indes Orient ale, c ,. 

prefer beer or cider to wine? — Bring the loaf 

biere,f. ou cidre, nx. vin, m. Apporiez,v. pain,m. 

and the cheese. The meat is in the larder. The 

fromage,m. viande,f. office, m. 

cook is in the kitchen. It is reported that the 

cuidiniere, f. cuisine, f. O&rapportei v gwe 

enemies liave been attacked in the plain, ynd thut they 

o/?£, v. ete, op. plainc, f. *fr, pro. 

have fled to the mountains. — War is the scur^e of 
fid, pp. ?nontagne,f. guerre, f fleau, m. 

humanity. Rome, the capital of Italy, was 

■ *e, f. , f. k, f, fut, r. 



II 

liis cousin is a Baron. 1 will give you so much 

, donnerai, v. tant, adv. 

a hogshead. 1 will sell you this muslin for 

muid, m. vendrai, v. mousseline, f. 

five shillings an ell. A good oak - board costs 

aiine, f. chene, m. planche, f. 

eight pence a foot. 

sou, id. pied, m. 



CHAPTER II. 
OF NOUNS. 

JNouns are divided into substantives and adjectives. 

A noun-substantive is that which denotes an object sub~ 
sisting of itself. Ex. 

God, Dieu; King, Roi; House, Maison. 
A noun substantive is either proper or common. 
A noun is said to be proper if applicable to one object 
only : Ex. 

Peter, Pierre ; London, Londres. 

A noun is said to be common if applicable to all objects 
of the same kind. Ex. 
Man, Homme; King, Roi; Town, Ville; Table, Table. 

Some nouns are called collective, because they suggest 
the idea of several things collected, but they are strictly 
singular in French. Ex. People, Peuple ; Army, Armee ; 
unless allusion be made to several of the kind ; as, The 
Nations, Les Peuples ; the Armies, les Armees. 

A noun adjective is used to denote an accident * appli- 
cable to a substantive expressed or understood. Ex. good, 
bon ; red, rouge ; square, quarrc ; two, deux ; &c. 

* The word accident, substituted for the word quality, is used here 
in the peripatetic sense, that is, as embracing all adjectives whatever^, 
which the word quality is far from accomplishing. 



12 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

In nouns three things are to be considered : viz. 

The Genders, Les Genres. 

The Numbers, Les Nombres. 

The Cases, Les Cas. 

OF GENDERS. 

In French there are two Genders only, viz. the Masculine 
and the Feminine gender. 

A noun is masculine, if you find le or un before it. Ex. 

The book, Lelivre; a hat, un chapeau, &c. 
A noun is feminine, if you find la or une before it. Ex. 

The pen, La plume; a table, une table. 
But as a word is often used without any article, or with 
the article l\ whenever the substantive begins by a vowel or 
an h mute, the gender then is frequently easy to be dis- 
covered by considering that of the adjective or pronoun 
joined with it. 

OF NUMBERS. 

There are two numbers, the singular and the plural. 

The singular number speaks of one thing only ; as, the 
table, la table. 

The plural number speaks of more than one ; as, the 
tables, les tables. 

All nouns ending their singular with the letters s, x, or z y 
admit of no variation in the plural. 

All nouns compounded of an adjective and a substantive 
take the s at the end of the adjective as well as of the noun. 

My Lord, Monseigneur. 

My Lords, Messeigneurs. 

Sir, Mr. Monsieur. 

Sirs, Gentlemen, Messieurs. 

Madam, Mrs. Madame. 

Ladies, Mesdames. 

Miss, Mademoiselle. 

Misses, Mesdemoiselles. 



13 

OF CASES. 

The French, like the English, have only the two cases 
called direct cases, viz. the Nominative and the Vocative. 

The Nominative is used to name the object we speak 
of; as, 

The Brother, Le frkre; the Sister, la Sozur. 

The Vocative is used to call to, or to address a person ; as, 
Brother, come here. Mon frere, venez ici. 

The other cases, called indirect cases, are the Genitive, 
the Dative, the Accusative, and the Ablative, which the 
moderns express by means of prepositions, except the ac- 
cusative, when following a verb or participle active transi- 
tive, present or past. 

Of, de, is the preposition used for the genitive ; as, 

The Love of God. U Amour de Dieu. 

To, or at, a, for the dative ; as, 

Give that to my brother. Donnez cela a mon frhe. 
For, pour, upon, sur, &c. denote the accusative ; as, 

Do it for my sake. Faites le pour moi. 

From, de, by, par, &c. denote the ablative case ; as, 
He is returned/rom Paris. 27 est revenu de Paris. 

When two substantives are said of different things, the 
latter is always put in the genitive case in French by means 
of the preposition de, of, placed between them, and the 
definite article is added when the mind attaches on the lat- 
ter substantive also, otherwise it is not used. 

When two substantives are so connected in English as 
that the former represents the owner, and the second the 
object owned, the former of which some grammarians call 
possessive case ; # they are transposed in French, and follow 
the general rule ; as, 

God's power is infinite. La puissance de Dieu est infinie. 
* A phantom the ancients would have wondered at. 



u 

The same preposition de > of, is found in French after all 
adverbs followed by another word which belongs to them as 
their complement ; as, * 

Much money. Beancoup d y argent. 

N. B. Bien, well, invariably takes the definite article le, 

the, with the preposition of; as, 

Many friends. Bien des amis. 

Note likewise, that a road leading to a place, is called in 
French, the road of that place ; as, 

The Bath road. La route de Bath. 

EXERCISE UPON THE PRECEDING RULES. 

I have seen your uncle's house and your aunt's 

vu, pp. oncle tante 

portrait. There is Robert's brother. — Guns make 

, m. Voild,\. canon, m. font, v. 

much noise. Miss P — 's eldest sister is married. 

bruit, m. ainee, adj. mariee, pp. f. 

These children's mother is waiting in the parlour. — He 

attend, m. salle, f. 

has too much pride. They give you much trouble. 

trop, adv. orgueil,m. donnent,v. peine, f. 

— Lend me your niece's thimble.— The Prince's horses 
Pretez, v. niece, de, xn. chevaux 

are very fine.— : Your uncle's Park is very large. 

beaux, adj.pl. parc,m. grand, adj. 

The King's physicians are of this opinion. — Give me 

medecin , f. Doiinez, v. 

Eliza's pencil. — I have found William's pocket-book 
Elise crayon,m. trouve, pp. Guillaume porte-feuille, m. 

in the garden. You will find Mr. P — 's sword on his 

jar din, m. trouverez, v. epee, f. 

bed. Which is the way to Clapton? — - — —You 

Mt,m. Quelle, -pro. f. route, f. 

were taking the road to London. 
preniez, v. chemin, m. Londres, m. 



15 

maid. — There were fifty men killed, and one hundred 

femme. — II y eut tues, pp. 

and sixty wounded in the battle. She has mislaid 

blesses, pp. combat, m. egare, pp. 

her prayer-book, and her night-cap. Carry this 

prieres, f. livre,AX\. nuit, f. bonnet, m. — Portez ce 
bill to your mother. The thieves climbed 

memoir e, m. voleur, m. grimperent, v. 

over the garden-wall, and broke open the back-door 

par dessuSy pr.jardin, m. mur, m. forcerent,v. derriere porte, f. 

of the house. — They stole a gold watch with two gold 
maison, f. vole-rent, v. montre, f. 

seals. They did not see a box full of guineas that was 

cachet, m. lis ne virent pas qui etoit, v. 

close by. — Open the street-door. — Leave the child here. 

toutpres, adv. rue, f. 

De is placed after adjectives signifying dimension, as 
thick, tpais; big, gros; high, haut ; large or tall, grand; 
wide or broad, large; long, long; and deep, prqfond ; 
though there is no word between them in English ; as, 

A closet twelve feet long, and Un cabinet long de dome 
eleven broad. pieds, et large de onze. 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

This house is forty-five feet 2 high. 1 There is in 

Cette, pro. pied, m. haute, adj. 11 y a 

the front parlour a picture ten feet 2 long, 1 and eight 2 

devant salle, f. tableau, m. long, adj. 

feet 3 broad. 1 — The frame of the picture is six 2 inches 1 
large, adj. cadre, pi, pouce,m. 

broad. 1 — 1 have seen a tree a hundred 2 feet high. 1 — 
large vu, pp. arbre, m. cent pied, m. 

He has jumped over a ditch nine feet wide. — 

saute, pp. par dessuSj pr. fosse, m. large, adj . 



10 

He fell from a bridge thirty-five feet high. — This 

tomb a, v. pont, m. cinq pied, m. 

garden is two hundred and twenty paces long, and 
jar din, m. pas, m. 

forty-eight broad. — The walls of his garden are twelve feet 

mur, m. 

nine inches high, and two feet thick. The tower of 

pouce, m. epais, adj. tour, f. 

the castle is fifty-four feet six inches high, and the 

chateau, m. pouce, m. 

ditch that surrounds the castle is seventy feet broad in 
fosse, m. qui, pro. 
the widest part. — — He has a table ten feet long and 

par tie, f. a, v. 

six wide. — The windows are eight feet ten inches high, 

fenetre, f. 
and four feet two inches wide. — The walks of the gar- 

allee, f. 
den are two hundred feet long and five feet broad. — The 

bricklayers have brought a ladder forty-nine feet long. — 

macon apporte, pp. 

Make me a bench ten feet six inches long and nine inches 
JFaites, v. , banc, m, pouce, m. 

broad. — Our street is seventy feet wide, and eight 

rue, f. soixante-dix 
hundred feet long. — This well is sixty fathoms deep. 

puits, m. toise, f. 

There is another and more simple way of making the 
above exercise, which is, to turn every adjective of di- 
mension into its substantive : such as high into height, hau- 
teur; long into length, longeur ; broad into breadth, 
largeur; wide into width, largeur; thick into thickness, 
epaisseur ; deep, or profound, into depth, profondeur, &c 
Then both the words of measure, and those of dimension, 
are preceded by de, without any transposition, and the verb 
t® be is changed into to have, as, 



17 

from a bridge thirty-five feet high. — This garden is two 

pot t, m. jar 1 in, m. 

hundred and twenty paces long, and forty-eight broad. — ■ — 

pas, m. 
The walls of the garden are twelve feet nine inches high, 
mur, m. ont,v. pouce, m. 

and two feet thick. The tower of the castle is fifty- 

epais, adj. tour,£. chateau, m. 

four feet high, and the ditch that surrounds it is seventy 

fosse, m. entoure,v. soixante-dix 

feet broad in the widest part. This table is twelve feet 

par tie, f. douze, adj. 

long and six wide.-^These windows are eight feet ten 

— fenetre, f. 

inches high, and four feet two inches wide. — The 

quatre, adj. 
walks of our garden are two hundred feet long, and five 
allee, f. out, v. 

feet wide. — -The bricklayers have brought a ladder forty- 

macon, aporte, pp. echelle, f. 

nine feet long. — Make me a bench ten feet six inches 

Fa ites, v. ban c, m . 

long, and nine inches wide. — Our street is seventy feet 

neuf,ad\. a, v. 

wide and a thousand feet long. — This well is twenty 

mille, adj. puits,m. 

fathoms deep. 
toise, f. 

There is another way of making the above exercises, 
which is to bring the adjective of dimension before the ad- 
jective of number, putting the latter in the genitive case, as 
high of forty-Jive feet ; long of ten feet ; broad of eight 
feet; deep of twenty fathoms, &c. : as, 

Our hall is thirty feet Notre salle est longue de trente 
long, and fifteen wide. pieds et large de quinze. 



18 



When of two substantives joined in English by an hy- 
phen, the first denotes the use of the former, or even some 
mere appendage to it, they are transposed in French, and 
the second is put in the dative case with or without an ar- 
ticle as the passage may require. 



EXERCTSES UPON THIS RULE. 

They would do well to remove the fish-market, . and 
On feroit, v. oter, v. poisson,m.marche,xn. 

to make a north road. — Ask of that barrow-wo- 

nord,m. De?nandez,v. a, pr. brouette,f. 

man the way to the hay-market. Shut the vvine- 

chemin,m. foin,va. Fermez, v. 

cellar. — Go and fetch the ink-bottle.— Never handle 
cave,f. &* chercher,v. bouteitle,?. maniez,w 

fire-arms when you are not sure that they are not 
feu, m. armes, pi. sz/?v,adj. elles 

loaded. Gun-powder has a surprising force.— 

charge, pp. poudre, f. surprenanie, ppr. 

The milk-pot is too full. You have broken the 

lait,m. trop plein, adj. casse, pp. 

oil-jar.-- —This work-bag is very well embroidered. 

huile, f. cruclie,L sac, m. brode, pp. 

— The servant has mislaid the tinder-box, she cannot 

e, f. egare, pp. fusil, m. pent, v. 

strike a light. If you go to the iron-mon- 

nous donner, v. lumiere. chez, pr. 

ger's to-morrow, bring me a coffee-mill. — -Have 

aportez, v. cafe, xx\.moulin,m. 

you seen the new steam-boat which the engineers 

vu nouveau,&d. vapeur,f. batteau, m. ingenieur 

have invented ? — Will you come and see a corn-mill 
ont,v. Vculez,v. venir,\. ble,m. 

of a new construction? 

nouvelle, adj. — > f. 



ON NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 

Rule to form their feminine gender. 
Adjectives ending with an e mute are of both genders. 
Ex. 

A young man, Vnjeune hornme. 

A young woman, Unejeune femme. 

Adjectives ending with one of the following letters, d, e, 
i, 1, n, r, s, t, and u, form their feminine by adding e mute, 
Ex. 

Masc. Fein. 

Great, Grand, Grande. 

Polite, Poll, Po/ie. 

Loved, Aime, Aimee. 

Half, Demi, Demie. 

Naked, Nu, Nite. 

These two last adjectives are indeclinable when they pre- 
cede a substantive, but declinable when they follow it. Ex. 

A half pound, Une demi-livre. 

A pound and a half, Une livre et demie. 

Bareheaded, Nu-tete. 

Barefoot, Nu -pieds. 

There are some that double their final consonant, as 
Countryman, paysan ; Countrywoman, paysanne. 

Genteel, Gentil. Gentille.* 

Others ending by the letter c, add he to the c for the 
femin. Ex. 

White blanc, blanche. 

Frank, franc, franche. 

Dry, sec, slche. 

The four following change the c into que. Ex 
Masc. Caduc, public, turc. Fem. Caduque, publique, 
turque ; Grec keeps the c before the que, grecque. 



* Adjectives ending in al, do not double the /, for the feminine, but 
all adjectives in el, always double it, 



20 



Those ending \i\f, change f into ve. Ex. 

New, neuf, neuve. 

Artless, naif] naive, fyc. 

Adjectives ending in x, change x into %e. Ex. 
Masc. Douloureux. Fern* Douloureuse. 

The following are excepted : 





Masc. 


Fem. 


Mild, 


doitx- 


douce. 


False, 


fauXy 


fausse. 


Prefixed, 


prefix, 


prefixe. 


Reddish, 


rouXy 


rousse. 


The following are 


very irregular, an 


d cannot be 


ised under any rule, 


viz. 






Masc. 


Fern. 


Handsome, 


Beau, or bel,* 


belle. 


Benign, 


Benin, 


benigne. 


Favourite, 


Favori, 


avorite. 


Mad, 


Fou or fol, 


folle. 


Fresh, 


Frais, 


fraiche. 


Long, 


Long, 


longue. 


Malignant, 


Malin, 


maligne. 


Soft, 


Mou, or mol, 


molle. 


New, 


Nouveau, or nouvel, nouvelle. 


Old, 


Vieux, or vieil, 


vieille. 



CONCORDANCE OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 

French adjectives must agree with their substantives in 
gender, number, and case. Ex. 

The good book, Le bon livre. 

The good pen, La bonne plume. 



* Bel, fol, mol, nouvel, vieil, are used before substantives beginning 
with a vowel, or h mute. 



21 

The good books, Les bons litres. 

The good pens, Les bonnes plumes. 

N. B. If there be more than one substantive used as no- 
minative, though in the singular, the adjective is put in the 
plural ; and if of different genders, the adjective agrees with 
the masculine. 

If an adjective immediately follows more than one sub- 
stantive of inanimate things, it agrees with the last only ia 
gender and number. Ex. 

The brother, sister, ne- 
phew and niece, are all hap- 

She left the trunk, the 
closet, and the room open. 

I found the children, fa- 
ther and mother, united. 



Lefrlre, la saiur, le neveu 
et la niece, sont tous heu- 
reux. 

Elle laissa le coffre, le ca- 
binet, et la chambre ouverte. 

J'ai trouve les enfans, le 



ylre et la mere, remits. 

The placing of an adjective in a sentence. 

Some adjectives are mostly placed before their substan- 
tives, and others after them ; many adjectives can be put 
either before or after, but they then have a different sense. 

The following must be placed before. Ex. 



Fine, handsome, 


Beau* 


Brave, 


Brave. 


Good, 


Bon. 


Dear, 


Cher. 


Mean, 


Chetif. 


Bad, 


Mauvais. 


Upright, 


Galant. 


Better, 


Meilleur. 


Great, tall, 


Grand. 


Less, 


Moindre. 


Big, large, 


Gros. 


Little, small, 


Petit. 


Honest, 


Honnete. 


Holy, 


Saint. 


Young, 


Jeune. 


All, 


Tout. 


Pretty, 


JolL 


Old, 


Vieux. 


Wicked, 


Mechant. 


True, 


Vrai. 



EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING ADJECTIVES. 

Do you see that handsome woman, who is speaking 
voyez, v. faume qui, pro. park 



22 

to an old gentleman ? — He has a fine horse and a pretty 

monsieur ? cheval 

chaise. — What a fine bird ! — Your little sister deserves to 
cabriolet, m. Quel & oiseau,m. Voire, pro. meritc, v. 

be praised. — His father was a brave general and an upright 

louee, pp. etoit, v. 

man. — He is a true hermit. — You will be a great man, 

honune. C'est, v. te< serez, v. 

if you go on so. — His dog is an ugly animal. — He is a 

continuez t v.ainsi, adv. chien vilain m. 

young man who has a good heart, but a bad head piece. 

qui cceur, m. tete, f. 

Mr. C. is an honest tradesman. — The apostle Paul was a 

est, v. marchand. apotre etoit, v. 

holy man.-— My brother has bought a good clock. — They 
saint frere achete, pp. horloge, f. Us, pro. 

have lost all their money. — He has made a bad bargain. 
ont,v. perdu, pp. leur argent, m. fait, pp. ?narche,m. 

True friends are scarce. — I have met an old man who 

ami, m. rares, adj. rencontre qui 

held a hat in his hand. — This child has a very large head. 
tenoit, v. a main, f. Cet grosse tete, f. 

He is the best man in the world. — What a pretty little dog! 

du monde, m. joli, adj. 

He received a large sum of money as a reward for his great 
regut, v. grosse somme, f. en de s*s. pro. 

services, — This young horse wants to be broken in. — The 

, m. a besoin etre,\\ dompte, pp. 

good politicians are of your opinion. 

politique, m. 

Some adjectives have very different meanings according 

as they are placed before or after the substantive : as, nne 

femme sage, a wise woman • ane sage femme, a midwife ; 

tme grosse femme, a lusty woman ; une femme grosse, a 

woman pregnant. Un honncte homme, an honest man; 

un homme honnete, a civil man. Practice alone can remove 

these sorts of difficulties. With regard to most adjectives 

being used either before or after the substantive; judgment 



23 

may be guided so far as this, that the intention by placing 
the adjective first, is to form a particular class of objects ; 
whereas, placed after the substantive, it is meant only as 
the quality, or rather accident of the substantive ; hence ad- 
jectives expressing names of nations, colours, figures, forms, 
tastes, &c. must be placed after their substantives, being 
then mere accidents. The same reason may be given 
why participles must likewise follow the substantive. 

EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 

You have an English chain and a French watch. — I am 

avez, v. Anglois, adj. Francois, adj. ?nontre,f. 

reading an Italian work very entertaining. — The German 

lis, v. ouvrage,m. amusant, &(§. Allemand ', adj. 

tongue is very ancient. — The Spauish language is a fine 

langue, f. ancien, adj. Espagnol, ad}.langue,£. 

one. — The tower of London is a square building 

quarre, adj. batiment 

flanked with towers. — The English soldiers wear red coats. 

Jlanque, pp. soldat portent, v. 

Ladies generally prefer light colours to dark ones. — I 
Dame preferent,v. clair, adj. so??ibre, adj. 

have lost a white gown and a black veil. 

perdu, pp. blanc. adj. robe, f. noir, adj. voile, m. 

Your sister has an harmonious voice. — I value much a 
Votre, pro. a eux, adj. voix. f. estime, v. 

faithful servant. — Do you like green pease with 

Jidele, adj. domestiquz. — Aimez-vous vert, &d).pois, m. avec, pr. 
boiled mutton ? — Bring me two pounds and a half of 
bouilli mouton, m. Aportez, v. livre, f. Jewz^adj. 

cherries, and half 2 a 1 pound 3 of gooseberries. — They met 
cerise, f. groseiile. f. eure?it,v. 

with a kind reception, and they found an entertaining 
civil, adj. accueil, m. agreable,adj. 

company.— We reside in a cold country. — - 

compagnie, f. demeurons, v. dans froid 9 d.&].pays, m. 



24 

You will leave the windows and the door open. Will 

laisserez, v. fenetre, f. porte, f. ouverte, adj. 

you have the wing of a roasted fowl ? — I prefer a round 
aile, f. roti, pp. poule, f. pre/ere rond 

table to a square one. — Have you read the Roman 
-- — , f . quarre, adj. /a, pp. Romaine 

history? Never make a rash vow. Mrs. 

histoire, f. Ne j ait es jamais temeraire vazu, m. 

B. is an agreeable lady. — I do not like the grey colour.— 

agr cable dame. — Je n'aimc pas gris, adj. 

My Brother says he heard a very tragical history which 

dit, v. tragique, adj. 

grieved every body present. 
affiigea, v. 

When two or more adjectives belong to one substantive 
as accidents, they are to be placed after the substantive with 
the conjunction and before the last ; and if an adjective be 
used in a sentence without a substantive, such an adjective 
must always be rendered in French by the masculine gen- 
der ; and besides, if any adjective denoting colour be used 
as the proper name of a man, this adjective must always be 
preceded by the definite article, 

EXERCISE UPON THESE RULES. 

Mrs. C. is a just, wise, and tender mother.— Mr. 

juste, adj. sage tendre, adj. mere. 

White's daughter has married a sincere, loyal, and gene- 

Blanc fille epouse, pp. — 

rous man. — I have a pupil of a solid, bright, and lively 
reux eleve, c. g. — de brillant vif, 

genius. — The wicked shall be punished in this 

esprit, m. mechant, adj. sercnt, v. puni, pp. ce 

world, or in the next. — — Miss P. is a young, 
monde, m. autre, adj. Mile. jeune, adj. 

handsome, and w T ell made lady. — She is betrothed to 
belle, adj. bien faite, pp. jiiincee, pp. 



/ 



25 

a sober, virtuous, and amiable man. — The good 

sohre, adj. vertueux, adj. aimahle, adj. bans 

shall be rewarded hereafter. — Miss Black's brother is 

recompenses par la suite. Mile. Noir frere 
returned from the army. — The unfortunate deserve to be 
revenu, pp. armce, f. malheureux d'etre 

pitied. A wise, prudent, and sensible woman is 

plaints, pp. sage, adj. prudent, adj. sensee, adj. 

a treasure. — An active, industrious, and clean ser- 

tresor,m. act if, adj. eux, adj. propre domes- 

vant (is seldom found). — The good ought to be our 
tique se trouve rarement. doivent, v. 

models. — > — Mrs. Grey has 2 told 3 me 1 that you were 
modele, m. Gris, adj. dit me, pro. etiez, v. 

a true, sincere, and staunch friend of the unfortunate. 
vraig adj. ferine, adj. ami, m. malheureux. 

DEGREES OF QUALITY, OR RATHER OF ACCIDENCE. 

Adjectives and adverbs are the only parts of speech that 
will admit of different degrees of quality, or more properly, 
of accidence. 

There are three degrees of quality or accidence. 
1 The Positive, Le Positif 

Q The Comparative, Le Comparatif 

3 The Superlative, Le Superlatif 

The Positive merely lays down the quality or accident : 
ex. pretty, joli ; lovely, aimable. 

The Comparative refers to the degree or stage of the ac- 
cident, and shews its equality, excess or defect, with the 
positive, and is therefore of three sorts. 
1 . The comparative by equality, Le comparatif d'egalite. 
l 2. The comparative by excess, Le comparatif' d'exch. 
3. The comparative by defect, Le comparatif de defaut. 
The comparative by equality is formed by placing the ad- 
verb aussi, followed by que, expressed by twice as, or so 
and as in English, before an adjective. 

c 



26 

My brother is as learned Monfrere est aussi savant 
us you, and yet is not so old que vous, et cependant il 
as you. nest pas aussi age que vous. 

The comparative by excess is formed by placing the ad- 
verb plus, more, before an adjective. 

Miss A. is more prudent M. etle A. est plus prudent e 
han Miss B. que M elle B. 

The comparative by defect is formed by placing the ad- 
verb moins, less, before an adjective, or aussi with the ne- 
gation ne . . .pas, not, or ne . . . ni, neither, before it. 

Your cousin is less noble Voire cousin est moins 
than you. noble que vous. 

My father is not so rich a,s Mon pere nest pas aussi 
yours. riche que le voire. 

It must be observed, that in sentences in which the 
above adverbs more or less are repeated, to express a com- 
parison, the definite article the preceding either, is sup- 
pressed in French. 

The more a thing is diffi- Plus une chose est difficile, 
cult, the more honorable it is. plus elle est honorable. 

The above comparative adverbs, aussi, plus, and moms, 
must be repeated in French before each adjective and ad- 
verb. The rule is the same for the adverbs forming the 
superlative ; they must be repeated before each. 

N. B. The three following adjectives are comparatives 
of themselves : better, meilleur ; worse, pire ; less, moin- 
dre; instead of plus bon, plus mauvais, plus petit ; the first 
of which is never French, the two others are often used. 

The superlative expresses the highest degree of any qua- 
lity or accident. There are two kinds of superlatives. 
The superlative relative, which expresses the quality or ac- 
cident of a substantive above all others of the same kind. 
In this case the definite article le, la, les, single, or joined 
to one of the two prepositions de and a, of and to, precedes 



27 

the adverbs, most, plus ; less, moiris ; best, mieux ; or the 
comparatives, better, meilleur ; less, moindre ; worse, pire. 
Ex. 

Your sister is the hand- Votre saur est la plus 
somest and best woman in belle et la meilleure femme 
the town. de la ville. 

The superlative absolute expresses the quality or accident 
of a substantive in its highest degree. This is done by 
placing one of the adverbs tres, forty bien, very ; infini- 
ment, infinitely ; before an adjective. Ex. 

Your bird is very pretty. Votre oiseau est tr&s, fort, 

(or) bien joli. 

God is infinitely good. Dieu est infiniment bon. 

When any of the comparatives, by excess or defect, are 
preceded by one of the possessive pronouns adjective* 
mon, ton, son, notre, votre, leur, &c. they become super- 
latives, as if they had the definite article. 

You are my best friend. Vous ites mon meilleur 

ami. 



EXERCISE UPON THE DEGREES OF QUALITY, 

OR ACCIDENCE, AND THE THREE COMPARATIVES. 

He is not so studious as his brother. — Miss Maria 
est, v. ne... pas studieux, adj. son frere Marie 

is handsomer, but more proud than her sister. — I am 

orgueilleux sa, pro. sceur. Je suis, v. 

not so tali as you. My father is as brave as yours — I 

; ne. ..pas grand vous. Mon pere le votre, pr. 

think his sister is more covetous than he. — Nothing is 
\pense, v. sa, pro. avare, adj. ltd, pro. Rien rtest 



• It will be proved in the Key that these words ought not to be 
called pronouns. 

C 2 



28 

more pleasing to the mind than the light of 

agreable, adj. esprit lumiere, f. 

truth. — She is more polite than her daughter; 

verite, f. Elle, pro. plus poli, adj. sa, pro. fille 

but her daughter is not so revengeful as she. — I am 
nest, pas. vindicatif, adj. 

your most humble servant. It often happens that 

ires, adv. serviteur, m. 

the richer men are, the more covetous they are. 

riche, adj. avare, adj. 

My friend has a very beautiful country house. — 

Mon, adj. ami a. v. camp ague, f. maison, f. 

The vine is one of the most useful gifts of Providence. 

Vigne,f. utile, adj. don, in. f. 

Nothing is so lovely as virtue, and nothing is so 
Rien riest airnable 

desirable as wisdom. Paris is not so populous as 

> adj. sagesse, f. > m. peuple, adj. 

London. — My best friend is dead. My daughter is 

Londres. mart, adj. fille 

older than your son by two years.— Virtue is the most 
plus agee, adj. fils de, pr. an, m. plus 

precious thing in the world. Mrs. B. is the hand- 

precieux, adj. chose, f. du monde, m. 

somest woman in England. — The lion is the strongest 

femme de Angleterre. , m. fort, adj. 

and most courageous of all animals. Miss P. is 

courageuv, adj. animal, m. 

milder, politer, and more affable than any of her 

doux, adj. poli, adj. — , did], que aucune ses 

sisters. — Your nephew is taller than you by the 

neveu grand, adj. 

whole head. — If France were as rich as England, it 
tout , adj. tete, f. riche, adj. ce 

would be the best country in the world. 
seroit, v. pays, m. monde, m. 



29 



OF NUMBERS AS ADJECTIVES. 

There are two kinds of numbers; 1st, the cardinal or 
fundamental numbers, which simply tell the number of the 
things spoken of; viz. 



One, 


Un. 


Two, 


Deux. 


Three, 


Trois. 


Four, 


Quatre. 


Five, 


Cinq. 


Six, 


Six. 


Seven, 


Sept. 


Eight, 


Huit. 


Nine, 


Neuf. 


Ten, 


Dix. 


Eleven, 


Onze. 


Twelve, 


Douze. 


Thirteen, 


Treize. 


Fourteen, 


Quatorze. 


Fifteen, 


Quinze. 


Sixteen, 


Seize. 


Seventeen, 


Dix-sept. 


Eighteen, 


Dix-huit. 


Nineteen, 


Dix-neuf. 


Twenty, 


Vingt. 


Twenty-one, 


Vingt-un. 


Twenty-two, 


VingUdeux. 


Twenty-three, &c. 


Vingt-trois, fyc 


Thirty, 


Trente. 


Thirty-one, 


Trente-un. 


Thirty-two, &c* 


Trente-deux. 


Forty, 


Quarante. 


Fifty, 


Cinquante. 


Sixty, 


Soixante. 


Sixty-one, 


Soixante-vn. 


Sixty-two, 


Soixante-deux. 



30 



Seventy, 

Seventy-one, 

Eighty, 

Eighty-one, 

Eighty-two, 

Ninety, 

Hundred, 
si or one Hundred and one, 

Two hundred, 

Three hundred, 

Nine hundred, 
a or one Thousand, 

Two thousand, 

Three thousand, 
si or one Hundred thousand, 

Nine Hundred thousand, 

A million, 



Soixante-dix. 

Soixante-onze. 

Quatre-vingt. 

Quatre-vingt-un. 

Quatre-vingt-deux. 

Quatre-vingt-dix. 

Cent. 

Cent-un. 

Deux-cents. 

Trots cents. 

TSeuf cents. 

Mille. 

Deux mille. 

Trois mille. 

Cent mille. 

Neitf cents mille* 

TJn million. 



These numbers are invariable in their form, except 
vingt, twenty ; cent, hundred ; and million, a million ; 
which take an s in particular cases. 

It is to be observed, that the cardinal numbers, cent, 
mille, never admit of the article prefixed to them in 
French. 



I have spoken to him, a 
hundred, a thousand times. 



Je lui ai parle cent fois, 
m\l\efois. 



Mille is written mil only when it begins the date of a 
year, as the year 1815, ran mil-huit-cent-quinze. 

The cardinal numbers must be used in French when 
naming the days of the month, though the ordinal be used 
in English, as, the second, the eleventh of May, le deux, 
le onze de Mai. They only say, the first of June, &c. le 
premier de Juin, &c; also with names of sovereigns. 

2d. The ordinal numbers, thus called from specifying 
the order of things, viz. 

The first, Le premier. 



31 

The second, Le second. 

The third, &c. Le troisieme, &c. 

These ordinal numbers, except the two first, are inva- 
riably formed from the cardinal numbers, by adding the 
termination ieme, answering to the ending th in English, 
to every cardinal number, from which the final e mute is 
taken out where it is found ; as trente, thirty \ trentieme, 
thirtieth. 

These ordinal numbers are declined with articles, when 
placed before their substantives ; but with no articles when 
they follow the substantive, as in quoting a chapter, article, 
or page, &c. 

N. B. The custom has been adopted in French of calling 
Charles the fifth, Charles Quint; and Sixtus the fifth, Sixte 
Quint ; but the word Quint , used instead of Cinq, is ap- 
plied to these two personages only. 

EXERCISE ON THE NUMBERS, 

CARDINAL AND ORDINAL. 

I have met on the road three men, four women, 
rencontre, pp. route, f. 
and six children. — He brought me three letters from the 

enfant. apporta, v. lettres, f. 

country ; the third was for a friend of mine. — He has 
campagne, f. etoit, v. 

five hundred guineas at his disposal.— — The fourth of 

disposition, f. 
June is the King's birth-day.— The taking of the Bastille 
Juin, m. prise, f. 

was on the fourteenth of July, one thousand seven hun- 

Juillet, m. 
dred and eighty-nine. — Spring begins on the twenty-first 

Printcms, ni. 
of March. — There were more than a hundred thousand 
Mars, m. II y avoit, v. de 



32 

men assembled. — When he died, he was twenty- 

mourut, v. avoit, v. 
six years old. — My nephew is not yet twenty-one years old. 

neveu 
I shall set out on the eighteenth of next month. 

partirai, v. prochain, adj. 

Summer begins on the twenty-second of June. — He 
Ete, m. commence, v. Juin, m. 

gives the tenth part of his fortune to the poor. — Lewis 
partie, f. pauvre. Louis 

the fifteenth was only five years old when he came to the 

an, m. monta, v. 

throne of France.— We read in Telemachus, book the 

lisons, v. le Telemaque 
seventh, page one hundred and fourteen, that Mentor 

pushed Telemachus into the water, and threw himself 

poussa, v. Telemaque jeta, v. 

into it immediately after him.—- George the Third is in his 

y aussitot, adv. 
seventy-eighth year.— Charles the fifth was very powerful. 
soixante-dix-kuitieme. puissant ,adj . 

Autumn begins on the twenty-third of September, 

Automne 3 m. — Jre,m. 

winter on the twenty-third of December. 
hiver, m. bre, m. 

BECAPITULATORY EXERCISES ON ALL THE PRE- 
CEDING RULES. 

Envy and jealousy are two odious vices.— The rich 

Envie, f. jalousie, f. odieux, adj. 

very often forget the poor.* — Charity is a divine virtue. 

oublient, v. te, f. 

Patience and time are the best remedies of sorrow. 

terns, m . ch agrin, m . 

The Irish poor live mostly on milk and potatoes, 

surtout, adv. lait, m. pomme deterre, f. 



33 

and they seldom taste meat. — Bring the pepper, 

goutentj v. poivre, m. 

the mustard, and the oil. Pride is generally the 

moutarde, f. huile, f. Orgueil, m. 

effect of ignorance. — The desire of pleasing God was al- 
ways the motive of the conduct of the saints. — I found 
motif, in. conduite, f. J'ai trouve 

the window and the door open. Good faith is the only 

ouvert, pp. foi, f. 

tie of societies. — I have bought silk stockings at fifteen 
lie??, m. has, m. 

shillings a pair. He sold yesterday thirty dozen of 

■ .V - s gj f. vend it, v. A/er. douzaine, f. 

Champaign for five guineas a dozen. — Iron, steel, and 
Champagne, f. „ Fer, m. acier, m. 

brass are more useful than gold and silver. — The 
cuhre, m. utile, adj. or, m. 

smith has mended the lock; it shuts and 

serrurier raccommode, pp. fer me, v. 

opens now very well. — The study of grammar 

ouvre, v. maintenant, adv. etude, f. maire, f. 

would neither be so dry nor so dull as it is, if it w r ere 
ne...ni sec 

taught properly. —If you wish to succeed, above all, 

enseignee comme ilfaut. reussir, v. surtout 

have patience and perseverance. — A good conscience is to 
ayez, v. 
the soul what health is to the body. — Riches are 

ame, f. ce que sante,L corps, m. Kichesses,^. 

seldom the reward of talent. — Religion, commerce, and 

rarement recompense , m. 

arms are instructions proper for a young prince. — 

armes, pi. . f, propre 

From Dover one can see the coast of France. — 

Be Douvres on, pro. peut, v. voir,\\ cote, f. , f. 

The finest cloihs approach silk in beauty, and 
drapsj m. approche?it, v. soie, f. 

c 3 



34 

surpass it in wear. — Too many people prefer 

surpassentyV. la en duree,f. Trop, adv. gens preferent, v. 
gain to honesty. -—He is a knight of the order of the 

, in. honnetete,f. % chevalier ordre 

golden fleece, and not a knight of the Garter. — The 
d'or, m. toison,i. Jarretiere,i. 

eldest son of the kings of France bears the title of 
aine, adj. fils porter, v, titre 

Dauphin, — < — The last Dauphin was acknowledged as 

dernier fut, v. reconnu, pp. 

Lewis the seventeenth by all the royalists after the death 

mort. f. 
of his father.— He returned from the East Indies in four 

revint, v. Oriental, adj. 

months and twenty-four days. — The road to Bath is 
mots, m. route, f. 

shorter than the road to Southampton. — i — Liberality 

begets friends. — Lewis the eighteenth is the brother of 
engendre? v. 

the late king, Lewis the sixteenth, and grandson to 
feu, adj. petit, adj. fils 

Lewis the fifteenth. — He has many children, and 

beaucoup,zdv. 
very little money ; but he has industry and courage.— 

argent, tn, ie, f. m. 

The more a man has, the more he wishes to have ; 

on, pr. on desire, v. 

such is the temper of man. — Shame is a mixture of 

tel, ad. disposition, f. Honte, f. melange, m. 

grief and fear which infamy causes. — Temples, 

chagrin,m. crainteA. que mie,i. ^m. 

palaces, public 2 edifices, 1 private 2 houses, 1 every thing was 
palais, m. tout 

(burned down) or demolished. — Poets have contributed 

brule, pp. danoli, pp. Poete,m. e, pp. 

to establish the belief of a plurality of Gods, by per- 
etablir,v. croyance,?. --Se>f. 



35 

sonifying the divine attributes, human passions, and 

hum a in, adj. ~, f. 

physical causes. — Pride and vanity often bring on the 

que amenent, v. 

ruin of families. — We always have good bread, excellent 

pain, m. 
meat, and plenty of Vegetables. — I drink table-beer or 
viande, f. legume, m. bois,v.^ 

strong beer ; but I neither drink wine nor spirits.- Mr, 

liqueur, f. 
A. is a mild, affable, open, and sincere man ; and 

doux, adj. franc, adj. 

he has a wife as amiable as himself. — Is there any body 

quelqu'un 
with your master ? — Yes, sir, there are a gentleman and 

ily a monsieur 

two ladies. — Moliere was born at Paris, the capital of 

dame. naquit, v. 

France in one thousand six hundred and twenty, and 

died on Friday, the seventeenth of February, one 

mourut, v. Fevrier, m. 

thousand six hundred and seventy-three. — The island of 
mil, adj. soixante-treize. He, f. 

Elba, situate fifteen miles west of the coast of Tuscany, 

e situe, pp. Toscane, 

is, about forty miles in circumference. — Man has no 
a, v. de n'a pas 

greater enemies than his own passions ; they too often 

propre, adj. 
draw him from the path of virtue, and plunge 2 

entrainent,v. sentier,m. plongent,v. 

him 1 into an abyss of woes. Nothing can 

le dans abime, m. maux, m. Rien ne, adv. pent, v. 

satisfy an ambitious man. — I read it in the third 

satirfaire, v. ambitieux Je ai lu V pr. 

chapter of the second book, page the seventy-sixth,— 
chapitre, m, 



36 

Uneducated people are generally the proudest men. — > 
sans education gens, m. fier, adj. 

Hypocrisy is the most « odious of vices, and 

i €j f. o dieux, a dj . 

yet it seems to pay homage' to virtue. — 

cependant, adv. rendre, v. 

Successful vice finds more admirers than persecuted 
heureux, adj. admirateurs tee pp. 

virtue. — Wisdom is a treasure more precious than 
sagesse, f. tresor, m. 

riches. Bring the drawings, the paper, the pencil, 

■ ses, f. dessein, m. papier, m. crayon, m. 

and the Indian rubber, which are in the 

gomme, f. elastique, adj. 
next room. — The committee was composed of 

voisine, adj. comite,m. 

twenty-one members. The Pyrenees, which divide 

membre, m. separent, v. 

France from Spain, extend the space of two hundred 

s'etendent, v. 
miles from the Bay of Biscay to the Mediterranean 

aie 

sea. My brother is the tallest of all,— Peter has a 

mer, f frere grand, adj. Pierre 

good memory, but he has no judgment. — We have received 
memoir -e, m. jugement, m. regu, pp. 

a great quantity of pears and apples; and we 

te, f. poire, f. po?nme, f. 

expect nuts, Spanish chestnuts, and oranges, by the 

attendons, v. noix, f. marron, m. > f. 

next ship. 

prochain misseau, m. 



37 



CHAPTER III. 

OF PRONOUNS. 

There are four sorts of Pronouns : 

1 . Pronouns personal, Les pronoms personnels. 

£. Pronouns possessive, Les pronoms possessifs. 

3. Pronouns demonstrative, Les pronoms d&monstratifs. 

4. Pronouns relative, Les pronoms relatifs. 

OF PRONOUNS PERSONAL. 

§ I. 

Pronouns Personal are those which denote the persons by 
recalling them to the mind. These are two-fold, abso- 
lute and conjunctive ; the latter are strictly a sort of arti- 
cles/* 

There are three persons for each number, the singular 
and the plural. 

The first is the person speaking, as, 

I speak, Je parte. 

We speak, Nous parlous. 

The second is the person spoken to, as, 

Thou speakest, Tu paries. 
You speak, Vous parlez. 

The third is the person spoken of, as, 

He or she speaks, II or elle parle. 

They speak, lis or elles parlent. 

* These ideas will be developed more at length in the Key* 



58 

The personal pronouns above, are for the nominative 
case ; that is, they always precede their verb in sense. 

Moi, I; toi f thou; hri, he; e/les, she ;1 # Used empha- 
nous, we; vous, you; etiff, they ; dies, they. j tically in par- 
ticular cases, in English ; are used also as nominatives in 
French ; but absolutely, that is, without being attached to 
the verb as its grammatical nominative ; hence the use of 
two pronouns for the same case, in French, as, 

You did not know it, Vous ne le satnez pas, vous, 

but I knew it, mats moi, je le savois. 

In which cases there are two nominatives in French, the 
more strongly to shew opposition between persons ; and 
the first corresponds with the single nominative used em- 
phatically in English. 

To the pronouns for the nominative may be added the 
impersonal pronouns : il, it ; on, one ; and ce, this or that ; 
demonstrative, called impersonal, because they do not re- 
present any person or substantive, and are nominatives only 
in a grammatical sense to the following verb ; as, 

It rains, il phut. One thinks, on pense* 
This is a diamond, C'est un diamant. 

There are besides other pronouns personal, or rather 
articles, which follow the verb in sense, though they are 
always placed before it in French; these are for the accu- 
sative, or object direct, of the verb. 

Sing. Me, te, le, la, se, le. 

Me, thee, him, her, himself, so, in English* 
& oneself. 
Plur. Nous, Vous, les, m. '& f. se. 

Us, you, them, themselves and each other, 

Le, la, les, se, are said of all substantives, but the last 
\le\ refers to the whole sentence just quoted ; as, 



* See note, page 37V 



39 

Say you so ? Le dites-vous ? 

I say so, Je le dis. 

For the dative, or object indirect, they are : 
Sing. Me, te, lui, m.&f. se. 

To me, to thee, to him, to her, to himself, to oneself, 

Plur. Nous, vous, leur, m, & f. se. 

To us, to you, to them, to themselves, to each other. 

Se, whether accusative or dative, is either reflective er 
reciprocal. 

With the imperatire, not accompanied by a negation, 
moiy toi, are used instead of me, te, for euphony, as, 

Help me, Aidez-mo\. Give me, Donnez-moi. 

All the above pronouns, or rather articles, have none in 
English that strictly correspond with them ; those that have 
been used correspond perfectly with the second sort of 
pronouns used in French after the verbs and prepositions ; 
and are the only pronouns properly so called. 

Sing. Moi, toi, lid, elle, soi, 

Me, thee, him, her, oneself. 

Plur. Nous, vous, eux, elles; for the accusative. 
Us, you, them, them. 

The dative is formed in the regular way, by means of 
the preposition a, to or at ; as, a moi, to me ; a eux, to 
them, 8tc. 

These pronouns are often used with the others, but al- 
ways after the verb, when even the others cannot be sup- 
pressed. 

There are three other pronouns in French, used always 
before the verb onl} r , le, en, and y; the first of which 
corresponds in sense with it and so in English ; the second 
with a genitive and ablative ; the third with the dative and 
accusative : they apply, the first, to a whole sentence ; 
the others mostly to things, but occasionally to persons. Le, 
it and so, is always either attribute or accusative. En may 



40 



be translated by, of him, of her, of it, of them; from 
him, from her, from it, from them, as genitive and abla- 
tive ; y, may be translated by there, to him, to her, to it, 
to them, as dative or accusative. 



RULES FOR PLACING THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS, 

Used before the Verbs only, when there occur several. 

A dative of the first and second person must always 
precede the accusative of the third person ; as, 

He promised it to me, 11 me le promit. 

I will give them to you, Je vous les donnerai. 

The genitive or ablative en is always the nearest to the 
verb. 

She will send some to Elle vous y en enverra. 

you thither. 

Except, however, from this rule the pronouns of the first 
and second person, moi and toi, which, in the imperative 
mood and affirmatively, are placed after y and en, for eu- 
phony : ex. 

Bring some to me there, dpportez-y-en-moi. 

The verbs j^er, to trust; penser, or songer, to think; 
require the second sort of pronouns after them, unless in 
answering a question: 

We trust to him, to them, Nous nousjiom a hti, a eux. 
Do you think of her ? Pensez-vous a elle f 

Yes I do, Qui j'y pense. 

EXERCISE UPON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

There is a good dictionary. — Where have you bought 
Voild 

it? — 1 bought it at a sale, How much didit*cost 

vente, f. Combim, adv. 



41 

you? — It cost me a guinea and a half. I think 

coute,\. demie. adj. crois,\. 

it is very cheap. — I am glad of it. — My cousin wants to 

bon merche. veut, v. 

borrow it of me; I will not lend it to him. — He 

v euxj v. ?<e...pas 
does not take care of his books. — He has spoiled 
prend, v. gate, pp. 

several already, which his father had bought for 

plusieurs,adj. dejd, adv. 

him. — Have you met Mr. C lately ? Yes, and 

dernierement ? 
I have spoken to- him of you. — Here is a canary for 

serin, m. 
your sister ; carry it to her. — Do you know Mr. S ■ ? — 

Yes ; I see him and speak to him every day. — Is he 

pleased with his horse ? — He is very well pleased with 
content, adj. content, adj. en 

it. — When will you write to your partner ? — I will write 
ecrire, v. associe, m. ecrirai, v. 

to him at the beginning of next week. Make my 

gem a in e, f . Fa ites, v. 
compliments to him, and inform him that I have seen his 



father lately My uncle cannot bring you the 

dernierement, adv. apporter, v. 

book which you have asked him, but he will 

demande, pp. 
send it you by the first opportunity, if you promise 
enverra, v. occasion, f. promettez, v. 

him to return it to him soon.- Do you know 

rendre, v. bientot, adv. savez., v» 

the title of it ? — I have forgotten it. 
titre,m. ouhlie, pp. 



42 

§ II. 

OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. 

These pronouns are so called because they always denote 
possession. They are either adjectives only or substan- 
tives. The first of these pronouns always agree with the 
substantives that follow them, that is, with the thing pos- 
sessed, and not with the owner or possessor, as in English, 
in gender, number, and case. 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fem. Both Genders. 

*Mon, ma, mes, my. 

Ton, ta, tes, thy. 

Son, sa, ses, his and her. 

Both genders. ^ 

Notre, nos, eur. 

Votre, vos, your. 

Lear, leurs, their. 

When these pronouns are used in English, in a sentence 
alluding to any part of the body, they are not to be ex- 
pressed in French ; but, if the verb is reflective, the defi- 
nite article only is put before the substantive, and the per- 
sonal pronoun is sufficient to determine the possession ; ex. 

I have a pain in my teeth, J'ai mal aux dents. 
He broke his leg, 17 se cassa lajarnbe. 

This will be seen among the idiomatical expressions, 



EXERCISE ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



< 



I have brought my son with me to shew him 

amene, pp. faire voir, v. 

* Moil, ton, son, must be used before a noun of the feminine gender 
beginning with a vowel, to prevent harshness, as> mon ame, son opinion % 
my soul— his or her opinion. 



4S 

your house and gardens. — Mr : D says his horse is 

jar din, m. 
better than yours ; but I am not of his opinion ; 

meilleur, adj. suis, v. 

I prefer yours to his. — I have written my letter, but 

e, v. 

I want your seal to seal it.— His folly 

fai besoin, v. cachet, m. cachet er, v. folie, f. 

will be the cause of his ruin. London is a most 

sera, v. e, f. Londres, m. tres, adv. 

extensive town ; I admire the convenience and the 
etendue, pp. commodite, f. 

cleanliness of its foot-ways. — His sister is older than 
propriete, f. trottoir, m. agee, adj. 

he, and she is able to assist him in his studies.— The 

aider, v. etude, f. 

king's horses are very beautiful, but his carriage is too heavy.—- 

carosse, m . pesan t, adj . 
Their house is better situated than ours ; but ours is more 

mieux, adv. 
convenient than theirs. — This book is mine, and not 
commode, adj. 
yours. — The streets of London are very large; I ad- 

grand, adj. 
mire their width and regularity. — Do you want a 

largeur, f. 
pen-knife ? I will lend you mine, if you cannot find 
canif, m. 

yours — My desk is larger than yours, but yours is 

pup iire, m. 

large enough. A friend of mine has told me that 

assez, adv. dit, pp. 

your sister has married a captain in the army ; is it 
, epouse, pp. ojjlcier est-cc 

true ? — Yes, Sir. — Do you speak to me, Sir ? — No, Sir, I 

do not. — I have several copies of this work, I 

exemplaire, m. ouvrage, m. 



44 

will make you a present of one of them. — Return him 

ferai, v. Rcndez, v. 

his pen-knife, or buy another for him if you have lost it. — 

canif, m. 
Did you think of what I told you ? — No, but I will 

Avez, v. vous, pr. 
think of it. — If you find good pictures to sell, send 

y tableau, m, achetcr, v. 

me some from the best masters. — When you 

meilleur, adj. 
see Messrs. A. and B. tell them that we will send 

verrez, v. dites, v. enverrons, v. 

them shortly the goods they have asked for, 

sous peu, adv. marchandise, f. 

in the last letter which we have received from them. — 

regu, pp. de eux, pr. 
If I had some seeds I would sow them in my garden. — 

graine, f. semerois, v. 
I will tell my brother to send you some, for we have 

dirai, v. envoyer, v en 

a greater quantity of them than we can use, and we 

plus il nous en faut, v. 

give them to our friends. — Send them to me, or bring 

them to me, the first time you come to see me. — You 

viendrez, v. 
seem to me to be altered, — -Do you think so ? — Yes, 

paroissez, v. le 

I do (believe it). — If you have no books in the 

ne., point, adv. d, pr. 

country, I will send you some to divert you in your 
campagne, f. en, pro. arauser, v. 

solitary walks. 

solitaire adj. promenade, f. 

Its and their 9 having a reference to inanimate things, or 4 
even irrational objects, and placed in another member of 
the sentence from that wherein the object referred to is 
expressed, are not rendered by son, sa } ses } leur } or leurs, 
but by the genitive pronoun en. Ex. 



45 



Your garden \a very fine ; Voire jardin est bien beau ; 

I admire its walks, Sec. J 'en admire les allies, &c. 

The second sort of possessive pronouns are substantives, 
as the noun is always implied in them ; they are : 



Singular. 
Masc. Fern. 



Plural. 



Le mien, la mien ne; 
Le tien, la tienne; 
Le sien, la sienne; 
Le notre, la notre ; 
Le vdtre, la voire ; 
Le leur, la leur ; 



Fem. 
les miennes ; Mine. 
les tiennes ; Thine. 
les siennes ; His or hers. 
les notres; m. & f. ours. 
les votres; m. & f. yours. 
les leurs; m. & f. theirs. 



Masc. 
les miens , 
les tiens, 
les siens, 
les notres, 
les votres, 
les leurs, 
It is to be noticed, that they are never used without the 
definite articles, le, la, les, the. 

When any one of these possessive pronouns substantive 
is used after the verb etre, to be, signifying to belong to, it 
may be expressed in French by one of the personal pro- 
nouns in the dative case : ex. 
This book is mine. Ce livre est a moi. 

This sword is his, and not Cette epee est a lui et non 
yours. pas a vous. 

Also when one of these pronouns substantive in the geni- 
tive follows a substantive in the nominative case in English, 
it must be turned by one of the adjective pronouns, in the 
following manner. 

A friend of mine, of yours ; Un de mes amis, de vos 
amis ; i. e. one of my friends, of your friends. 

EXERCISES UPON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Brother, when shall we go and see your country 
Mori fr ere irons- nous campagne, F. 

house ? — As soon as I have sold my town house ; 

tot, adv. rendu, pp. 

I hope my neighbour is going to buy 2 it. 1 — My wife is 

voisin va s v. 

gone to her father's ; but she returns to-morrow in 

chez, pr. revient, v. 



40 

his carriage. — —His children are settled, except his 

etablis, pp. 
youngest daughter. — His virtues make his consolation in 

file font, v. 

his misfortune. — Your ardent imagination causes your 
malheur, m. fait, v. 

greatest torment. My house will be built before 

tourment, m. bade, pp. 

yours; but yours will be better finished than mine.— 

—When does your master set off for the country ? — He 

part, v. 
will set off with his sister next 2 week 1 — Your library 

bibliotheque, f. 
is more considerable than mine; but min6 is more 

curious than yours. — The Strand bridge will be 

curieux, adj. pont, m. 

beautiful ; I admire its arches (very much). 1 have 

, f. beaucoup, adv. 

mislaid my copy-book ; have you found it ? — No, but I 
egare, pp. colder, m. 

have found your pen and your inkstand, which you had 
plume, f. ecritoire, f. 

left in your father's study. When will you have 

laisse, pp. cabinet, m. ferez-vous, v. 

your grammar printed ? — As soon as I can, for several 

pourrai, v. 
of my pupils wish to have it before their departure 
eleve, c. g. avant, pr. depart, m. 

from town. 
ville, f. 

§ in. 

OF PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVE. 

These pronouns are called demonstrative, because they 
demonstrate, (that is), shew absolutely the object to which 



47 

they are attached, or which they do represent. Like the 
possessive, they are either adjectives only or substantives. 

The first of these pronouns always agree with the sub- 
stantive they precede. They are, 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern. Masc. and Fern. 

Ce, cet,* Cette, this or that, Ces, these or those. 

Chaque, m. and fern. each. 

The pronouns demonstrative substantives are in reality 
two w r ords in French, the first of which is the demonstra- 
tive adjective, and the second the personal pronoun, as, 

Celui, for ce lui ; celle, for cette elle ; 

Ceux, for ces eux ; celles, for ces dies; expressed in 
English by the personal pronoun alone, as, celui qui, &c. ; 
he, who, &c. ; ceux, qui, &c. ; they who, &c. 

Ce alone, signifies this or that, and refers to a whole 
sentence ; sometimes the adverbs ci and Id, here and there, 
are added to the former pronouns to specify their respec- 
tive position. Ex. 

This hat, Ce chapeau-ci. 

That town, Cette villeAh. 

When ci and Id are added to the pronoun indefinite ce, 
it is to establish the same distinction as in English between 
this and that ; as, 

This pleases me, Ceci me plait. 
That displeases me, Cela me deplait. 
Chacun, e, each, for chaquuri, e, f. each one. 

N.B. The pronouns that and those are often suppressed 
in English, and supplied by an apostrophe and an s at the 
end of the substantive ; but they must be expressed in 
French by one of the above pronouns, celui, celle, ceux, 



* Cet is used before a noun masculine, beginning with a vowel or It 
mute ; ex. cet homme, cet oiseau ; this man, this bird. 



48 

celles, according to the gender and number of the substan- 
tive to which they refer. 

He has taken my watch II a pris ma montre et 

and my father's. celle de man pere. 

EXERCISES UPON THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

This portrait is striking ; it is that of your father. 

, m. frappant, pp. 

— Do you like this frame? — No, I prefer the one you 

cadre, m. celui 

shewed me the other day. — Pull down this blind, 
montrates, v. Abaissez, v. jalousie, f. 

and draw this curtain. — This arm chair is more convenient 

rideau,m. fauteuil,m. com?node,adj, 

than that one ; but the shape is not so elegant. — He who 

forme, f. 
wishes to be esteemed, ought to endeavour to deserve 
veut, v. tdcher, v. meriter, v. 

it. — This dictionary is better than that ; but it is not 

meilleur, adj . 
so good as the one I saw the other day at a friend of 

vis, v. ckez,pr. 

mine. — Say what you please, this fruit is preferable to 

voudrez, v. 
that we tasted at Mrs. C.'s. — The pronouns this and 

goiitames, v. 

that shew two objects differently placed. This 

montrent, v. 
bell rings better than that.- — This bird has a 

sonnette, f. sonne, v. oiseau, m. 

finer plumage than that; but that one sings better 

, m. chant e, v. 

than this one.— This tree yields no fruit ; but that one 

produit, v. 

.yields a great deal. This clock forwards; but your 

quantite, f, horloge, f. avance, v. 



49 

* 

watch goes too slow. — We ought to pray for those 

retarde, v. devons, v. prier, v. 

who persecute us. — This flower smells too strong ; I 

fieur, f. sent, v. forty adj. 

prefer that rose to this pink.— Men are always inclined to 

oeilkt,m. porte, pp. 

believe that which they hope for. — His condition is 
croire, v. esperent, v. u* 

worse than that of a galley-slave. — -This ink does not 
pire, adj. galerien encre,f. 

run free ; that which I bought last year was better. — 
coule, v. Men, adv. dernier, adj. 

I will take this path ; it is more pleasant \ than that 

seiitier, m. agreable, adj. 

road, where the dust flies in whirlwinds. — These 

route, f. poussiere, f. vole, v. tourMllon, m. 

meadows are delightful, and those orchards promise 
prairie, f. charmant, adj. verger, m. prometteni, r. 

an abundant crop. They who rely upon the 

recolte, f. comptent, v. 

promises of men, build upon sand. — These shoes 
promesse, f. bdtissent, v. safr/e, m. Soulier, m. 

are better made than those ; but they are not so easy 

faits, pp. aise, adj . 

for walking. — This tree grows faster than that. — A good 

marche, f. croit, v. 

master rewards those of his scholars who are diligent, and 

ecolier, m. 

punishes those who are idle. This writing pleases 

punit,v. paresseux, adj. ecriture,i. plait, v. 

me more than that. — Have you taken my watch and my 

porte, pp. 
mother's to the watch-maker i — Yes, sir, and I have 

chez horloger 

brought back that of your brother.— Your drawing-room 
rapporte, pp. sallon, m. 

i$ larger than mine ; but Mr. Brown's is larger than yours, , 

Brun, 



60 

— I take this book with me, and I leave you that 

prends, v. laisse, v. 

one. 

OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 

These pronouns are called relative, because they relate 
to some other noun or pronoun in the discourse, either ex- 
pressed or implied. 

Some are adjectives only, the others are substantives also, 

The pronouns relative adjectives are, 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern. Masc. Fern. 

Quel, Quelle, Quels, Quelles, what or which. 

Quelque, m.andf. Quelques, m. and f. some. 
Quelque. ...que, m. and f. Quelques. ...que, m. & f. whatever. 

Quel-que, Quels-que, whoever and 

Quelle-que Quelles-que, whatever. 

Quelconque^ Quelsconque, X \ \ 

Quelleconque, Quellesconque, j 

Quelque, followed by an adjective, is an adverb answer- 
ing to hozoever in English. 

The pronouns relative substantive preceding the verb, 
are, 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Feni. Masc. Fern. 

Qui, m. and f. Qui, m. and f. who or which. 

Que, m. and f. Que, m. and f. whom or which. 

Dont, m.andf. Dont, m. and f. of whom, of 

which. 

JLequel, laquelle, Lesquels, lesquelles, which. 

Quelquun, Quelquune, Quelques-ims, Quelques-imes, 

Some one, some people. 

* This last pronoun is never used but after the substantive. 



51 

Quiconque, whoever, sing. only. 

Qui, m.and f. sing, and plural, who or which. 

Que, what, 1 . i C before verbs. 

Quoi, what, } Sin ^' ° n ^ \ after verbs and prepositions. 

Quoique, whatever. 

Qui may be used before and after verbs ; Que is only 
used before verbs, and qui and quoi are used after all verbs 
and prepositions. 

EXERCISE ON THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

What book do you want ? The one I lent you yes- 

voulez, v. Celui, pro. pretai, v. 
terday. — Some rest is necessary after great applica- 

repos, m. 
tion. — Whatever may be your fortune, you ought not to 

soit, v. 
squander it ; but rather give some portion of it to 
dissiper, v. plutot, adv. 

the poor. — I met some men on the road, who asked me 

pauvre. rencontrai, v. route, f. 

the way to Brentford. — Speak to nobody what- 

cliemin, m. ne...personne 

ever of your affairs. — Whoever calls here, tell him 

passe, v. ici dues, v. 
I am not at home, and ask him what is his pleasure. 
maison, f. , ce quits veulent, v. 

— If they ask what day I shall be back, tell 

jour, m. serai, v. de retour, m. 

them to-morrow, without fail. Whatever I say, he 

faute, f. dise, v. 

does not listen to me. — Do you believe what he says ? for 

ecoute, v. dit, v. - 

my part, 1 do not imagine what his motive can 

moi, pr. motif, m. peut,v. 

be ; but I think it is altogether a story. — —What use 
etre, m. absolument conte, m. usage, m. 

do you make of this instrument ? 1 will shew you 

faites, v. . f m. montrerai, v. 

D 2 



presently what it is fit for. Whatever haste 

tout-d-l heure, adv. propre, adj. d> pr. hate, f. 

you make, you cannot overtake them. — Have you 

fassiez, v. pouvez, v. rejoindre, v. 

carried my letter to Mr. L — 's ? — Whom have you spoken 

parle, pp. 
to ? — I have spoken to a servant who stood at the door. — 

etoit, v. 
What has he told you ? — That he did not know what 
dit, pp. savoit, v. 

clay his master would return from the races. 

reviendroit, v. course a cheval. 

What do you think of the weather ? — I think we shall 
pensezj v. terns, m. pense, v. au- 

faave the same weather as we had yesterday. — What is it 
Tons, v. que hier, adv. 

o'clock ? — It is eight o'clock,- — What clock is striking 

horloge, f. sonne, v. 
now ? — It is St. Paul's. — How do you spend your time in 
C'est passez, v. a 

the country ?— — I read such books as may inspire vir- 
campagne, f. peuvent, v. ver- 

tue, and form the understanding. — Somebody knocks at 
tu, f. jugement, id. frappe, v. 

the door ; see who it is ?- — I do not know who can 

porte, f. voyez, v. sais, v. peut, v. 

approve such conduct ; but whoever he is, and 
approuver, v. tel, adj. conduite, f. soit, v. 

whatever he may say, he is not the man I would choose 
disc, v. choisirois, v. 

for my friend. — Whose house is this? — Men generally 
pour, pr. 

love him who flatters them, but the wise repel flat- 
aiment, v. jlatte, v. repoussent > v. flat- 

tery as a dangerous poison. — Every one agrees that 
terie, f. convient, v. 

he deserved what has happened to him, because he was 
est, v. arrive, pp. 



obstinate. — One of the Miss O.'s is going to be niai- 

entete, adj. demoiselle va, v. 

ried ; guess which it is : — In what drawer have you put my 

tiroir, \\\. 7 nis 

handkerchiefs? — They are in the drawer which I found emp- 
mouchoir,m. tiroir, m. vide* 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES UPON ALL THE 
PRONOUNS. 

Do you speak French? — No, Sir; but I understand 

coinprends, v. 
what is said to me in that language.— Why do you 

langue, f. Pourquoi, adv. 
not endeavour to speak it f — Because I have nobody to 

tachez, y. Parceque, c. 

practise with. — That is not absolutely necessary ; if a per- 
son understands grammar well, he can think first in 
entend, v. grammaire, f. d'abord, adv. 

English, and then turn his own thoughts into French. 

pensees, f. 
True, but he must have learned to compose. Un- 
C'est vrai dcit, v. appris, pp. sans 

doubtedly; but this is not very difficult. And pray, 

doute die, adj. de grace 

what is to be done for that ?— The easiest way is to ac- 

moyen, m. 
custom oneself to literal translations which you write back 

traduction, f. remettez 

into French. — This practice followed for some time 
en, pr. suivi, pp. pendant, pr. 

gives more facility than can be imagined by those who 
que ne imaginer, v. 

have not tried. The good are the only ones happy, 

essay e, pp. seul, adj. 

the wicked are never so. This house suits me per- 

ne,.. jamais, adv. convient, v. 



54 

fectly well, I will not sell it. — Whatever your affairs 
veux 9 v. vendre, v. 
be, you ought not to neglect your friends. — Finish 
soient, v. devriez, v. negliger, v. 

this book, and then you shall begin another. — He has 

ensuite, adv. 
shewn him the letter he had received from his father. — 
7nontre, pp. rec u, pp. 

I assure you it is very interesting and very instructive. — 

interressant, adj. . 
Where are the almonds your aunt gave you ? — Give some 

amande, f. tante era, pro. 

to your sister. — I have eaten them all. — It is very wrong 

mal, m. 
of you ; you will be ill for it ; and it will be a just 

d, pr. malade, adj. 

punishment for your greediness. The Thames is a very 

punition, f. gourmandise, f. Tamise 

fine river, but the view of it is lost by the warehouses 

on its banks, which are not uniform. — St. Paul's is a fine 

edifice, but the effect is destroyed by the houses which 

, m. detruit, pp. 

surround it.- — This affair concerns him, and not you. 
entourent, v. regarde, v. non pas 

—Your portrait is not badly painted, but it is not so 

mal,a.dv.peint, pp. aussi, adv. 

well as that of your lady. You do not know what 

epouse. savez, v. 

grieves me, it is to see you lose your time. — He is so 
afflige, v. perdre, v. 

affected by the death of his wife, that he will see none 

m or t, f. epouse, veut, v. ne...aucun 

of his friends. — What business brings you here ? — Of all 

amene, v. 
those who dispute against religion, some do it be- 
disputent, v. font, v. 



55 

cause it perplexes them, others because they wish to 
embarrasse, v. veulent, v. 

have the glory to perplex its defenders. "These houses 

gloire, f. defenseur, m. 

are well built, but their position is not advantageous. — 
bdti, pp. avantageux, adj. 

What news have you heard to-day ? — That the French 

appris, pp. 
have had two of their generals made prisoners, and their 

general fait, pp. 
army was flying, when the English messenger left them 
armee, f. fuyoit, v. courrier, m. 

to bring this news. — — They add that our loss has 
nowvelle, f. qjoutent, v. 

been very great, though not so great as theirs. 

quoique non pas 
They who do not keep their word, deserve to be 
Ceux, pr. tiennent, v. 

branded with infamy. The beauty of the mind excites 

fletri, pp. ie, f. esprit, m. 

admiration, that of the soul inspires esteem, and that of 

ame, f. estime, f. 

the body love. — — Most friends are more attached to our 

La plupart 
fortune, than they are to our person. — Whoever is with- 

qitc.ne 
out virtue seldom values men, and whoever is virtuous 

estime, v. vertueux,&&]. 

values them too much. — Who told you that this house is 

trop, adj. a dit 

not hers. — For your own interest I entreat you to attend 

conjure, v. avoir egard 
to my advice. — Read first the history of your own coun- 
avis, m. — Lisez, v. pays, m. 

try, and then you will read that of other countries with 
ensuite lirez, v. 

more pleasure and profit. — I am of your opinion. 

plaisir, m. , f. 



56 

England owes her riches to her navy, and the extent 
doit, v. marine, £ etendue, f. 

of her commerce. Do you know what has hap- 

, m. savez, v. ar- 

pened to him ? — He has lost his fortune at the gaming 
rive, pp. perdu, pp. jeu, m. 

table. — It is a dreadful passion unworthy (of) an ho- 

affreux, adj. , f. indigne, adj. 

nest man. — Your condition is like others, it has itsadvan- 

comme avan- 

tages as well as its disadvantages. — Do you know some 
tage, m. desavantage, m. connoissez, v. 

of these ladies ? — Yes, I know some of them* — Whose 

connois, v. 
book is this? — It is mine. — There is I know not what 

sais, v. quoi, pro. 
in his exterior, which prepossesses in his favor. — At \tfhat 

previent, v. faveur, f. 

will you play ? — At draughts, if you please.— You play bet- 
dames, f. voulez, v. 

ter than I do. Where are the draught-board and the 

moi, pro. damier, m. 

men ? — Take this man, and I shall take two. — Take this 
pion, m. prendrai, v. 

other, and in my turn, I take three, and go to king.— 
tour, m. prends, v. vais, v. dame, f. 

You have won the game. — It is enough for this time* 
gagne, pp. partie, f. assez, adv. fois, f. 

— -The study of Geography and Chronology is neces- 

etude, f. ie, f. ie, f. 

sary to him who wishes to have a perfect knowledge of 

veut, v. connoissance, f. 

history. — The beauty of the mind is far preferable 

kistoire, f. beaute, f. esprit, m. bien 

to that of the body. Some say one thing, some 

corps, m. disent, v. 

another* — The lady he was with, is in mourning, because 

en deuil parcequc 



57 

she has lately lost her sister-in-law. —Man too 

dernier ement, adv. perdu, pp. belle sceur. 
often wishes for that which it is not in his power to 

desire, v. (it est pas) pouvoir, m. 

obtain, instead of being contented with what Provi- 

obtenir, v. au lieu contenter, v. f. 

dence has granted him. — He who pleases nobody is 
accorde, pp. ne...personne 

less unhappy- than he whom nobody pleases. 

moins, adv. malheureux, adj. personne ne 

— His father and mother died in the same year. • 

moururent, v. annee, f. 

I lived in the house when that happened.- Brave as 

demeurois, v. arriva, v. 

he is, he may find his master. — Whatever happens, 

pouwa, v maitre. 

man ought to submit to the decrees of heaven without 

soumettre, v. decret, m. del, m. 

murmuring. — His will must be done in spite of anybody 
murmur er, v. volonte, f. se /era 

whatever. — Science is preferable to riches and vir- 

richesses, f. plu. 
tuc to both. — Some philosophers believe that the fixed 

croient, v. fixe, adj. 

stars are so many suns. — Here are two books, which do 

autant, adv. Void, v. 

you prefer ?— I prefer this one to the other.— .Both 

Uun et V autre 
are very good. — To whom shall I give your letter ?— — 

(qui, pro. donnerai, v. 
To either of my brothers, and if neither is at home 

bring it back to me; or rather carry it to their 

rapporiez, v. plutoi, adv. 

I counting-house. 
comptoir, m t 



D 3 



58 
CHAPTER IV. 

OF PARTICIPLES. 

The participle partakes of the nature of the noun, and of 
that of the verb ; as noun, it is susceptible of gender, num- 
ber, and case ; as verb, it represents a state or act, and is 
consequently susceptible of time. It is either present, as, 
being, etant; having, ayant; or past, as, been, ete; 
had, eu. 

The participles may be transitive like their verbs, as, 

Having a stick, Ayant un baton. 

or intransitive, as, dying, moarant. 

The participles past are transitive only when following the 
verbs, to be, Ure y and to have, avoir ; to form the perfect 
voice of verbs ; and then they are never declinable. 

My sister has broken her arm. Ma sxur s'est casse le bras. 
I have killed a hare. J'ai tut un lidvre. 

The participles present, which in English always end in 
ing, end in ant in French, as in the above examples ; when 
they decline, they are mere adjectives. 

The participles past have no particular ending in either 
language ; they most commonly end in e, and generally cor- 
respond with those ending in ed in English. They are al- 
ways declinable after the verb to be, etre, except when 
transitive, as in the case above. 

The same participle following the verb avoir, never agrees 
with the nominative of the verb, but may often agree with 
its accusative, that is, the word following next in sense, 
when the said accusative is placed before the verb, which 
takes place very often ; as, 

You have seen her. Vous Vavez vue. 

In this case, avoir is a true active verb; but if the parti- 
ciple past be transitive, it cannot be declined.* 



* These ideas will be developed in the key. 



\ 



59 



EXERCISES ON THE PARTICIPLES. 

Have you returned the grammar which you had bor- 
rendu, pp. grammaire, f. em- 

rowed of your cousin ? — Yes, I sent the servant 
prunte, pp. d, pr. ai envoy e, pp. 

who has given it to him. — I am sorry for it, I wish 

donne, pp. fdche, pp. en souhaiterois, v. 

I had seen it. — Is it well adapted for beginners ? — It is the 

best I have ever seen. — The difficulties are presented 

die, v. vu, pp. ■ te, f. tee, pp. 

gradually, and the greatest are judiciously reserved for 

par degres — e, pp. 

the end. — I have heard very good news (as I was) 
fin, f. appris, pp. nouveIle,f, en, pr. 

coming here. — What news have you heard? — That 
venant, p. pr. nouvelle, f. 

the English have obtained a signal victory over the 

gagne, pp. signale, pp. sur, pr. 

Americans, and another over the French. — The persons 

cain, sur, pr. 

you saw with us are people truly fearing God and 

avez vu, pp. craignant 

loving virtue. — I found my brother writing when 
aimani ai trouve, pp. ecrivant, p. pr. 

I entered. They found him expiring with grief. — 

suis entre, pp. trouverent, \\ chagrin, m. 

What a spectacle for humanity to see after a battle 

voir, v. bataille, f. 

so many dead and dying ! — I admire these lambs skip- 
tant, adv. bondis- 

ping on this hill. 1 went this morning to my sis- 

sant, p. pr. colline, f. 

ter's, and after waiting for her an hour, she told me she 

attendu, pp. a dit 

was not disposed to go out. — There is a real pleasure in 
(n'etoitpas) sortir, v. II y a plaisir, m. d 



60 

teaching by a rational 2 method. 1 Lewis the great 

enseigner, v. raisonne, pp. e, f. — Louis 

had above all the superior and rare talent of know- 

avoit, v. ieur, adj. cow- 

ing and choosing men of merit.— — Spend one por- 

noitre, v. ckoisir, v. e, m. — Passez, v. 

tion of your time in reading, another in writing, and ano- 

d lire, v. ecrire, v. 

ther in resting yourself. — What more grand in nature 

reposer, v. vous, pr. — Quoi, pr. 
than the rising and the setting of the sun ! The de- 
lever, m. coucher, m. soleil, m. de- 
fending of a bad cause is worse than the cause 
feme, f. mauvais, adj. pire, adj. 

itself. Somebody has told me that your cousin has 

elle-meme, pro. — Quelqu'wi 

been killed in the last engagement ; I hope you 

ete, pp. iue, pp. dernier, adj. combat, m. fespere 

have heard from him since. He has not written to us, 

depuis, adv. ecrit, pp. 

but his sister has received a letter from him dated the 20th, 

sceur regie date, pp. 

in which he says that he has been wounded, but not 
dity v. blesse, pp. non pas 
dangerously. — — Mrs. White appears (very much) af-- 
dangereusement, adv. paroit, v. tres, adv. #/- 
flicted at the death of her husband. — It is not sur- 
fiigee, pp. de mort, f. mart. -Ce n' est pas sur- 

prising; she has lost the most esteemed man in the 
prenant, p. pr. estime, pp. de 

town, and who will long be regretted by the poor. 

mile, f. sera, v. pauvre, adj. 

The liberty he has taken to represent her faults to her, has 

pris, pp. 
offended her much, but he was determined to speak the 

offense, pp. — e, pp. dire, v. 

truth. — Mrs. Catalani was an excellent singer, I have 
werite, f. ch ant ease i f. 



61 

heard her sing several times. — We are all very 

entendu, pp, plusieurs fois, f. 

sorry for the trouble this affair has given you. — In 

fdche, adj.de, pr. peine, f. e, f \ 

what history have you read these words, " This day 

histoire, f. lu, pp. mot, m. Aujour d'hui, adv. 

Schulemberg has conquered us" ? — I have read them in the 
Schoulembourg vaincit, pp. 

history of Charles the twelfth. — Have I shewn you 
histoire, f. montre, pp. 

the books I received the other day from France ? — No, 

livre, m. jour, m. 

they were not yet arrived ; but you were expecting them. 

etoient, v. - attendiez, v. 

—The letter you wrote to me in French, was tolerably 

lettre, f. Franqois passablement 

well ; I have shewn it to your brother, who was asto- 

montre, pp. eton- 

nished at it. Where have you put my gloves ? — I 

ne, pp. en, pro. mis, pp. gant, m. 

have put them in your wardrobe. — Fearing to hear 

garderobe. — CraignantTp. apprendre, v. 

of the death of her mother, she opened the letter trem- 

mere ouvrit, v. trem- 

bling ; but the letter was rather consoling, for she was 

blant, p. pr. «^ . • 

a little better. In perusing this work, I 

peu, adv. mieux, adv. parcourant, p. pr. ouvrage, m. 
have found many interesting remarks which I have 

bien, adv. inter essant, p. pr. 
copied off in a small collection of mine. — Are your 
copie, pp. petit, adj. recueil, m. 

brothers come back from the country ? — Yes, but they are 
revenu, pp. campagne, f. 

gone out. The glory he has acquired will be the best 

sorti, pp. gloire, f. acquis, pp. 

inheritance for his posterity. — The army being beaten, 
heritage,, m. -r* — — e : f, armee, f. batty, pp. 



62 

more than ten thousand men were made prisoners of 

de furent, v. 

war. — That General has rendered himself celebrated by 

s'est, v. rendu, pp. celebre, adj. 

his prudence as well as by his courage. — The enemies 
aussi, adv. que, c. 
found themselves surrounded by a (large body) of 
trouverent, v. entoure, pp. gros, adj. 

cavalry. My sister has bought herself a beautiful 

lerie, f. s'est, v. achete, pp. 

scarf. He has not paid all the attention I wished 

echarpe, f. fait, pp. souhaitois, v. 

to the advice your father*has given him. — You have not 

avis, m. pere 

made all the efforts you (might have) done ; otherwise 
fait, pp. (auriez pu) faire, v. autrement, adv. 

you would have succeeded. — I have done what I could 
auriez, v. reussi, pp. fait, pp. ce que ai pu 

to see him, and speak to him, but I have not yet found 
avoir, v. parler, v. mats, c. 

a proper opportunity. — He says it has been fine 
favorable, adj. occasion, f. fait, pp. 

weather all day. No ; it has rained a little in the 

terns, m. journee, f. — Non, adv. phi, pp. 

morning, but it has been fine the remainder of the day.- — 
matinee, f. fait. pp. reste, m. journte, f. 

You will be wet in going back. — How degrad- 
serez, v. mouille, pp. retournant, pp. — Que, adv. deshonno- 

ing a vice is that of lying ! Can you shoot birds 

rant mensonge, m. — Pouvez, v. tirer, v. 

flying ? — Not yet, but I have killed several rab- 
encore, adv. plusieurs, adj. la- 

bits whilst they were running. 1 saw your brothers and 

pin, m. couroient, v. frere 

sister running to your mother, and calling out to 

sceur accourant, p. mere appelant, p. pr. 

her, because they had been frightened by the sight of a 
parceque, c. effrayt, pp. vue, f t 



63 

bull which was coming to them. — —He has done 

taureau, m. venoit, v. eux, pro. rendu, pp. 

him all the services he has (been able). — She has obtain- 

, m- pu, pp. obte- 

ed from her father all the sums she w r ould. 

nu, pp. somme, f. 



CHAPTER V. 

OF VERBS. 

Ihe verb either expresses merely the existence of a sub- 
ject, as the verb to be, etre; or its action also, as to 
have, avoir. 

As to passive verbs, there are none in English or in 
French ; they are replaced by the verb to be, and a parti- 
ciple past. 

The verb to be, etre, may be called the substantive verb, 
as denoting merely the being of an object : God is, Dieu 
est. 

The active verbs may be transitive or intransitive. 

Transitive, when the action goes over or passes upon an 
object, as, I have a house, J y ai une maison. 

Intransitive ; as, I run, Je cours. 

or I die, Je meurs. 

The distinction of neuter verbs is useless, and often very 
difficult to be ascertained. # The verbs termed neuter, ex- 
press an act, such as, I stand, I laugh ; even I sit is a re- 
flective verb for (I seat myself) Je masseois, which could 
not be the case, if it did not express an act returning on the 
actor, if I may be allowed the expression. 

A verb is said to be reflective, when the act returns upon 

* Vide Murray's English Grammar, 19th edition; 1809, p. 70, 



64 

the doer, as, I sit ; for, I seat myself, Je m'asseois. 

A verb is said to be reciprocal, when two agents act upon 
each other ; of course such verbs have only the three persons 
plural of each tense and mood, with the infinitive and parti- 
ciples, and resemble in form the reflective verbs, from 
which they can be distinguished only by the sense. 

In French a verb cannot be reflective without a second 
pronoun receiving the act directly or indirectly ; as, 

He applies himself. II s applique. 

He fancies to himself. II s imagine. 

Every verb is logically personal, because an act necessa- 
rily implies an agent ; but a verb is said grammatically to be 
impersonal, when the grammatical nominative offers no de- 
fined subject to the mind ; as, 

It rains, II pleut. 

They say, On dit. 

A verb is either simple or compound. 
Simple, if it cannot be decomposed ; as, 

To call, appeler. To see, voir. 

To build, batir. To take, prendre. 

To lie, mentir. To live, vivre. 

The same may be compound by means of a preposi- 
tion, or rather adverb in this sense ; as, 
To recall, rappeler. To foresee, prevoir. 

To rebuild, rebatir. To undertake, entreprendre* 

To belie, dementir. To out-live, survivre. 

CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 

To conjugate verbs is to give them their different inflex- 
ions or terminations, according to their moods, tenses, 
numbers, and persons. 

There are two voices in each verb, the imperfect and 
the perfect voice, 



65 

Imperfect, To be, Eire ; Perfect, To have been, Avoir ttc. 

OF MOODS. 

A Mood, or mode, in grammar, means the manner of 
representing the verb, as affirming, commanding, gcc. 

There are in the French language five moods absolutely 
distinct from each other by their several inflexions or mean- 
ings. 

They are ; The Indicative, Uindicatif. 

The Imperative, Uimperatif. 

The Optative, L'optatif. 

The Subjunctive, Le subjonctif. 

The Infinitive, Uinfinitif. 

OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

This Mood has been so called because it indicates, that 
is, asserts positively the verb, with regard to time, number, 
and person; as, 

I write a letter, J'ecris une httre. 

He sings, II chante. 

OF THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

This Mood signifies commanding or enforcing the verb, 
in the person or persons addressed. It has only the pre- 
sent; as, 

Serve God, Sei^vez Dieu. 

Love virtue, Aimez la vertu. 

This mood can have no first person singular, because it is 
impossible to command oneself, if it has a first person plu- 
ral, it is as being joined to such as receive the command. 

Let us avoid discord, Evitons la discorde. 

Neither can it have third persons, for we cannot com- 
mand the absent, that is, persons spoken of. The persons 



66 

so called in the grammars, are the respective persons of the 
present of the subjunctive mood, # as, 

Let him write, or that he may write, Qu'il ecrive. 

OF THE OPTATIVE MOOD. 

This mood signifies in the verb an anterior disposition to 
be, or to exist, with regard to another verb ; a beginning of 
existence without allusion to its being completed ; in which 
it differs essentially from the indicative. 

I was singing, when you Je chantois, quand vous 
came in. entrates.. 

The singing was begun when you came in. 

OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

This mood signifies in the verb a subjoining disposition 
to be, a possibility of being, without actual certainty. It is 
subsequent with regard to another verb. 

I work, that you may rest Je travaille, afin que vous 
yourself. vous reposiez. 

The resting yourself depends on my working, L e. is sub- 
sequent to it. 

OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 

This Mood is so called, because it expresses the verb in 
an infinite or illimited sense, without any relation to time, 
number, or person ; it is, properly speaking, the name or 
noun of the verb. Ex. 

To be, Etre. 

To have, Avoir. 

To love, Aimer. 



* In English, let him or let them write, are phrases by which we sig- 
nify to a person present, that he should let or suffer another absent to 
write. In French, the first verb is understood, such as, I desire he may 
write, Je veux qu HI fcrive. 



67 

OF TENSES. 

There are three natural tenses, and there is no need for 
more. 

The Present, Le Present. 

The Past, Le Passe. 

The Future, Le Futur. 

The present, is, now ; the past, was, before ; and the fu- 
ture will be, afterward. 

OF THE PRESENT. 

The present concerns the time being, as ; 

You write, Vous ecrivez. 

The present is also used : 

1st. When speaking of what is usually recurring. Ex. 

We always dine at two Nous dinons toujours a deux 
o'clock. heures. 

She studies history. Elle etudie Vhistoire. 

2d. When speaking of what is to be in a short time, by 
way of anticipation, instead of the future. Ex. 

I set out this evening for Je pars ce soir pour la 
the country. campagne. 

Instead of, 

I shall set out, &c. Je partirai, fyc. 

3d. This tense is often used in French instead of the 
past, in narrations and descriptions, to represent as in ac- 
tion, what is long past. 

OF THE PAST. 

This tense represents, as absolutely past, the time when 
the act took place. Ex. 

I was ill yesterday for two Je fus malade hier pen- 
hours. dant deux heures. 



68 

OF THE FUTURE. 

This tense expresses the time of an act as not yet come. 
Ex. 

I will see you to-morrow Je vous verrai dernain a 
in London. Londres. 

The tenses of the Optative and Subjunctive moods are 
not absolute, but relative to those of the indicative mood, 
as has been seen before in speaking of these two moods, 

OF THE TENSES OF THE OPTATIVE MOOD. 

The Optative mood has two tenses, the past and the 
future. The first represents the act as having begun pre- 
viously to a second act, which is past : and it is in this it dif- 
fers from the same tense of the indicative, the latter repre- 
senting the act finished. 

My brother was learning Mon frlre apprenoit sa 
his lesson when you arrived. lefo?i quand vous arrivates* 

It is used therefore in speaking of reiterated actions, be- 
cause allusion is made only to the beginning of those acts. 

When I was in London, I Quand J'etots a Londres, 
often went to see my friends, falloissouvent voir mes amis. 

The future of the optative mood shews a disposition to 
be, under some supposition of another verb, the taking place 
of which is not certain. Ex. 

I would read, if I had books, Je lirois si j'avois des litres. 

OF THE TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

The Subjunctive mood has two tenses, the present and 
the past : the present subjoins the verb to another verb, pre- 
sent or future. Ex. 

I wish he may come, Je souhaite qu'il viemie. 

The past subjoins the verb to another verb past, Ex* 



69 

I was wishing he might Je souhaiiois qxiil vint a 
come in time. terns. 

OF NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 

Tenses have two numbers ; — the singular and the 
plural. 

Singular. Plural. 

I sing, Je chante. We sing, Nous chantom. 

Each number lias three persons. The first is the person 
or persons who speak. Ex. 

I speak, Je parle. We speak, Nous parlous. 

The second is the person or persons spoken to. Ex. 

Thou speakest, tu paries. You speak, Vous parlez. 

The third is the person or persons spoken of. Ex. 

He speaks, II parte. They speak, lis parlent. 

It is a custom among the moderns to address one person 
by the pronoun and verb of the second person plural ; but, 
if any word following applies to such a nominative, it is to 
be in the singular. Speaking to one person, we must say, 

You are married, Vous etes marie. 

Speaking to more than one, we must say, ?naries. 
Several nominatives, though each is singular, require the 
verb in the plural. Ex. 

My brother and sister are Mon frtre et ma saur 
gone. sont partis. 

If there are nominatives of different persons, the verb 
must agree with the first in preference to the second, and 
with the second in preference to the third, observing that in 
French, the person spoken to must be named first, and the 
person speaking is to be mentioned the last ; we must there- 
fore say, 

It is you and I who have C'est vous et moi qui avons 
discovered the plot. dixoavert te complot, 



70 

It is neither you nor my Ce n'est ni vous ni mon 

brother who have said it. frere qui Vavez dit. 

You, my brother and I, Vous, mon frere et moi, 

will set out to-day. nous partirons aujourd' hui. 

The pronoun relative qui, being always of the same per- 
son as its antecedent ; that is, the noun or pronoun to which 
it relates, requires the verb to be of the same person with 
the antecedent, as is the case in English. 

It is I who am, &c. Cest moi qui suis, Sfc. 

There are four conjugations in the French language. 
Each is distinguished by the termination of the verb in the 
infinitive. 

The first ends in ER, as Donner, to give 

The second in IR, as Punir, to punish. 

The third in 01R, as Recevoir, to receive. 

The fourth in RE, as Rendre, to render. 

The two verbs, Etre, to be, and Avoir, to have, vulgarly 
called auxiliaries,, belong, the first of them to the last con- 
jugation, the other to the third ; but we will give them first, 
because they are the two most in use. 

CONJUGATION OF THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je suis, I am. 

Tu es, Thou art. 

II est, He is. 

Plur. Noussommes, We are. 
Vous etes, You are. 

I/s sont, They are. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Jefus, I was. 



71 

Tufus, Thou wast. 

II fat, He was. 

Plur. Nous fumes, We were. 
Vous futes, You were. 

lis furent, They were. 

Note. — The past of this verb is often very improperly 
used by the French, instead Tallai, I went ; but it is au- 
thorised by the best authors. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je serai, I shall of will be. 

Tu seras, Thou shalt or wilt be. 

II sera, He shall or will be. 

Plur. Nous serons, We shall or will be. 

Vous serez, You shall or will be. 

Ik seront, They shall or will be. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Sois, Be, (thou.) 

Plur. Soyons, Let us be, for be, (we.) 
Soyez, Be, (you.) 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. J'ttois* I was. 

Tu etois, Thou wast. 

II ttoit, He was. 



* We give the same meaning to j'toois as to jefus, because the English 
have nothing in their language corresponding exactly with the j tools of 
the French ; for the use therefore oifelois and je fas, we must recollect 
what has been said on the optative mood, thai je /us is absolute, and 
y toots relative to another verb, and anterior to it. 



72 

JSous ttionsy We were. 

Vous ttieZy You were. 

lis etoienty They were. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je seroisy 1 would, should, or could be. 

Tu seroisy Thou wouldst, shouldst, or couldstbe, 
II seroity He would, should, or could be. 

Plur. NousserionSy We would, should, or could be. 
Vous serieZy You would, should, or could be. 
lis seroienty They would, should, or could be, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje soisy That I may be. 





Que tu soisy 
Qxiil soity 


That thou mayest be. 
That he may be. 


Plur. Que nous soyons y 
Que vous soyeZy 
Qu'ils soienty 


That we may be. 
That you may be. 
That they may be. 


x 


Past Tense. 


Sing. 


Quejefussey 
Que tu fusses y 
Qu'ilfiity 


That I might be. 
That thou mightest be. 
That he might be. 


Plur. 


Que nous fissions , 
Que vousfussieZy 
Qu'ilsfussenty 


That we might be. 
That you might be. 
That they might be. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Etre, (to) be. 

Participle present. 

Etant P Being, 



73 

Participle Past. 
Ete, Been. 

These are all the tenses of the verb, to be, Etre. 

What is commonly called the compound tenses of verbs, 
or with more propriety by some, the perfect voice, is 
formed merely by any participle past being added to each 
person of the verb to have, through its moods and tenses ; 
as for example, 

To have been, Avoir ete. 

But such a conjugation is entirely useless, since it is only 
adding, been, ete, to the verb, to have, avoir ^ which will be 
given hereafter. 

The verb, to be, etre, may properly be always considered 
as the substantive verb, that is, expressing merely the being 
or existence, without any accident or affection added to it ; or 
the verb simple : and to have, avoir, is an active verb im* 
plying possession. 

GENERAL OBSERVATION. 

Every verb must agree with its nominative in person 
and in number, but after collective nouns, such as heap, 
amas ; crowd, joule ; infinity, infinite ; number, nombre ; 
most part, la plupart ; &c. followed by a genitive, the verb 
must agree with that genitive in number, the whole form- 
ing the nominative to the verb, as, 

Most of my friends are La plupart de mes amis 
dead. sont marts. 

The author of this grammar being convinced, first by re- 
flection, and since by long experience, that the best method 
of learning verbs is not to run over a table, and to get it by 
heart, as it is called ; a task almost above any one's patience, 
and attended with great iuconv* nience, but to learn persons 
of verbs indiscriminately, and one at a time, as they occur 
in the exercises, from the first day they begin, and to per- 
severe in such a practice for some time, never failing to re- 

£ 



74 

peat the corresponding English meaning as in the table ; 
has intermixed the persons and tenses, at least of the indi- 
cative and imperative moods, reserving the optative and 
subjunctive moods for the matter of other exercises. If 
such a method, which calls to mind the right expression at 
once, without the danger of losing oneself in the maze of 
moods and tenses ever differing from each other, has not 
been thought of before, it is because it was impracticable 
with the common tables of verbs in all grammars which 
give several meanings to one tense, and multiply them with- 
out end ; while according to reason they are few, and can 
have only one meaning, which has been, and will be ad- 
hered to throughout the tables of the verbs in this gram- 
mar ; the benefit of which principle will soon be felt, it is 
hoped, by such as will choose to make the attempt with 
their pupils, to whom they will spare thereby an almost in- 
supportable and universal difficulty, that of learning long 
tables of verbs by heart. 

The verbs, to Be, and to' Have, are here kept separate, 
that the learner may be less inclined to confound them. 

Exercises upon the Verb To Be, Etre. 
Indicative and Imperative Moods. 

Present, Past, and Future. 

I am happy.— My brother is come.— -They are too igno* 
heureux, adj. venu, pp. trop, adv. 

rant. — We were satisfied with him. — They will be sen- 
contcnt, adj. de, pr. sen- 

sible. — They were not admitted. — You will be very 
tuel, adj. adniis,w *r&, adv. 

tall. — They are gone out. — They were insulted. — We are 
grand, adj. sortis, pp. insulte, pp. 

all mortal. — My coat is very short. — Her cap will be 

mortel, adj. habit, rn. court, adj. bonnet, m. 

finished to-morrow. — We were much surprised .-*-H# 
fini, pp. demain, adv. ires, adv. surpris, pp. 



75 

will be handy. — They were dismissed without ceremony.-— 

adroit, adj. renvoye, pp. sans ie, f. 

You are ill informed.— Be quiet. — They shall be repri- 
mal, informe, pp. tranquille, adj. repri- 

manded.— Let us be faithful. — You will be learned. — My 
mande, pp. fidele, adj. savant, adj. 

house will be finished next 2 month 1 . — Be always mo- 
maison, f. prochain, adj. mois, m. mo- 

derate in your desires.— -They are gone to church. — His 
dere, adj. dtsir, m. alle, pp. eglise, f. 
hat is too large. — I shall be on my guard. — They are 
chapeau, m. grand, adj. gardes, pi. 

very, learned. — You are very patient.— They will be re- 
savant f adj. adj. re- 

warded. — I was at home all the week. — I was attacked by 
co?npense t pp. maison, f. semaine, f. attaque, pp. 

two ruffians. — We shall be at home next Sunday. — My 

scelerat. maison, f. dimanche, m. 

cousin will be made a captain in a year hence. — You 

fait, pp x . capitaine ur* 

are seldom at home. — Let us be true to our engage- 

rarement, adv. a maison, f. 
ments, and we shall be esteemed by every body. — We 

de tout monde, m. 
were accosted by two strangers in uniform.— Be modest in 

accoste, pp. etr anger e, m. 

prosperity, and be patient in adversity. — We will be at your 

— — — e, f. te, f. chez, pr. 

brother's at seven o'clock this evening.— You are (very 

so ir, m. 
much) altered. — You are no longer the same man. — Be 
tres, adv. change, pp. ne . . .plus 

prudent as serpents and simple as doves, said our Lord 

colombe, f. dit, v. 
to his disciples. — They were surprised, and were cut in 

surpris, pp. taille 

pieces.-— You will be rewarded for your trouble. — Let us 
piece, f. recompense, pp. peine, f. 

E 2 



76 

be satisfied with our condition, — Appetite is the best 
content, adj. appetit, m. 

cook. Your cousins will be much astonished at this 

cuisinier, m. etonnes, pp. 

news. — Be careful of your things, and you will not be 

soigneux, adj. affaires, f. 

scolded. — Great towns are always full of noxious 2 

gronde, pp. mile, f. plein, adj. nuisible, adj. 

vapours 1 .-— The spoon is on the table, or in the drawer. — 
vapeur, f. cuiller, f. tiroir, m. 

The remedy is worse than the disorder. — My brother and 

remede,m, pire, adj. mal, m. frere 

sister will be here in the course of the evening. — Are you 
sctur cours, m. soiree, f. 

sure that you will be back ? — 
silr, adj . de retour. 

EXERCISES UPON THE OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNC- 
TIVE MOODS. 

I was in Paris when you were in London. — You would 

d, pr. d, pr. 

be subjected to the same laws, if you were an inhabitant of 

sounds, pp. loi, f. habitant, m. 

that country.-— We were, four in the coach, and two ser- 

pays, m. voiture, f. 

vants were on the coach-box. — If I were sure that you 

cocker, siege, m. sur, adj. 

might be happy, I should be satisfied. — I wish he may 

satisfait, pp. souhaite, v. 
be more prudent another time. — I should be very sorry 

fois, f. fdche 

if they were taken. — They would be punished, if they 
que, c. puni, pp. 

were known.— You were misinformed, for my brother was 

connu, pp. . mal informe, 

then with the army.— You would be very angry with him, 
mlors, adv. armeef. fdchi,pj>. contre 



77 

if you were informed of what he has done. — They were 

instruit ce que a fait, pp. 

inclined to gaming, they were always in bad company.— 

enclin, adj. jouer, v. toujours, adv. gnie,f. 

He was alone agaiust three, and besides, they were armed, 

seul, adj. - d'ailleurs, adv. 

and he was not (so). Your flowers would be in a better 

jleur, f. 
condition, if they were watered a little oftener. — Who 
etat, in. arrose, pp. 

would be so imprudent as to wish these men should 

que, c. souhaiter, v. de- 

become masters. — It is then we should be slaves. — We 
vinssent, v. alors, adv. esclave, m. & f. 

should be glad of his company, if he were of a more 

bien aise, adj. 
even temper. — I was in the countcy then, but my sister 
egal, adj. caractere, m. d campagne, f. 

was in town. — I should be very glad if he were made a ge- 

ville, f. que 

neral. — You would be surprised at his patience, if you were 

surpris, pp. de, pr. 
a witness of his sufferings. — Was it possible to suppose that 

temoin, c. g. souffrance, f. supposer, v. 

a man were so wicked ! — You were not gone, but you were 

mechant, adj. parti, pp. 

on the point of going, — His parents were very good 

partir, v. honnete,a&], 

people, but they were too indulgent. — The room was 

gens, pi. chambre, f. 

open, but the desk was locked. — The room in which 

ouvert, pp. pupitre, m. ferme, pp. 

we were, would be one of the finest apartments, if it were 

more lofty. — I was very anxious on their account. — My 

eleve, pp. inquiet, adj. compte, m. 

mother and sister were in a coach, but I was on horseback. 

voiture, f. moi, a, pr. chcval, m . 



78 

—Men in general would be lew unhappy if they 

moinsy adv. ?nalheureux, adj. 
were more virtuous. — If I were sure that he would be well 

vertueux, adj. fut, v. 

received, I should not be so uneasy. — That men might 
regu, pp. inquiet, adj. Pour que 

be truly happy, it would be proper that they were masters 

d propos 
over their own passions ; if it were so, this world would be 
de, pr. - " f. 

a paradise. 
paradis, m. 

CONJUGATION OF THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVK 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. J'ai, I have, 

Tu as, Thou hast. 

II a, He has. 

Plur. Now avons, We have. 
Vous avez, You have. 

lis ont, They have. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Tens, I had. 

Tu eus, Thou hadst. 

II eut, He had. 

Plur. Nous eumes, We had. 

Vous eutes, You had. 

lis eurent, They had. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Taurai y I shall or will have, 

Tu auras, Thou shalt or wilt have. 

11 aura, He shall or will have. 



7& 



Plur. 



Nous aurons, 
Vous aureZy 
lis auronty 



We shall or will hare. 
You shall or will have. 
They shall or will have. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Aie> Have (thou). 

Plur. Ayons, Let us have, for, have (we). 
Ayez, Have (ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



J'avois, 
Tu avuis, 
II avoity 

Nous avions, 
Vous avieZy 
11$ avoient, 



I was having. 
Thou wast having. 
He was having. 

We were having. 
You were having. 
They w 7 ere having. 



Future Tense. 

I would, should, or could have. 

Thou wouldst, shouldst, or couldst have. 

He would, should, or could have. 
Plur. NousaurionSy We would, should, or could have. 
Vous auriez } You would, should, or could have. 
Ih auroient, They would, should, or could have. 



Sing. J'aurois, 
Tu auroisy 
II auroit, 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Que j aie That I may have. 

Que tu aiesy That thou mayest have. 
Quit ait, That he may have. 



80 

Plur, Que nous ayons, That we may have. 
Que vous ayez, That you may have. 
Qu'ils aient 9 That they may have. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Quefeusse, That I might have. 

Que tu eusseSy That thou mightest have* 

Qu'il eut, |That he might have. 

Plur. Que nous e&ssions, That we might have. 
Que vous eussiez, That you might have. 
Qu'ik eussent, That they might have* 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Avoir, to have. 

Participle Present. 
Ayanty having* 

Participle Past. 

Eu, e y had. 

These are all the tenses of this verb, since what is callecf 
the compound tenses of it, is nothing more than the repe- 
tition of this verb with its own participle past ; as, 

Avoir eu y To have had. 

Exercises upon the Verb Avoir, to Have. 

Indicative and Imperative Moods. 

Present, Past, and Future. 

I have a book, — He has friends who have money. — You 
lime, m. ami, m. argent, m. 

had a passport. — They shall have their stockings. We had 

passeport, m. has, m. 

a pleasant journey. — You will have a holiday. — We have 

agriable, adj. voyage m. conge, m. 

two boarders. — Where have you put my gloves ? — - 
pensionnaire, m. Ou, adv. mis, pp. gant } m* 



81 

You will have fine tulips. — I have some change. — They 

tulipe, f. monnoie,f. 

have orange trees. — We had strawberries at our dessert. — 
or anger, m. /raise, f. dessert, m. 

You will have much fruit this year. He has not 

beaucoup, adv. annee, f. ne . ..pas 

cut the meat. — You have sung 2 very well. 1 

coupe, pp. viandej. chante,pp. tres, adv. bien, adv. 

You have not looked for your book.— Have they ap- 
ne . . . pas cherche, pp. ap- 

peased his anger. — I have done my exercise. — They have 
paise, pp. colere, f. fait, pp. theme, m. 

lost their time. — We shall have an answer to-mor- 

perdu, pp. terns, m. reponse, f. de- 

row. He has been robbed in the street. — He will have 

main, adv. vole, pp. rue, f. 

many enemies. — They shall have no rest. — I have 

bien, adv. ennemi, m. ne. .. point r epos, m. 

written all night. — We shall have a storm. — They have 

ecrit, pp. nuit, f. or age, m. 

had some thunder. — You had the misfortune of losing your 

eu, pp. tonnere, m. malheur, m. perdre, v. 

best support. — Will you have done at five o'clock ? — 

appui, m. fini, pp. d cinq heures, pi. 

He had a horse killed under him. — You had a letter from 

tue, pp. sous, pr. lettre, f. 

him, — Let us have respect for our superiors, civility for 

lui, pro. , m. eur, adj. e, f. 

our equals, and affability for our inferiors. — You will 

egal, adj. e, f. eur, adj. 

have very few people of your opinion. — Have you 

peu. adv. ^ens , f. 

seen what I have written to Mrs. B. concerning our affair ? 

vu, pp. ecrit, pp. touclxant, pr. 

Have prudence and patience, and you will have success. — * 

, f. , f. succes, m. 

The English have the best general of the age. — Let 
Anglois meilleur, adj. siecle, m. 

e3 



82 

vs have pity on our poor fellow-creatures, God has made a 
de, pr. semblable, adj. fait, pp. 

particular command of it. — We had a great storm 

Her, adj. en, pro. or age, m. 

yesterday, and I think we shall have another to-day. 

hier, adv. pense, v. aujourd'hui, adv. 

We have had a visit from one of our oldest friends. — You 

— e, f. ancieuy adj. 

had a great deal of trouble to find his residence. — Let us 

beau oup, adv. trouver, v. demeure, f. 

have gratitude for those who have obliged us. — They 

reconnoissance, f. oblige, pp. 

will have much difficulty to persuade him that he (is in the 

e, f. a, v. 

wrong.) — He who has a true friend has a most valuable 
tort, m. — Celui, pro. precieux, adj. 

treasure. — They have a great affection for one another.-— 

tresor, m. , f. 

We shall have some rain before night. — They will have 

pluie, f. nnit, f. 
another battle, if the enemy has yet sufficient forces. 
bataille,f. sujfisant, adj. , f . 

EXEKCISE UPON THE OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE 

MOODS. 

I had a good opinion of your brother. — We would have 

->f. 

written to you, if we had had your address. — You should 

icrit, pp, eu, pp. adresse, f. 

have had my horse, if you had mentioned it. — I wish we 

cheval, m. ni, pp. souhaite, v. 

may have a milder winter for the good of the poor. — We 

doux, adj. bien, m. pauvre, m. 

had some visits every day, when we were in the country.-— 

ca?npagne,f, 
Mr. B. would have a considerable fortune, if he had not 
^ adj, 



83 

lost so much by gaming.— If I had thought he had 

perdu, pp. tant, adv. jeu, m. cru, pp. 

a letter for me, I would have told him to give it me.— 

la, pro. 
They would have written to him, if they had known his 

su, pp. 
address. — You would have had a holiday, if you had been 
adresse, f. conge, m. 

diligent. — Men would have less occasion to be dis* 

, adj. moins, adv. sujet, m. me- 

pleased with one another, if they had more probity, and 

content, adj, e, f. 

candour. — The enemies would have been beaten, if they had 

candeur, f, battu, pp. 

attacked us, for we had a better general than they.— - 

attaqui, op. meilleur,2L(\]. eux, pr. 

We should have perished, if a boat had not come to our 

peri, pp. batteau etoit, v. venu 

assistance. — They would have been all killed, if they had 
tecours, m. tons, pro. 

not taken flight.— My sister would have written to yours, if 

fuile, f. 
she had known you were in England. — I doubt if he had 

su, pp. Angleterre, f. qu y 

followed your advice, though you had taken the trouble 
suivi, pp. avis, m. quand, adv. auriez, peine, f. 

of writing to him.— I should have killed a hare if I had 

tue lietre, m. 
had a gun. — They had not executed his commands. ■ ■ — 

fusil, m. execute, pp. ordres, m. 

Did he think that we would have accepted his offers f — 

Croyoit-ii offve, f. 

Wait here till I have finished my letter. — 

Attendez, v. jusqu'd ceque aie, v. 

You would have seen a most beautiful picture, if you 

vu, pp. tres, adv. tableau, m. 

had been with me.— I should have done now, if I 
enssicz, v. avec fini, pp, 



84 

had had the book which you had taken on my table. — 

eusse, v. pris, pp. 

They were always having fresh quarrels. — I wish you 

nouveau, adj. querelle, f. 
may have success in your undertaking. — What could he have 

entreprise, f. 
done, if he had not been assisted by his friends ? — He 

eut, v. aide, pp. 

would have been ruined, if he had not ceased gaming. — * 

mine, pp. jouer, v. 

They would have sent him to prison, if he had made 
envoye, pp. fait, pp. 

any resistance. — I shall have finished presently. 

tout-d-l'heure. 

In the interrogations, it must be observed, that when the 
nominative of verbs is expressed by a noun, it remains still 
in French before the verb ; but one of the pronouns, 
ii y elle; i/s, dies; must be placed after the verb, accord- 
ing to the gender and number, and when the verb ends 
by a vowel, the letter t, with a hyphen on each side, 
thus, -t-, is to be added in the third person singular be- 
tween the verb and the pronoun. Ex. 

Has your brother written to Voire frire } vous a-t-il 
you. ecrit^ 

That is, Your brother, has he written i 

But if the sentence begins with the interrogative pronoun, 
what, que ; the pronouns are not wanting, and the noun is 
left after the verb as in English. With the two adverbs 
comment, how, and combien, how much, one may write 
both ways, following the ear ; as, 

What does his brother do ? Que fait son fr&e'l 
How does your cousin do ? Comment se porte voire cou- 
sin V 
or Comment voire cousin seporie- 

$-ih 



85 

Promiscuous Exercises on the Two Verbs, 
Etre, to Be, and Avoir, to Have, with Negations 
and Questions. 

Am I younger than you ? — Are you not older than 
jeune, adj. age, adj. 

my brother ? — Will you have a ball to-morrow ? — Has my 

bat, m. 
cousin written to you? — Is your sister returned from 
icrit, pp. revenu, pp. 

Spain ? Has not your father a very fine country seat ? — 

Esp eigne, f. 7?iaison, f. 

Are not these children very interesting ? — Have you a good 

interessant, adj. 
garden ? — Are we not all children of the same father ? 
jar din, m, meme, adj. 

— Have we not all the same origin ? — Are you not very 

e, f. 

glad of going to see your uncle ? — Has not my brother 

aise, adj. alter, v. oncle. 

spoken to you of his marriage ? — Are not the English women 

mariage, m. 
generally handsomer than the French women ? — Have we not 

beau, adj. 
all duties to fulfil ? — Are we not all responsible for our 

devoir, m. remplir, v. able, adj. 

conduct to God our Judge ? — When will you have finish- 

conduite, f. Juge. 

ed your work ? — Are not the King's horses very fine ?-— 

cheval, adj. 
Is not this book better than that ? — Were you not at 

meilleur, adj. 
home yesterday ? — Shall I have the pleasure of seeing you 
mauon, f. hier, adv. plat sir, m. voir, v. 

to-morrow ? — How much money have you for your jour- 

argent, m. voy- 

ney ? — — What has he said to you ? — Shall you have 
age, m. — Que, pr. dit, pp. 

done when I come back? — Are you a good player at 
fini, pp. revkndrai, \, jouer, v. 



86 

draughts ?— • Have you beaten your antagonist ?— Are nof 

dames. battu, pp. t- e, m. 

these books very well written ? — Are you not glad of hav- 

aise, adj. 
ing read them ? — Would you not be sorry if he were 

lu, pp. que, c. 

gone? Have you not had bad weather all the time you 

parti, pp. terns, m. terns, m. 

have been absent? — Will not the walk be too long 

ete, pp. promenade, f. 

for you ? — Could you not have finished sooner, if you had 

fini> pp. 

chosen ? Is not our General wiser than yours ? — Have 

voulu, pp. 

you had the letter which was directed here for you ? — 

adresse, pp. 

Will you not have your money, if you want it. 

avoir besoin,\. 
Would it not be more proper to send a letter 

plus, adv. apropos, adv. envoyer, v. 

to him ? — Was your brother in Portugal last year ? 

dernier an, m. 
Has not my brother been very fortunate in his under- 

heureux, adj. entre- 

taking? — Would you not be glad to see the enemies of 
prise, f. 

order punished? — Would they not have plundered the 
ordre, m. pille, pp. 

town, if they had succeeded ? — Was not you brother in Lon- 
reussi, pp. d 

don last week? Has he found a good situa- 

dernier, adj. se?naine t f. trouve, pp. place,?. 

tion ? — Would he not have done better, if he had kept 

garde, pp. 
the one he had? — When will the Strand bridge befinish- 

ctlle, pr. », m. pont, m. 

ed ?— Will it not be one of the greatest ornaments of Lon- 

ornementf m. 



87 

don, as well as an object of utility? — Will not Somerset 

ohjet, m. 
House have a grand effect from the middle of the bridge i 
palais, m. 

—Yes, but would not the effect be greater still if that edi- 
fice were finished ? 

Remark on the Verb Avoir, to Have. 

The verb avoir is used in French with the words denot- 
ing, age, hunger, thirst, cold, heat, hope, fear, right, 
wrong, time, place, &c. instead of the verb, to be, in Eng- 
lish. 

How old is hei Quel age z-t-il? 

I am hungry, J y &\faim. 

EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING REMARKS. 

How old do you think Mr. C. is ? He is very near 

age, m. ait, v. 

fifty years old. — He (does not look) so old as that. 

an, m. avoir I' air, v. age, adj. 

He will be fifty years old in the month of January 

^ mois, m. Janvier, m. 

next. -When my brother came, he was very hungry, 

prochain, adj. vint, v. faim, f. 

and very thirsty. — I was very cold , when I arrived at an 
soif, f. froid, m. arrival, v. 

inn where there was a good fire. — I was soon as 

auberge, f. feu, m. 

warm as I had been cold. — I shall be twenty years old 
chaud, adv. en, pp. an, m. 

the tenth of July next. — Is not the King several years older 

dix, m. 
than the Queen? — The Prince Regent will be fifty-five years 

old on the twelfth of next August. — Were you not very hungry 
douze, m. Aout* faim, f. 



88 

when you landed, after having been so long without 

debar quates, V. 
provisions? — We were much more thirsty than hungry, 

soif, f. faim y f. 

because the heat was very great.— My eldest brother 

chaleur, f. aine, adj. 

w r as twenty-six years old when he died at Paris in the 

mourut, v. 

year one thousand seven hundred and eighty-four. 

quatre-mngt, adj. 
I w r as afraid of being troublesome, otherwise I should have 

peur, f. importun, adj. 

asked your opinion on the subject. — He is in hopes of 

ce sujet, m. espoir, m. 

obtaining a good situation when he is twenty years 
obtenir, v. place, f. aura, v. 

old. — They would be in the wrong to be afraid of him, 
& On, pro. tort, m. peur, f. 

he is not so dangerous as they think. — There will be great 

eux, adj. on pense, v. 

rejoicing to-morrow on account of this impor- 

rejouissances, plu. demain, adv. cause, f. 

tant victory. — He is in the wrong not to follow your advice, 

suivre, v. avis, m. 
he would be more successful. — He would be (very much) 

succes, m. bien, adv. 

in the right to complain of such a treatment. — * — I am 

raison, f. traitement, m. 

never hungry at breakfast, but I am thirsty. — You will be 

faim, f. dejeuner, m. soif, f. 

very warm if you take your great coat. — — I was not 

chaud, m. prenez, v. redingote, f. 

too warm the other day though I had it on. — Do as you 

eusse <&* 
please, but I am always warm enough without a great 
voudrez, v. assez, adv. 

coat, because I walk fast. My father would be 

parceque marche, Y. viie 9 adv. 



89 

more than ninety years old if he were alive. ■ My grand- 
ee, pr. en vie, adv. 
father was exactly ninety years old when he died. 
pere mourut, v» 

CONJUGATION IN ER. 
Parler, to Speak. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing. Je park, I speak. 

Tu paries, Thou speakest. 

It parle y He speaks. 

Plur. Nous parlons, We speak. 

Vous par lez } You speak. 

Ilsparlenty They speak. 

Past. 

Sing. Je parlaiy I spoke. 

Tu parlais } Thou spokest. 

11 parla 7 He spoke. 

Plur. Nous parldmes, We spoke. 

Vous parldtes. You spoke. 

lis parler ent> They spoke. 

Future. 

Sing. Je parleraiy I shall or will speak. 

Tu par /eras y Thou shalt or wilt speak. 

II parlera y He shall or will speak. 

Plur. Nous parleronSy We shall or will speak. 

Vous parlereZy You shall or will speak. 

lis parler out , They shall or will speak. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Parle, Speak (thou). 



90 



Plur. 



Partona, 
Parlez, 



Let us speak. 
Speak (you). 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 



Sing. Je parlotSy 
Tu parlois, 
II parloit, 

Plur. Nous parlions, 
Vous parlieZy 
Us parloient. 



I was speaking. 
Thou wast speaking* 
He was speaking. 
We were speaking. 
You were speaking. 
They were speaking. 



Je parlerois, 
Tu parleroisy 
II parlerois, 

Nous parlerionSy 
Vous parleriez 9 
lis parleroient, 



Future Tense. 
Singular. 
I would, should, or could speak. 
Thou wouldst, shouldst, or couldst speak* 
He would, should, or could speak. 

Plural. 
We would, should, or could speak. 
You would, should, or could speak. 
They would, should, or could speak* 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 
Sing. Que je parky That I may speak. 



Plur 



Sing. 



That thou mayst speak* 
That he may speak. 
That we may speak. 
That you may speak. 
That they may speak. 

Past Tense. 

Queje parlasse, That I might speak. 

Que tu parlasses, That thou mightest speak* 

Qu'il parlaty That he might speak. 



Que tu paries, 
Quil parley 
Que nousparlions, 
Que vous parliez, 
Qu Us par lent , 



91 

Plur. Que nous parlassions, That we might speak. 
Que vous parlassiez, That you might speak, 
Quits par (assent, That ihey might speak. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Par lev. To speak. 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Variant, Speaking. 

PARTICIPLE PAST. 

Parle, e, Spoken. 

After the same manner are conjugated about 2,700 regu- 
lar verbs of this first conjugation. 

The following are to be excepted ; viz. oiler, to go, 
which being very irregular, will be seen at the head of the 
irregular verbs. 

Envoyer, to send, is irregular only in the future of the 
indicative, and of the optative, which are to be written 
jenvtrrai, and fenverrois, the five other persons following 
| in a regular way. # 

Verbs ending in ayer and oyer, as essayer, to try, en- 
•coyer, to send, change the y into i, whenever the letter y 
is immediately followed by an e mute ; ex.fessaie, tu essaies, 
il essaie; jenvoie, tu envoies, il envoie, &c. 

The compound tenses formed from the verb, to have, 
avoir, and the participle past, may be called properly the 
I perfect voice, when the participle is identified with the verb, 
and consequently transitive. 

Observe that they make use of: 

Mener, amener, emmener, for all things that are led; but 



* It is to be observed, that although there are many irregular verbs, 
there are few irregular tenses, and that it is enough to know well one 
person of any tense, to form regularly the five others, as in the instance 
above ; J'enverrai, tu envtrras, il enverra, &c. 



92 

they use porter, apporter, emporter, for all things that arc 
carried or conveyed from one place to another. 

EXEBCISES ON THE FlRST CONJUGATION IN ER. 

Indicative and Imperative Moods. 

What do they speak of in town ? — They speak (very much) 

quoi, pr. purler, v. beaucoup, adv. 

of peace. — This war will not last long, for the French 

paix, f. guerre, f. Francois 

themselves wish for peace. — Sir, somebody wishes 

desirer, v. souhaiter, v. 

to speak with you. — Who is it r — The butcher, who brings 

ce, pr. boucher apporter, v. 

his bill. Very well. He may come in. — John, 

memoire, m. Fort bien. pent, v. entrer, v. Jean, 

carry that letter to the post, and you will call at my tai- 
porter,\. passer, v. tail- 

lor's in coming back. — He will speak of your affair to Mr. 
leur revenant, p. pr. parler, v. Mr. 

A. — He hopes that you will gain your cause.— He sung 

esperer, v. gagner, v. , f. chanter, v. 

for an hour, and then he played on the violin.—- — -The 

jouer, v. violon, m. 

thieves entered the house, and stole whatever they 
voleur entrer, v. voler, v. 

could (lay hold of). — Will you bring your sister with 
purent, v. attraper, v. amener, v. 

you ? — The ship in which she comes will not arrive 

vaisseau, m. ment 

before next week. — He mounted his horse, and 

avant, pr. prochain, adj. monter, v. cheval 

galloped off as fast as he could. — We spoke of you to him, 
galoper,v. vile put, v. parler, v. 

smd we found him disposed to oblige you. — Always 
trouver, v. dispose, pp. obliger, v. 



93 

respect old age and shew compassion for the poor.—* 

vieillesse, f. montrer, v. pauvre. 

Those who prefer their fatal ambition to the safety 

preferer, v. salut, m. 

of the common cause deserve punishments, and not 
commun, adj. meriter, v. chdtiment, m. 

rewards. We will dance, or we will play at some 

recompense, f. danser, v. jouer, v. 

game, if you prefer it. — They will fold the linen, and 
jeu, m. le 3 pro. plier,v. linge, m. 

bring it this afternoon. — I spoke yesterday to a poor lame 

estropie 
man whom I met in the street; I asked him 
rencontrer, v. rue, f. demander, v. 

since when he was lamed. He gave me no answer, 

depuis quand, adv. estropie, pp. reponse, f. 

but began to weep. 1 gave him a trifle, and 

se mit, v. pleurer, v. bagatelle, f, 

left him, sorry for having renewed the cause of his 
laisscr, v. renouvelle, pp. 

grief. Ladies, we will accompany you in your walk, 

chagrin, m. accompagner, v. promenade, f. 

and protect you if anybody insult you. — Take the chil- 
proteger, v. insulter, v. Mener, v. 

dren to church, and watch over their conduct. Let ui 

eglise, f. veillez, v. sur conduite, f. 

think before we speak, it is the means of speaking 
penser, v. moyen, m. 

w r ell. — They will work from two o'clock till five, and 
tr avail ler, v. heure, f. 

then they will play. He lends sometimes, but he never 

puis, adv. jouer, v. preter, v. 

borrows. They will not win, if they play. En- 

tmprunier, v. gagner, v. jouer, v. 

deavour rather to do well, than to do much. 
faire, v. 



94 

EXERCISES ON THE OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE 

MOODS. 

He was coming in, when we went out. 1 would 

sortimes, v. 
accompany you, if I had not some letters to write. ■ ■ 

• — . gner, v. ecrire, v. 

He would buy another horse, if he could dispose of 
acheter, v. pouvoit, v. 

his.- We were playing at cards, and reckoning our gain, 

sien, pr. jouer, v. carte, f. compter, v. 

but we were not thinking of what was passing in the town. 

penser, v. d se passoit, v. r. 

—•The mob was throwing stones in the windows 

populace, f. jeter, v. pierre, f. fenetres, f. 

of the people whom they supposed to be hostile 

particulier, m. supposer,v. ennemi,&&], 

to their interests. — Permit me to help you.— Do you 

Permettez, v. aider, v. 

think he will approve such a conduct?— I would 
croyez, v. approuver, v. tel, adj. 

advise you to visit him yourself. — Who could blame 
conseiller, v. pourroit, v. blamer, v. 

him if he employed his time for the good of society ? — 

employer, v. bien, m. 

If he desired Mr. C. to go there for him, I am sure he 

prier, v. y, adv. 

would not refuse him. — He would buy the lease of the 

refuser } v. bail, m. 

house he occupies, if he had money. — He would bring 

occuper, v. amener, v. 

his daughter, if you were to invite her, for she would like 

fille, inviter, v. aimer ^r. 

to come here.— Often would she remain motionless on 

venir, v. rester, v. immobile, adj. 

the sea-shore, which she bedewed with her tears.— 
mer, f. rivage, m. arroser, v. larme, f. 

It is time that we should send in the country the 

envoycr, v. d campagne, f. 



98 

goods which W45 have bought. — Though a man should 
meubles, m. Quand, adv. 

possess the world, he would not be the better for it. 

posse der, v. mieux en, pro. 

They would ruin themselves, if they bought so great an 

ruiner, v. acheter, v. 

estate. — Who is he who could envy the state of a 
bien, m. celui, pro. envier, v. 

man devoured by ambition?— If men could appreciate hu- 

devore, pp. apprecier, v. 

man grandeurs, they would not seek so ardently 

recJiercher, v. ardemment, adv. 
after them. — You would oblige me much, if you called 

obliger, v. passiez, v. 

at Mr. F/s. — We were going back to the ship, when 
chez retoumer, v. vaisseau, m. 

the captain told us we could not go on board for 

capitaine dit, v. embarquer, v. avant^ pr. 

three days. — They would return to their native 

retourner, v. dans, pr. natal, adj. 
country with much pleasure. — I told him he might 
pays, m. plaisir, rn. pouvoit, v. 

eat an apple, but that he should not touch the peaches 
manger, v. toucher, v. peche, f. 

and apricots. 1 knew they would find the press 

abricot, m. savois, v. armoire, f. 

locked. — —If I thought the walk would tire her too much, 
ferine, pp. croyois, v. 

I would not take her so far. Do you think he 

mener, v. si, adv. loin, adv. croyez, v. 

would buy this picture if we shewed it to him ? — It would 

tableau, m. montrer, v. 
be proper for masters to exercise the judgment of their 

apropos, adv. exercer, v. jugement, m. 

pupils, and encourage a habit of reflection. — I do not 
eleve, c. g. encourager, v. reflexion, f. % 

doubt but they would profit more than they do. 
douter, v. profiler, v. font, v. 



96 

SECOND CONJUGATION ENDING IN IR. 
Benir, to Bless. 

INDICATITE MOOD. 





Present Tense. 


Sing. 


Je benis, 


I bless. 




Tu benis, 


Thou blessest 




It benit, 


He blesses. 


Plur. 


Nous benissons. 


We bless. 




Vous benissez, 


You bless. 




lis betiissent. 


They bless. 




Past Tense. 


Sing. 


Je benis, 


I blessed. 




Tu benis 9 


Thou blessedst. 




II benit. 


He blessed. 


Plur. 


Nous benimes. 


We blessed. 




Vous beniteSy 


You blessed. 




lis benirenty 


They blessed. 




Future Tense. 


Sing. 


Je beniraiy 


I shall or will bless. 




Tu beniraSy 


Thou shalt or wilt bless. 




II benira, 


He shall or will bless. 


Plur. 


Nous benironSy 


We shall or will bless. 




Vous benireZy 


You shall or will bless. 




lis benironty 


They shall or will bless* 




IMPERATIVE MOOD, 




Present Tense. 


Si 


ng. Benis, 


Bless (thou). 


Plur. Benissons, 


Let us bless. 




Benissez, 


Bless (you). 



97 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 



Past Tense. 

Sing. Je benissois, I was blessing. 

Tu benissois, Thou wast blessing. 

II benissoit, He was blessing. 

Plur. Nous benissions, We were blessing. 

Fous benissiez, You were blessing. 

lis benissoient, They were blessing. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je benirois, I would, could, or should bless. 

Tu benirois, Thouwouldst,couldst,orshouldstbless. 

II beniroit, He would, could, or should bless. 
Plur. Nous benirionsy We would, could, or should bless. 

Vous benirieZy You would, could, or should bless. 

lis beniroienty They would, could, or should bless. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje benisse, That I may bless. 

Que tu benisseSy That thou mayest bless. 

Quil benisse. That he may bless. 

Plur. Que nous benissions. That we may bless. 

Que vous benissiez , That you may bless. 

Quils benissenty That they may bless. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje benisse, That I might bless. 

Que tu berusse, That thou mightest bless. 

Quil benit, That he might bless. 

Plur. Que nous benissions, That we might bless. 

Que vous benissiez, That you might bless. 

Quits benissent, That they might bless. 



98 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Benir, to Bless. 

Participle Present. 
Benissant, blessing. 

Participle Past. 
Beniy e, Blessed, or Blest. 

After the same manner are conjugated about 200 regular 
verbs; the following ar& irregular : 

Acquerir, to acquire. Ouvrir, to open. 

Assaillir, to assault. Partir, to depart. 

Bouillir, to boil. Se repentir, to repent. 

Couriry to run. Sentir, to smell, to feel. 

Cueillir, to gather. Servir, to serve. 

Dormir, to sleep. Sortir, to go out. 

Faillir, to fail. Souffrir, to suffer. 

Fuir, to flee. Tenir, to hold. 

Mentir, to lie. Fenir } to come. 

Mourir, to die. Vetir, to clothe. 

Offrir, to offer. And their compounds. 

Exercises upon the SecondConjugation in IR. 

Indicative and Imperative Moods. 

I shudder when I reflect on the number of men who 
frtmir, v. reflechir, v. nombre, m. 

have perished by the sword for these five and twenty 
peri, pp. depuis, pr. 

y ears . It is to be hoped that the world will enjoy 

espercr, v. monde, m. jouir, v. 

some repose after so much blood shed. — — The wicked 

repandu, pp. 
furnish arms against themselves. — Let us hate discord 
foumir, v. ' eux-?nemes, pr. hair, v. 

and animosities, and let us cherish the opposite virtues to 

cherir,v. oppose } pp. 



99 

i 
those vices. — Your brother succeeds better than you, be- 

reussir, v. 

cause he reflects more. Physicians often succeed 

reflechir,v. davantage,adv. Medecin reussir, v. 

in curing the diseases of the body, and sometimes 
d guerir,\. corps, m. 

those of the mind. — Reflect first, then you will act 

esprit, m. d'abord,a.dv. alors agir,v. 

prudently; and, if you do not succeed, it will 

prudemment, adv. ce 

not be your fault. Mr. P will supply you with 

faute, f. fournir, v. 

all the goods you want, because he is sure you will 

meuhle, m. 
fulfil your engagements. — He will not succeed, be- 

remplir, v. , m. reussir, v. 

cause he uses unlawful means. These 

employer, v. illegitime, adj. moyen, m. 
rose-trees will soon blossom, if the warm weather 
rosier, m. jieurir, v. chaleur, f. 

continues. — I shall applaud your efforts, whenever 
continuer : v. applaudir, v. 

you shew a desire of fulfilling your duty.— — 

montrer, v. remplir, v. devoir, m. 

They will enjoy the pleasure of good company. — Your 

jouir, v. plaisir, m. 

wounds will heal much faster, if you remain quiet 
blessure, f. guerir, v. tranquille, adj. 

in your apartment. — A sensible master removes the diffi- 

sense, adj. aplanir,\\ 

culties, and by that means succeeds better in rendering 

reussir, v. rendre, v. 

the study entertaining. — Let us finish one thing before we 

etude, f. attrayant, adj. finir, v. 

begin another. — Wolves satiate their hunger on 

commencer, v. loup, m. assouvir, v. faim, f. 

innocent lambs. The relation of such miseries 

agneau, m. recti, m. tel, adj. mal, tn. 

F2 



100 

softens the hardest hearts. — They build all the houses 

attendrir,\. insensible, adj. coeur, m. bdtir, v. 

of the same height, and finish them in the same 

^ hauteur, f. finir, v. 

manner. — You will whiten your linen, if you leave it 
maniere, f. blanchir, v. linge, m. 

exposed to the dew in the month of May .^— The flocks 

rosee, f. 
skip in the plain, while the oxen stun the ear 
bondir, v. plaine, f. tandis bceuf etourdir, v. 

with their bellowings. — — We widened the breach, and en- 

mugissement, m. elargir, v. breche, f. 

tered the town. — The inhabitants furnished us with all 

fournir, v. 
necessaries, and rejoiced at being delivered from 
Tiecessaire, m. rejouir, v. de, pr. 

their tyrants. — -The most guilty shall perish, because 

coupable, adj. perir, v. 

they have betrayed the cause they had sworn to defend. 

trahi, pp. jure, pp. defendre, v. 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

I was reflecting on the changes which have taken 

reflechir, v. changement, m. eu, pp. 

place lately. — He was enriching himself at the 

lieu, m. dernier ement, ^dv. enrichir, v. 

expense of the public. — They would rebuild their 

depens, m. pi. , m. rebdtir, v. 

house on a larger scale, if their father would furnish 

etendu, pp. plan, m. fournir, v. 

them with the necessary funds. — Your hand would heal 

fond, m. guerir, v. 

very fast, if you were less impatient. — He was building 

bdtir, v. 
his new house when I demolished mine. — I most sin- 

demolir, v. tres, adv. 

cerely wish you may succeed. — We ought not to wish 
reussir, v. devons, v. 



101 

that the wicked should perish, but that they should 

mediant, adj. perir, v. 

be converted. — He would furnish the necessary mo- 

convertir, v. fournir, v. necessazre, adj. 

ney for so useful an establishment. — It is right that a 
utile, adj. etablissement, m. juste, adj. 

master should punish the lazy. 1 could finish 

paresseux, adj. 
very soon if you would help me. — You were finishing 
bientot, adv. vouliez, v. aider, v. finir, v. 

your exercise when they began theirs. — They would 

theme, m. commencer, v. 

punish those who would disobey the law. If Mr. 

punir, v. desobeir,v. hi, f. 

F. was here, he would divert us by his humour. — — 

ici, adv. divertir, v. esprit, m. 

The illuminations dazzled the eyes of the spectators. — 

, f. eblouir, v. yeux, pi. eur, m. 

The sun would dazzle me, if I had not my hat 

soleil, m. eblouir, v. chapeau, m. 

on my eyes. — The surgeon ordered a draught which 
yeux, pi. chirurgien ordonner, v. potion, f. 

might benumb the pain. The report of the cannon 

engourdir, v. douleur, f. bruit, m. canon, m. 

stunned their ears. —He moved the most hardened 

etourdir, v. oreille, f. jlechir, v. endurci, pp. 

hearts by the force of his eloquence. — Such an end would 

f. Tel, adj. fin, f. 

disgrace the finest reputation. — He burned with rage 

jletrir, v. 1 — , f. fremir,v. de, pr. — , f. 

whenever he saw himself beaten. — You would grow 
quand, adv. voyoit, v. battu, pp. grandir, v. 

faster if you took more exercise. — We were all 
plus vice preniez, v. exercice, m. 

wishing that they might succeed in their just efforts. — 
souhaiter, v. reussir, v. 

It was impossible for him to punish all the guilty. — It is 

punir, v. coup able. 



102 

to be wished that they may not grow old in vice and 

souhaiter, v. veillir, v. 

ignorance. — I should wish that he might act with more 

, f. voudrois, v. cigir, v. 

firmness and resolution. — Tell the taylor he must 

fermete, f. , f. Dites, x, tailleur faut 

flatten better the seams of this coat. — It was not pos- 

applatir mieux couture, f. habit, m. 

sible that we could finish before night. — The fruit would 

finir, v. avant nuit, f. 
ripen faster if the weather were warmer. — It is an act 
murir, v. terns, m. chaud, adj. actc, m. 

of justice that the rich should feed the poor. 

nourrir, v. 



THIRD CONJUGATION ENDING IN OIR. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 





Present Tense. 


Sing. 


Je doisy 
Tu doisy 
II doity 


I owe. 
Thou owest. 
He owes. 


Plur. 


Nous devonsy 
Vous deveZy 
lis doiventy 

Past Tense. 


We owe. 
You owe. 
They owe. 


Sing, 


Je dusy 
Tu dusy 

II duty 


I owed. 
Thou owedest. 
He owed. 


Plur. 


Nous dumesy 
Vous dutesy 
lis durenty 


We owed. 
You owed. 
They owed, 



J 03 



Future Tense. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



Je devrai, 
Tu devrasy 
II devra, 

Nous devronSy 
Vous devreZy 
Ik devronty 



I shall or will owe. 
Thou shalt or wilt owe. 
He shall or will owe. 

We shall or will owe. 
You shall or will owe. 
They shall or will owe. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Dots, Owe (thou). 

Plur. DevonSy Let us owe. 
DeveZy Owe (ye). 



Sing. 



Plur. 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 



Je devois, 
Tu devoisy 
II devoity 

Nous devionsy 
Vous devieZy 
Ik devoienty 



I was owing. 
Thou wast owing. 
He was owing. 

We were owing. 
You were owing. 
They were owing. 



Future Tense. 

Sing. Je devrois, 1 would, should, or could owe. 

Tu devroiSy Thou wouldst, shouldst, or couldst owe. 
II devroity He would, should, or could owe. 

Plur. Nous devrions, We would, should, or could owe. 
Vous devriez, You would, should, or could owe. 
J/5 devroient. They would, should, or could owe. 



104 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing, Queje doive, That I may owe. 

Que tu doives, That thou mayest owe, 
Qu'il doive, That he may owe. 

Plur. Que nous demons, That we may owe. 
Que vous devieZy That you may owe. 
Qu'ils doivent, That they may owe. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Queje dusse, That I might owe. 

Que tu d&sses, That thou mightest owe, 

Qu'il duty That he might owe. 

Plur. Que nous dussions, That we might owe. 
Que vous dussiez. That you might owe. 
QuHls dussenty That they might owe. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Devoir, To owe. 

Participle present. 

Devanty Owing, 

Participle past. 
Da, e, Owed. 

After the same manner are conjugated seven verbs 
only ; the following are irregular, as deviating from these : 



Asseoiry 


To seat. 


Mouvoir, 


To move. 


Dichoivy 


To decay. 


Pleuvoir y 


To rain. 


Falloiry 


To be needful. 


Pouvoir 7 


To be able. 


Valoiry 


To be worth. 


Savoir 9 


To know. 


VOlTy 


To see. 


Vouloiry 


To be willing 



And their compounds. 



105 

Exercises on the Third Conjugation in OIR. 

Indicative and Imperative Moods. 

I receive every day fresh proofs of his friendship 

recevoir chaque nouveau,adj. prenve,f. amide, f. 

for me. — He owes, in a great degree, his success to his 

devoir, v. par tie, f. succes, m. 

perseverance. — I shall certainly receive a letter to-morrow 

, f. recevoir, v. demain, adv. 

from my brother. — Do you perceive a ship at a great 

apercevoir, v. vaisseau, m. 

distance. He received a ball in the shoulder, and was 

eloignement, m. recevoir, r. balle, f. epaule, f. 

forced to retire. — ■< — You will perceive a great change 

retirer, v . ch angement, m . 

when you go back to your own country. — Receive 

retourner, v. dans, pr. P a J/ s > m « 

the assurance of my sincere gratitude. We shall per- 

reconnoissance, f. 
ceive thence the coast of France, if the weather be 
de Id cote, f. est, v. 

clear. He owes me fifty pounds, and he will 

clair, adj. devoir, v. livre sterling veut, v. 

not pay me. — They perceived him at a great distance, and 

ran after him. — Men owe their virtues, or vices, to 

coururent, v. 

education more than to nature. — We received, yesterday, 

hier, adj. 
two letters from Spain by the post. Every body 

Espagne, f. poste, f. 

entertains the highest opinion of his military talents. — 

concevoir,v. haut, adj. , f. militaire, adj. 

How much does he owe you ? — He owes me nothing 

Combien, adv. 

now, but he has owed me a great deal. Let us re- 

dtij pp. beaucoup, adv. 

vS 



106 

ceive with resignation the afflictions which God 

> f - 

sends us. — When he perceived the enemies were 

envoyer, v. 

beginning to be a little in disorder, he charged them 

charger, v. 

vigorously, and pursued them in their flight for several 

poursuivit, v. fuite, f. pendant, adv. 

hours. — We sometimes entertain a hatred for persons who 

lieure, f. concevoir, v. haine, f. personne, f. 

deserve our friendship. — They received information of 

meriter, v. amide, f. recevoir, V. 

the victory by an express, which was sent immediately after 

victoire, f. expres, m. aussitot, adv. 

the action. — The wicked entertain a bad opinion of all 

combat, m. concevoir, v. 

men. — The good will receive the reward promised 

hon, m, recompense, f. promis, pp. 

to virtue. — We shall owe you nothing more after this 

devoir, v. 

month. — They will perceive their error when it will be 

??wis,m. erreur,i. 

too late. 1 have heard of my brother yesterday 

tard, adv. J'ai eu, v. des nouvelles hier, adv. 

by mere chance.— We ought to be satisfied with our 

pur, adj. hasard,m. satis/ait, pp. 

lot, without envying that of others. — We are # to go to 

sort, m. celui, pro. devoir, v. 

the continent when we have settled our affairs. — They 

, m. fad, pp. 

are to receive a visit from their nephews in the course 

neveu courant, m. 

of the day. 

journee, f. 

* When the verb to he is used in the present of the indicative, or the 
past of the optative, preceding another verb in the infinitive, it is to 
be rendered in French by the same moods and tenses of the verb, devoir, 
to owe ; instead of the verb, etre f to be, 






107 



OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

I was entertaining very little hopes of his life, when 
concevoir, v. esperance, f. vie, f. 

I received the agreeable news that he was out of 

nouvelle, f. hors, adv. 

danger. He used to receive his rents for him very 

, m. (avoit coutume) 

regularly. We should perceive a great difference in 

regulierement, adv. , f. 

the climate, if we went to Italy. — -I should oftener re- 

climdt, m. souvent, adv. 

ceive letters from him, if he were in town. — They re- 

ville, f. 
ceived his apologies because they would not break 
excuse, f. rompre, v. 

openly with him. — If he should perceive that you 

ouver temerity adv. 

deceive him, he would never trust you. — Men should* 
tromper, v. fier, v. devoir, v. 

never forget that they are responsible to God for their 

oublier,\. able, adj. de 

actions. — I did not think he owed you so large a sum 

croyois, v. devoir, v. somme, f. 

We should avoid speaking ill of the absent. — If they 

devoir, v. eviter, v. mal, adv. 

deceived him, he would soon perceive it. — Though I 
tromper, v. apercevoir, v. 

often receive letters from him, I had rather he were 

aimer, v. 
with us. — Ought not this good old man to be assisted. — 
devoir, v. vieil!ard,m. secoitru, pp. 

Let them receive the punishment due to their crimes. — 
diatiment, m. 



* When the word should expresses a duty or necessity, correspond- 
ing in sense with the verb ought, it is to be rendered in French by the 
future of the optative of the verb devoir, literally, should owe. 



108 

You should not despise a man, because he is poor. — 

devoir, v. mepriser, v. 
Write to him sooner than later, that you may receive 
Ecrivez, v. plutot, adv. 

the answer in time. — They wrote to me that I might 

reponse, f. ecrivirent, v. 

receive the money for them. They were entertaining too 

eux, pro. concevoir, v. 

high an opinion of themselves. — Were you not to go to 

en, pr. 
France this year ? — I was to have gone, but I shall not 

devoir, v. aller, v. 

go before my affairs are finished. — -Men should not be 
irai,v. soient,v. 

so apt to censure public men, as it often proceeds 

porte, pp. provient,v. 

from the ignorance of the censurer. — Provided he per- 

censeur. 
ceive his mistake in time, the evil may be repaired* — 

meprise, f. d mal, m. pourra, v. 

Let them entertain what opinion they please of his talents, 

plaira, v, 
he has proved to the world that he did not possess the 

posseder, v. 
courage of a hero. — I wish all nations would perceive 

heros. souhaiter, v. 
that war is a scourge, and would apply to the improvement 

fleau, m. culture, f. 

of the human understanding, 
esprit, m. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION ENDING IN RE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je vends, I sell. 

Tu vends, Thou sellest. 

II vend, He sells. 



109 

Plur. Nous tendons, We sell. 

Vous vendez, You sell. 

lis vendent, They sell. 

Past Tense. 

Sing, Je vendis, I sold. 

Tu vendis, Thou soldest. 

17 vendit. He sold. 

Plur. Nous vendimes, We sold. 

Vous vendites, You sold. 

J/5 vendirent. They sold. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je vendrai, I shall or will sell. 

Tu vendras. Thou shalt or wilt selL 

II vendra, He shall or will sell, 

Plur. Nous tejidronsy We shall or will sell. 
Vous vendrez, You shall or will sell. 
lis vendront. They shall or will sell* 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Vends, Sell (thou). 

Plur. Vendonsy Let us sell. 

Vendez, Sell (ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je vendotSy I was selling. 

Tu vendoisy Thou wast selling. 

II vendoit, He was selling. 

Plur. Nous vendionSy We were selling. 

Vous vendieZy You were selling. 

I!s vendoienty They were selling. 



I JO 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je vendrois, I would, should, or could sell. 

Tu vendrois, Thou wouldst, shouldst, or couldst sell. 
II vendroit, He would, should, or could sell. 

Plur. Nous vendrionSy We would, should, or could sell. 
Vous vetidriez, You would, should, or could sell. 
lis vendroienty They would, should, or could sell. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que je vende, That I may sell. 

Que tu vendes. That thou mayest sell. 

Quil vende, That he may sell. 

Plur. Que nous vendions, That we may sell. 

Que vous vendieZy That you may sell. 

Quils vendenty That they may sell. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Que je vendzsse. That I might sell. 

Que tu vendissesy That thou mightest sell. 

Quil vendity That he might sell. 

Plur. Que nous vendzssionsy That we might sell. 
Que nous vendhsieZy That you might sell. 

Quils vendissenty That they might sell. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Vendre, To sell. 

Participle present. 
Vendanty Selling. 

Participle past. 
Venduy e } Sold, 



Ill 



After the same manner are conjugated about forty 
verbs ; the following aie irregular, as deviating from them : 

To do, or to make. 
To fry. 
To read. 
To put. 
To grind. 
To be born. 
To graze. 
To please. 
To take. 
To laugh. 
To suffice. 
To follow. 
To be silent. 
To milk. 
To vanquish. 
To live. 



N. B. The verbs of this conjugation, the radical or un- 
changeable part of which terminates by the letter jp, as 
rompre, 8tc. take a t in the third person singular of the 
indicative mood, as, je romps, tu romps, il rompt ; the rest 
as vendre, to sell. 

Exercises upon the Fourth Conjugation 
ending in RE. 

Indicative and Imperative Moods. 

I expect a friend, who is to come and see me 
attendre, v. devoir, v. 

to-day. He loses his time and money in vain speculations. 

aujouraVhui, adv. perdre, v. , f. 

— We will wait for you, if you promise to come with 
attendre, v. promettez, v. 



Absoudre, 


To absolve. 


Faire, 


Battre, 


To beat. 


Frire, 


Boire, 


To drink. 


Eire, 


Circoncire, 


To circumcise 


Mettre, 


Cone/are, 


To conclude. 


Moudre, 


Conduire, 


To conduct. 


Naitre, 


And all the verbs in uire. 


Paitre, 


Confire, 


To preserve. 


P/aire, 


Connoitre, 


To know. 


Prendre, 


And all ending in oitre. 


Rire, 


Coudre, 


To sow. 


Suffire, 


Craindre, 


To fear. 


Suivre, 


And all ending in indre. 


Se taire, 


Croire, 


To believe. 


Traire, 


Dire, 


To say. 


Faincre, 


Ecrire, 


To write. 


Fivre, 




And their 


compounds. 



112 

us. — They sell all their commodities by the pound. — 

vendre, v. denree, f. livre, f. 

We broke off all intercourse with them from that day. — 

rompre, v. commerce, m. 
You will interrupt them, if you make a noise so 

interrompre, v. fakes ; v. bruit, m. 

near them. — Do you hear yet the report of the 

entendre, v. bruit, m. 

cannon ? — Our enemies lost the battle, because they 

perdre, v . 

were panic- struck. Expect me till eleven o'clock, 

panique, ad}.frappe, pp. attendre, v. heure, f. 

after which do not expect me any more.— I will answer 

quoi, pro. ne..*plus, adv. repondre, v. 

you as soon as possible, if you send me a line. They 

billet, m. 
waited, they said, till twelve o'clock, after which they 

dirent, v. quoi, pro. 

lost patience and went away. — Your father forbade 
perdre, v. s'en allerent, v. defendre, v. 

you to go there ; why did you disobey him ? The 

desobei, pp. 
learned render their lives useful to their fellow- 
savant rendre, v. vie, f. utile, adj. sem- 

creatures by some discoveries which are the reward of 
blable, adj. decouverte, f. 

study.— — You answered very properly his imperti- 

etude, f. repondre, v. comme ilfaut 

neut questions.- He will answer, no doubt, as 

, adj. —j f. repondre, v. 

soon as he has received the last letter I sent him. 

aura, v. dernier, adj. 

— I have hens that lay eggs every day. — You will answer 

poule pondre, v. 

his letter, if you think proper, but I shall not do it. 

d-propos, adv. -ferai, v. 
—All the snow melted in the night, and the rivers 
neige, f. fondre, v, nuit, f. riviere 



113 

became impassable. 1 return you thanks for the 

devinrent,v. , adj. rendre,v. graces, pi. 

favour you have done me. You will lose your 

service, m. rendu, pp. 

steps if you go now, for it is too late. — We expect 

pas, m. a present attendre, v. 

every moment most important news from the army. 

armee, f. 
Let us wait with patience the result of all these great 

result at, m. 

movements. Too great a quantity of flowers in an 

mouvement, m. fleur, f. 

apartment corrupt the air, and make it unwholesome. 

corrompre, v. rendre, v. mal-sain, adj. 

—I will not forbid you to go, if you promise me to 
defaxdre, V; promettez, v. 

return before dark. The mistress of the house 

revenir, v. nuit, f. maitresse 

came down, and answered very civilly our ques- 

descendre, v. repondrc, v. civilement, adv. 

tions. — My dog will bite you, if you touch him. — 

mordre toucher, v. 

For how much did you sell your two coach horses 

Combien, adv. vendre, v. car^osse, m. 

at the last fair ? — I sold them for one hundred and twenty 

foire, f. «^ 

pounds, and a saddle-horse for eighty. 

livre, f. sterling selle, f. 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

I was waiting for a friend who had promised me to 
attendre, v. pro??iis, pp. 

come, but I see he will not. — My sister was going 

vois, v. descendre, v. 

down, when I called her back to shew her your 
rappelai, v. 

portrait. We were melting into tears, round 

« , m, fondre, v. larme, f. au tour dc 3 pr* 



114 

his bed, when he expired. 1 would answer his letter ; 

lit, m. repondre, v. 

but I have mislaid it. — He was confounding the names 

egare, pp. confondre, v. 

and persons when he told you that. — You would melt 

-nes, f. pi. dit, v. fondre, v. 

the candle, if you were to approach it so near the fire. — 

chandelle, f. feu, in. 

I am going to write immediately, in order that he may 

vais, v. tor ire, v. sur le champ afin, adv. 

answer me by the next post. — I would wait 

repondre, v. prochain, adj. — e, f. attendre, v. 

longer, if I w 7 ere sure to see your father. — The 

longtems, adv. voir, v. 

child would interrupt you, if he were in the room. 

inter rompre, v. apartement, m. 

We were waiting for you, when we received your 
attendre, v. 

note. -These dogs would bite the passengers, if they 

billet, m. mordre, v. passant, m.&f. 

were not chained down. — I will give you what you 

enchaine, pp. ce que, pro. 

ask, provided you wait a little. — Let them hear the 

pourvu que entendre, v. 

voice of the Lord speaking to their hearts. 1 would 

voix, f. seigneur coeur, m. 

forbid them such a company, if I were their master. 

defendre, v. ciois, v. 

- — He would not answer, if he were not compelled to it. 

repondre,\\ force, pp. y, pr. 

. — We would wait for you, if we w 7 ere not obliged 

attendre, v. 
to be home at five o'clock. — Speak loud, that every 
a la maison heure, f. haut, adv. 

one may hear what you say.- Let them answer 

entendre, v. dites,v. repondre,v. 

to such strong objections if they can. — — — 1 do by 
§i, adv. fort j adj. peuvent, v. 



115 

no means wish that they should lose their trouble, — 
nullement, adv. per d re, v. peine, f. 

Who could expect mercy from exasperated victors. — 
attendre, v. grace , f. irrite, pp. vainqueur. 

He would not answer you, if you were to speak to him. 

parler, v. 
— Write to us, if you wish we should wait 

souhaitcr, v. attendions, v. 

for you. — It was not probable then that they should 

alors, adv. 
lose the battle. — I should wish you would sell me 

perdre, v. vendissiez, v. 

your horse. — Can it be supposed that we w T ould not 
Peut-on 

defend them if we could? If you were to inter- 

defendre, v. pouvions, v. inter- 

rupt him, he would not go on. — — Let every one an- 

rompre, v. continuer, v. 

swer for himself. — They would lose the battle, if they 

perdre 

were not superior in cavalry. -I wrote to them 

superieur, adj. cavalerie,L J'ecrivis,v. 
yesterday, in order that they might answer me to* 

hier, adv. afin, adv. revondre, v. de- 

morrow. 
main, v. 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR 
VERBS OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 

Indicative and Imperative Moods. 

I am speaking of the accident which happened to you the 

, m. ar river, v. 

other day. — He sent his servant to hear the particulars 

apprendre, v. detail, w. 

of this affair. We sang several songs, which 

c, f, chanter, v. 



116 

highly entertained the company. Do you expect 

beaucoup, adv. amnser, v. gnie, f. 

your brother to-day? Every body must hope to see 

aujourd'hui, adv. doit, v. 

peace now, except those who like to see trouble. 

aimer, v. voir, v. desordre,m. 
We will pass through Rouen in our journey to Paris. — 

par, pr. , m. voyage, m. , m. 

You will succeed, if you employ the proper means, 

reussir, v. convenable, adj. moyen, m. 

which are patience and perseverance. — He received a very 

recevoir, v. 
fine present for his diligence. — • — They will soon 

a cause de 
return to their own country. — We met 

reviendront, v. dans, pr. pays, m. rencontrer, v. 

two ladies, who asked us the way to the Regent's 

chemin, m. 
Park. — If you give him more money, he will spend it 
Pare, m. depenser,y. 

all in trifles. You will receive a letter from me in the 

bagatelle, f. recevoir, v. 

course of next month. Fail not to send me 

courant, m. manquer, v. 

an answer immediately. You will bring your friends 

sur le champ, adv. amener, v. 

with you, and we will divert ourselves all the after- 

divertir, v. apres 

noon. They will lose their money, if they play 

midi, m. leur, pro. jouer, v. 

with you, for you play much better than they. Let 

jouer, v. eux, pro. 

us sell these old houses, and buy good lands. We 

vendre, v. terre, f. 

shall hear with pleasure of your arrival in the 

apprendre, v. 

East Indies, where w 7 e hope you will succeed, * 

Oriental, adj. Indent, reussir s Y* 



11? 

1 shall receive him with all the regard due to his 
recevoir, v. egard, m. du, pp. 

merit and rank. He pretended to know nothing of 

rang, m. pretendre, v. savoir, v. 

it ; but we proved to him that we were not his dupes. 

pr ouver, v. , m. 

A mad dog bit yesterday a woman and ,two 

enrage, adj. mordre, v. femme 

children. Do you not perceive a great alteration in 

changement, m. 
this neighbourhood within these five years ? — I no longer 

voisinage, m. depuis ne<...plus 

owe any thing to the carpenter or brick-layer, for I paid 
devoir rien, pro. macon 

them both last week. — You buy your coals by 

Fun et V autre cliarbon, m. 

the room ; it is better than to buy them by the 

en grGS,&dv. eela vaut,\, 

chaldron. They entertain a high opinion of his 

charreiee, f. concevoir, v. haut, adj. 

talents, and they think he will render great services to his 

country. — We shall arrive too late, if we wait longer 

pays, m. attendre, v. 

for him. — You think the war will soon end, and I 
«^» guerre, f. finir, v. 

too. Let lis do justice even to our greatest ene- 

aussi, adv. rendre, v. 

mies. — Go up the hill, and then you will perceive 

monter,v. colline, f. apercevoir,v. 

a large white house at a distance ; it is there he 

blanche, adj. au loin, adv. id, adv. 

lives. My father will buy your horse } if you 

demeurer, v. acheter, v. 

will sell it to him. — He never forsakes his friends 

voulez, v. abandonner, v. 

in their distress ; for he lends them money, if they have 

detresse, f. preter, v. 



118 

experienced losses in their several professions. — I ex- 
essaye, pp. different, adj. 

pect no longer any great news from the continent ; we 

ne...plus • , m. 

shall enjoy peace very likely for some years at least. 

jouir,v. pendant aumoins,adv. 

— They will soon begin to build a new post- 

0«, pro. commencer, v. poste,f. 

office. The custom-house is far advanced. — It is 

bureau, m. douane, f. bien, adv. C'est, v. 

a building that will cost a great sum of money, for it is 

edifice, m. somme,f. 

to be very considerable. — They are to raise a monument 

On doit, v. 
to those who have lost their lives in the famous battle 

vie, f. fameux. adj. bataille,?. 

of Waterloo. — They have buried the officers with all the 

enterrer, v. qfficier 
honors of war. — — England will » never forget the 

honneur, m. Angleterre, f. ouhiier, v. 

name of men so dear to her recollection, who have 
nom, m. souvenir, m. 

shed their blood for the honour of their country. 

repandu, pp. pays, m. 



OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

I was giving the whole of my attention to this affair, 
tout, adj. 
when I heard of the death of one of the parties. — We 

appris, v. 
would not wish for honours, if we knew what trouble 

savions, v. 
attends them. — He was yet speaking, when 

accompagner, v. encore, adv. 

I entered the assembly. You would remain for ever 

-ee, f. rester, v. 



119 

plunged in the same reverie, if I did not draw you out 
plonge, pp, r ether, v. 

of it. — I do not think they will perceive their blind- 
penser, v. avcugle- 

ness. They would reward you, if you deserved it. 

ment, m. recompense)*, v. meriter, v. 

— We would receive still better such friends as 

encore, adv. tel, adj. 

you, if we could. They would lose their credit, if 

pouvionSyX. perdreyv. , m. 

they did not pay their debts. 1 would warn my friends 

dette, f. avertir, v. 

of it, if I thought they were in danger of being duped. 

f assent, v. 
— You should receive all your papers, if I had them ; but 

papier, m. 

you ought not to be so impatient. Should you lose 

devriez, v. 
your money, nobody would pity you, because yoa 

plain droit, v. 
ought not to play so deep a game. — Some were 

devriez, v. gros, adj. jeu, m. 

singing, some were dancing, all were rejoicing. — — I shall 

se rejouir, v. 
write soon, that you may answer me without losing 
ccrirai, v. bientot, adv. 

any time. — I was then speaking of your daughter, and was 
de 

doing her the justice she deserves. — You were acting 
rendois, v. meriicr , v. agir, v. 

with to^ much tenderness towards your son. — I would 

trop, adv. tendresse, f. enters, pr. Jils 
bet ten guineas that the knave would have escaped 

gager, v. ee, f. fripon echappe, pp. 

from them, though they had stopt the vessel he was in. 

leur, pro. vaisseau,m. 

— Mr. D and I were paying a visit to your father, 

rendre, v. 



120 

when Mr. S entered the apartment. — They would re- 
ceive you very kindly, if you went to pay them a 
poliment, adv. alliez & 
visit. — Let his partizans praise him as much as they 

partisan, m. louer, v. 
please, provided he no longer torment the 

voudront, v. pourvu que tourmenter, v. 

quiet people. — I will lend you my pen, pro- 

tranquille, adj. gens, pi. preter, v. plume, f. 

vided you do not spoil it. — I think he will pay his debts, 

gdter, v. dette, f. 

provided they give him time. — I do not doubt but they 

que, c. 
will wait, provided you are answerable for him. — Though 

repondre,v. 
your pupils hear what you say, yet they do not 

eleve, m. cependant, adv. 

always comprehend : it is necessary, therefore, that you should 

comprendre, v. done, c. 

repeat what you have told them.— — It was to be 
repeter, v. dit. pp. 

feared lest we might share the same fate. 

craindre, v. que...ne partager, v. sort, m. 

It was not possible that they should arrive in 

' — , adj. arrivassent, v. d 

time. — You would awake the child, if you staid here 
reveiller, v. rester, v. 

to play. Let them enjoy the glory they have pur- 

jouer, v. jouir, v. gloire, f. ac~ 

chased by so much bravery . — It was not likely that 

quis, pp. bravoure,f. probable, adj. 

they might prevent the entrance of so great a force, 

empecher, v. entree, f. 

especially as they were divided in their opinions. — I 
surtout, adv. divise, pp. 

would sell my house, if I found a buyer.— — Tell him he 

acheteur 



121 

must warn his sister of it, otherwise she would per- 

avertir, v. autrement, adv. 

ceive her mistake too late. — You should not blame others, 

meprise, f. 
though you should not succeed. — He will tell them 
(j a and, adv. parler, v. 

of it, provided they do not speak of it to your cousin. — 

She is never pleased, though we obey her in every 
content, adj. obeir, v. 

thing. 1 should be very glad if he would en- 

tout, pro. bien, adv. aise, adj. 

gage Mr. C to come and see us. — I should be very 

sorry if they did not receive my letter before their depar- 
ture for Italy and Greece. 

Grece, f. 

CONJUGATION OF THE MOST IRREGULAR VERB 
ENDING IN ER. 

ALLER, TO GO. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Jevais, I go. 

Tu vas, Thou goest. 

// va 9 He goes. 
Plur. Nous allonSy We go. 

Vous alkz, You go. 

lis vont, They go. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Tallaiy I went. 

Tu alias. Thou uentest. 

It alia, He went. 

& 



122 



Plur. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



Nous allames, 
Vous allates, 
Ik alltrent, 



We went. 

You went. 
They went. 



FutureTense. 



Tirai, 
Tu iras, 
11 ira, 

Nous irons, 
Vow 



s irez, 



lis iront, 



I shall or w r ill go. 
Thou shalt or wilt go. 
He shall or will go. 
We shall or will go. 
You shall or will go. 
They shall or will go. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 
Sing. Va, ~ Go (thou). 

Plur. Allons, Let us go. 
Allez, Go (ye). ' 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



Past Tense. 



J* allots, 
Tu allots, 
II alloit, 
Nous allions, 
Vous alliez, 
lis alloient, 



I was going. 
Thou wast going. 
He was going. 
We were going. 
You were going. 
They were going. 



Future Tense. 

I would/ should, or could go. 
Tu irois, Thou wouldst, couldst, or shouldst go. 
II iroity He would, could, or should go. 

Nous irions, We would, could, or should go. 
Vous iriez, You would, could, or should go. 
lis iroient, They would, could, or should go. 



Sing. J'irois, 



Plur. 



123 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que faille, That I may go. 

Que tu allies, That thou mayest go. 

Quil aille, That he may go. 

Plur. Que nous allions, That we may go. 

Que vous alliez, That you may go. 

Quils aillent, That they may go. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Quefallasse, That I might go. 

Que tu allasses, That thou mightest go. 

Quil al/at, That he might go. 

Sing. Que nous atlassions, That we might go. 

Que vous allassiez, That you might go. 

Qu'ils allassenty That they might go. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Aller, To go. 

Participle Present. 
Allant, Going. 

Participle Past. 
A lie, e } Gone, 



EXERCISES UPON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 

First Conjugation ending in ER. 

Where are you going ? # — I am going to the park. — — 

allez, v. vais, v. 



* The present of the verb to be, followed by a participle present, is 
invariably turned in French by the preseut of the verb from which the 
participle is derived, as, I am going, I go % 

g2 



124 

Will not your father be angry if you go there without 
fdche, adj. sans 

him ? — We were going to my sister's when you saw 

chez, pr. vitcs, v. 

us. — These men went yesterday from house to house. — 
hier, adv. maison, f. 

Believe me, Sir, do not go and see them.- 

Croyez, v. monsieur, ^ voir, v. 

Your father has told me that he will send you to France 

en, pr. 

as soon as you can begin to speak French. — My cousin 

and I went to Vauxhall last 2 Friday. 1 — He will 

moi, pr. dernier, adj. Vendredi, m. 

employ a great number of workmen. 1 will go to 

nombre, m. ouvrier, m, 
Spain next month, or I will send my son 

Espagne, f. prochain, adj. mois,m. 

thither. — My father went to speak to him, but he did # not 
y, adv. , ^ 

find him, he was gone to the play. My watch 

trowver, v. comedie, f. montre, f. 

goes faster than yours, I shall send it to the watch-maker's 

plus vite horloger. 

that he may mend it. — He has repaired mine, I 

raccom??ioder,v. repare,pp. 

wish it may go better. — We would go and pay 

souhaiter, v. rendre, v. 

him a visit, if we had time.— Will they go where they said 

they would go, if the weather were fine ? — They shall not 

etoit, v. 

go without your leave. Let them go, I give them 

permission, f. leur, pro. 



* Do and did are never used as auxiliary verbs in French, but the 
second verb takes the tense of the first, present or past, as, I did find, or 
found, Je trouvai, &c. 



125 

leave. — My father, mother, sisters and I went to 

7?ioi, pro. 

Greenwich to see the hospital. — Did you go in a boat ? 

. hopital, m. batteau, in. 

No, my mother and sisters went in a coach, and my 

non, adv. 

fatheF and I went on horseback. — They will send 'their ser- 

d cheval enverront, v. 

vant to enquire for the direction, or they will go them- 
demander, v. eux- 

selves, if he cannot find the place. They go every 

mimes peu, v. endroit, m. 

day twice to school, morning and evening. — 1 shall send 

deuxfois ecole, f. 
an answer to your brother, or I will go and see him myself. 

—We would go and give him a letter for our friends, 

remettre, v. 
if we were sure that he would go to Paris. — He would 

alldt, v. enverroityV. 

send his son to the university, if he were older. — It is very 

te a f. age, adj. 

natural that they should go and see their friends after so 

ail lent, v. 
long an absence. — They were going to Dublin the last time 

I saw them. — Go and fetch me the book 1 have left 

»W, v. chercher, v. 

upon my tables — Let us go to church, and then we will go 

eg Use, f. 
to our cousin's. — He said he would send his servant, 

chez, pr. 

or go himself. — He wished very much you might go 
iroit, v. 
yourself. — I thought at first he was going to Italy; but 

I have heard since that he is going to Sweden. — He 
appris, pp. va, v. Suede, f. 



126 

wished that we should go with him to liis country seat.— 
voulut, v, maisoriyi. 

It was not proper they should go without their mo- 

convenable, adj. allassent, v. 
ther. 

Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation 
ending in JjR. 

AC2UERIR, TO ACQUIRE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. J'acqu, iers, iers, iert, I acquire, &c. 

Plur. Nous acqu, erons, erez, ierent, We acquire, 8tc. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. J'acqu, is, is, it, I acquired, &c. 

Plur. Nous acqu, imes, ites, irent, We acquired, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. J'acqu, errai, erras, erra, I will or shall ac- 

quire, &c. 

Plur. Nous acqu, errons, errez, erront, We will or shall 

acquire, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Acqu, iers, Acquire (thou). 

Acqu, erons, erez, Acquire (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. J'acqu, erois, erois, eroit, I was acquiring, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous acqu, erions, eriez, eroient, We were acquir- 
ing, &c. 



127 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Tacqu, errois, errois, erroit, I would, &c. 

acquire. 
Plur. Nous acqu, errions, erriez, erroient, We would, &c. 

acquire. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que j acqu, tire, iere$, itre, That I may ac- 

quire, &c. 

Plur. Que nous acqu, erions, eriez, ierent, That we may 

acquire, 8tc. 
Past Tense. 

Sing. Que f acqu, isse, isses, it, That I might 

acquire, &c. 

Plur. Que nous acqu, tssions, zssiez, issent, That we might 

acquire, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Acqu, erir, To acquite. 

Participle Present. 
Acqu, erant, Acquiring. 

Participle Past. 
Acqu, is, e, Acquired. 

Querir, to fetch, the primitive of the above Verb is be- 
come obsolete. 

Conquerzr, to conquer ; Requerir, to require ; are con* 
jugated like acquerir. 



BOUILLIR, TO BOIL. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je bou, s, s, t, I boil, &c. 

Plur. Nous bou, illons, illez, illent, We boil, Sec. 



128 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je bou, Mis, Mis, illit, I boiled, &c. 

Plur. 'Nous bou, Mimes, Mites, Mirent, We boiled, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je bou, illirai, Miras, Mira, I shall or will 

boil, &c. 
Plur. Nous, bou, Mirons, Mirez } Miront, We shall or will 

boil, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Bou, s, Boil (thou). 

Plur. Bou, illons, illez, Boil (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je bou, illois, illois, illoit, I was boiling, &c. 

Plur, Nous bou, Mions, illiez, illoient, We were boiling, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je bou, Mirois, illirois, illiroitj I should, &c. 

boil, &c. 
Plur. Nous bou, Mirions, illiriez, illiroient, We should, &c» 

boil, &c, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing, Queje bou, Me, illes, Me, That I may 

boil, &c. 

Plur. Que nous bou, Mions, illiez, illent, That we may 

boil, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje bou, Misse, Misses, illit, That I might 

boil, &c. 

Plur. Que nous bou, Missions, Missiez, Missent, That we might 

boil, &c« 



J 29 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Bou, illir, To boil. 

Participle Present. 
Bou, illantj Boiling. 

Participle Past. 

BoUy Hit, e, Boiled. 

When attendance is required/ this verb and its compound 
rebouillir, are used only in the infinitive, preceded by the 
verb /aire, to make ; as, Boil this chicken, Faites bouillir 
ce poulet. 



COURIR, TO RUN. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je cour, s, s, t, I run, &c. 

Plur. Nous cour, ons, ez, ent, We run, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je cour , us, us, ut, I ran, &c. 

Plur. Nous cour j umes, utes, urent, We ran, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je cour, rax, ras, ra, I shall or will run, &c. 

Plur. Nous cour, rons, rez, ront, We shall or will run, &c, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Sing. Cour, s, Run (thou). 

Plur. Cour, oris, ez, Run (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je cour, ois, ois, oit, I was running, &c. 

Plur. Nous cour, ions, iez, oient, We were running, &c, 

g S 



130 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je cour, rois, rois, roit, I should, &c. run, &c. 

Plur. Nous cour, rions, riez, roient, We should, &c. run, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD v 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje cour, e, es, e, That I may run, &c. 

Plur. Que nous cour, ions, iez, ent, That we may run, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Que je cour, usse, usses, ut, That I might 

run, &c. 

Plur. Que nous cour, fissions, ussiez, ussent, That we might 

run, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Cour, ir, To run. 

Participle Present. 
Courant, Running. 

Participle Past. 

Cour, u, e, Run. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Accourir, To run to. Parcourir, To run over. 

Concourir, To concur. Recourir, To recur to, or to 

Discourir, To discourse. have recourse. 

Encourir, To incur. Secourir, To succour. 

Couvrir, To cover. See Ouvrir, To open. 



CUEILL1R, TO GATHER. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je cueiU, e. es, e, I gather, &c. 

Plur. Nous cueitl, ons, e%, ent, We gather, &c. 



131 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je cueill, is, is, it, I gathered, &c. 

Plur. Nous cueill, imes, ites, irent, We gathered, &c. 

Future Tense, 

Sing. Je cueill, erai, eras, era, I shall or will ga- 

ther, &c. 

Plur. Nous, cueill, erons, erez, eront, We shall or will ga- 
ther,- &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Cueill, e, Gather (thou). 

Plur. Cueill, ons, ez, Gather (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je cueill, ois, ois, oit, I was gathering, &e. 

Plur. Nous cueill, ions, iez, oient, We were gathering, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je Cueill, erois, erois, eroit, I should, See. ga- 

ther, &c. 

Plur. Nous cueill, erions, eriez, eroient, We should, &c. 

gather, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que je cueill, e, es, e, That I may gather, &c. 

Plur. Que nous cueill, ions, iez, ent, That we may gather, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Queje cueill, isse, isses, it, That I might 

gather, &c. 
Plur. Que nous cueill, zssions, issiez, issent, That we might 

gather, &c> 



132 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Cueillir, To gather. 

Participle Present. 
Cueillant, Gathering. 

Participle Past. 
Cueilli, e, Gathered. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Accueillir, To receive. Recueillir, To collect, 



DORMIR, TO SLEEP. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je dor, s, s, t, I sleep, &c. 

Plur. Nous, dor, mons, mez, merit, We sleep, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je dorm, is, is, it, J slept, &c. 

Plur. Nous dorm, hues, ites, irent, We slept, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je dorm, irai, iras, ira, I shall or will sleep, &c. 
Plur. Nous dorm,irons,irez,iront, We shall or will sleep, &c* 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Dor, s, Sleep (thou). 

Plur. Dorm, ons, ez, Sleep (we and ye), 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je dorm, ois, ois, oit, I was sleeping, &c. 

Plur. Nous dorm } ions, ie% } oient. We were sleeping, &c 



133. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je dorm, irois, irois, iroit, I should, 8cc. 

sleep, &c. 
Plur. Nous, dorm, irions, iriez, iroient, We should, &c. 

sleep, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que je dorm, e, es, e, That I may sleep, &c. 

Plur. Que nous dorm, ions, iez, ent, That we may sleep, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Que je dorm, isse, isses, it, That I might 

sleep, &c. 

Plur. Que nous dorm, hsions,zssie%,issent, That we might 

sleep, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Dormir, To sleep. 

Participle Present. 
Dormant, Sleeping. 

Participle Past. 
Dormi, Slept. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Endormir, to lull asleep. Se rendormir, to fall asleep 
S'endorrnir, to fall asleep. again. 

Exercises upon the Irregular Verbs of the 
Second Conjugation in IR. 

His uncle has acquired much property in the West 

oncle bien, m. 

Indies. »■ He was welcomed by every body. — Boil 

bien accueilli, pp. tout le mondc 



134 

this leg of mutton, and roast that fowl. The water 

gigot, m. volatile, f. 

boils.— He ran for two hours without stopping. — You 

courir, v. iavreter, v. 

run the risk of being taken by the enemy. — He runs 

risque, m. pris, pp. 

faster than you do. — Do not run so fast, you will 

vite, adv. 

fall. He was running when I met him. — If you 

tomber, v. rencontrai, v. 

do it, you will incur the displeasure of your father. — The 

deplaisir, m. 
nurse lulls 1 the 2 child to sleep. 1 — I will collect all the 

recueillir, v. 
leaves of my book. — If you want me, call for me, I will 
feuille, f. 

run immediately to your assistance. — They were run- 

nccourir, v. secours, m. 

ning when they fell. — Have you slept well ? — In some 

disorders, it is necessary to recur to violent remedies. 

maladie, f. adj. remtde, m. 

They acquire property every day. — if your master sleeps, 

acquerir, v. bien, m. maitre 

do not awake him.— We shall discourse another time on 

eveiller, v. discourir, v. fois, f. 

this subject.— I shall sleep well to night, for I am very 

sujtt, m. nuiti f. 

tired. I would gather up all the information I could, 

fatigue, pp. recueillir, v. , f. pourrois^V. 

if I were in your place. — Let us .run fast home, or 

a -, f. vite, adv. a la maison 

else we shall be wet.- We will gather some roses 

bien, adv. mouille, pp. — , f. 

and pinks the first time we go to our garden. — Your bro- 

mUlet, m. fois, f. jar din, m. 

ther will acquire a great reputation, for he is very skil- 
acquerir, v. — , f. ha- 



135 

ful in his profession. — The English will conquer all 

bile, adj. , f '. Anglais conquer ir, v. 

the East Indies (in the course of time.) — He would dis- 

oriental, adj. avec, pr. terns, m. 

course for three hours, if you would listen to him. 

pendant, pr. vouliez, v. ccouter, v. 

< — They ran to us in the greatest agitation, for they 

ace our ir, v. , f. 

were dreadfully frightened. — Children generally 

terriblanent, adv. effraye, pp. ordinairement, adv. 

Walk very slowly to school ; but they run fast when they 
vont, v. posement ecole, f. 

come out of it. — If you go to your garden, will you 
sortent, f. en voulez, v. 

gather some roses ? — Yes/ 1 will gather some for you 

quelques, adj. en, pro. 

and your sister. — They ordered he should gather a dishful 
ordonner, v. plat, m. 

of strawberries, one of goose-berries, and another of cur- 
f raise, f. groseille, f. co- 

rants. — The physician said, it was not proper that she 

rinthe,f. medecin apropos, adv. 

should sleep so long. — If I were to sleep in day time, I 

dormois, v. jour, m. 
could not sleep at night. — If you are sleepy, run two 

la nuit, f. endormi, adj. 

or three times round the garden, and that will wake 

fois, f. aatour reveiller, v. 

y 0U , — Lull 1 the 2 child to x sleep. — The poor often sleep 

endonnir, v. souvent 

better than their rich neighbours. — The latter would 

voisin, adj. dernier, adj. 

sleep much better, if they took more exercise. — He 

prencient, v. ce, m. 

was a charitable man who succoured the distressed, and 

secourir, v. pauvre 

welcomed the unfortunate. 
accucillir, v. 



136 

FUIR, TO RUN AWAY, TO SHUN, TO FLEE, 
TO FLY. 

INDICATIVE MOOD* 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Jefu, is, is, it, I fly, &c. 

Plur. Nousfu, yons, yez, ient, We fly, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Jefu, is, is, it, I fled, &c. 

Plur. Nousfu, imes, ites, irent, We fled, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Jefu, irai, iras, ira, I shall fly, &c. 

Plur. Nousfu, irons, irez, iront, We shall fly, &c 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Fu, is, Fly (thou). 

Plur. Fu } yons, yez, Fly (we and ye)» 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Jefu, yois, yois, yoit, I was flying, &c. 

Plur. Nous Ju, yions, yiez, yment, We were flying, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Jefu, irois, irois, iroit, I should fly, &c. 

Plur. Nousfu,irions,iriez,troient, We should, &c. fly, &c, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que jefu, it, ies, ie } That I may fly, 

&c. 



137 

Plur. Que nousfu, yions, yiez, ient, That we may fly, 

&c. 

Past Tense. 
This tense is not in use : turn by, 
Sing. Quejeprisse lafuite, That I might take flight, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Fuir, To Fly. 

Participle Present. 
Fuyant, Flying. 

Participle Past. 
Fui y Fled. 

Mentir, to Lie, and its compound Dmentir, to belie, 
like Sentir, to feel (see lower down). 



MOURIR, TO DIE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je meur, s, s, t, I die, &c. 

Plur. Nous mour, ons, ez, meurent, We die, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je mour, us, us, ut, J died, &c. 

Plur. Nous mour, times, utes, urent, We died, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je mour, rai, ras, ra, I shall or will 

die, &c. 

Plur. Nous mour, rons, rez 9 ront. We shall or will 

die, &c. 



138 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Meur, s, die (thou). 

Plur. Mour, ons, ez, die (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je mow, ois, ois, oit, I was dying, &c. 
Plur. Nous mour, ions, iez, oient, We were dying, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je mour, rois, rois, roit, I should, &c. die, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous mour, rions-, riez, roient, We should, &c, 

die, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje meur, e, es, e, That I may 

die, &c. 

Plur. Que nous mour, ions, iez 9 meurent, That we may 

die, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Que je mour, ime, usses, tit, That I 

might die, &c. 

Plur. Que nous mour, ussions, ussiez, ussent, That we 

might die, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Mourir, To die. 

Participle Present. 
Mourant, Dying. 

Participle Past. 
Mort, e, Dead. 



139 

This verb is used as reflective in French, as se moitrir, 
to be (tying. 



OFFRIR, TO OFFER. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. J'offr, e, es, e, I offer, &£. 

Plur. Nous offr, ons, ez, ent, We offer, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Toffr, is, is, it, I offered, &c. 

Plur. Nous offr, imes, ites, irent, We offered, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. J'offr, irai, iras, ira, I shall or will of- 

fer, &c. 

Plur. Nous offr, irons, irez, iront, We shall or will of- 
fer, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Offre, Offer (thou). 

Plur. Offr, ons, ez, Offer (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. J'offr, ois, ois, oit, I was offering, &c. 
Plur. Nous offr, ions, iez, oient, We were offering, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. J'offr, irois, irois, iroit, I should, 8cc. of- 

fer, &c. 

Plur. Nous offr, irions, iriez, iroient, We should, &c. 

offer, &c. 



140 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Quefoffr, e, es, e, That I may offer, &c. 

Plur. Que nous offr, ions, iez, ent, That we may offer. &c* 

Past Tense. 
Sing, Que f offr, is$e, isses, it, ThatI might of- 

fer, &c. 
Plur. Que nous offr, tssions, issiez, is$e?it, That we might 

offer, Sec. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Offrir, To offer. 

Participle Present. 

Offrant, Offering, 

Participle Past. 

Offert, e, Offered- 



OUVRIR, TO OPEN. 

This verb, as well as Couvrir, to cover, and its compounds, 

Recouvrir, to cover again, 

i-w Cto discover, 

Decouvrir, \ . 9 

\ to uncover, 

is conjugated like Offrir, to offer. 

Partir and Dtpartir, to depart ; the latter of which is 
used only in a moral sense in French ; and Repartir, to set 
out again, together with se repentir, to repent, are conju- 
gated like the following verb. 



SENTIR, TO FEEL and TO SMELL. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 
Sing, Je sen, s, s, t, 1 feel, &Ca 



141 

Plur. Nous sent, ons, ez, ent, We feel, &c. 
Past Tense. 

Sing. Je sent, is, is, it, I felt, &c. 

Plur. Nous sent, inies, ites, irent, We felt, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. J e sent, irai, iras, ira, 1 shall or will feel, &c. 
Plur. Nous sent, irons, irtz, iront, We shall or will feel, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing, Sens, Feel fthou). 

Plur. Sent, ons, ez, Feel (we and ye), 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

"Sing. Je sent, ois, ois, oit, I was feeling, 8cc. 

Plur. Nous sent, ions, iez, oient, We were feeling, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je sent, irois, irois, iroit, I should, &c. feel, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous sent, irions, iriez, iroient, We should, &c. 

feel, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que Je sent, e, es, e, That I may feel, &c. 

Plur. Que nous sent, ions, iez, ent, That we may feel, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Que Je sent, isse, isses, it, That I might 

feel, &c. 

Plur. Que nous sent, hsiens, issiez } issent, That we might 

feel, Sec. 



142 



INFINITIVE MOOD, 

Sentir, To feel. 

Participle Present, 
Sentant, Feeling* 

Participle Past, 
Senti, e, Felt. 

The compounds of this verb are conjugated after the 
same manner. 

Continuation of the Exercises on the Irre- 
gular Verbs in IR. 

An honest man shuns the company of the wicked. 

fuir, v. 
Why do you shun those who wish to give you good 
Pourquoi 

advice? — As soon as they saw r the Emperor's guards 

avis, m. virent, v. garde 

give way, they fled in the greatest disorder. — You would 

plier v. desordre, m. 

shun those people, if you knew them. — Forgive him 

gens, pi. connoissiez, v. Pardonner, v. 

this time, he has promised me that he would never lie 

foisj f. mentir, v. 

any more. — Say all you know, but above all do not 

savoir, v. surtout, adv. 

lie. If you do not correct him at first, he will lie 

mentir, v. corriger, v. 

with more audacity for the future. — A well bred youth 

d, pr. eleve, pp. 

never tells a lie. — Let us fly from here, or else we 
mentir, v. fuir, v. autrement, adv. 

shall be in danger of losing our lives.— She died after 

perdre, v. mourir, v. 

a short illness in the year one thousand eight hundred and 
maladie, f. a* 



143 

five. — Oftentimes misfortune flies from those who seem to 

souvent 
seek it by their imprudence. — He offered to lend me his 

horse which I found very kind of him. 1 offered toac- 

ce que poll de sa part. 

company him, but he refused me. — Offer him some money, 

if he is in want of any. — I would offer him some, if I thought 

he would not make a bad use * of it. — You would offer 

fit, v. usage, m. 

him some in vain, for he has too much pride to accept of 

fiertt, f. 
it. — You open the door every moment, and always leave it 

open. — He opened all the windows and doors because he 

w T as very warm, but he caught a violent cold in consequence 

of it. — I set off next week for Paris. — If you please, we 
v0-> partir, v. voulez, v. 

shall set off together. — He covered the umbrella with the 

couvrir, v. parapluie, m. 
best silk he could find. — You will open the wardrobe, and 

garde-robe, f. 
cover the clothes, that the dust may not spoil them.—- 

habits, v. poussiere, f. gdter, v. 

His actions never belie his words. — They offered him a 

dementir 
place in their carriage, and they set off together. — He of- 

voiture, f. 
fered his goods for a low price, because he wanted mo- 

prix, m. avoir besoin 

ney. — 1 hope that you will never belie the good opi- 

dementir, v. 
nion which you have given of yourself to your friends. ■ ■ 

Open the window that we may have some air. — The as- 

fenetre, f. 



144 

tronomers discover spots in the sun, but they will 
decouvrir, v. tache, f. so lei I, m. 

perhaps never discover the cause of those spots. — You 

peut-etre, adv. 

may rely upon him, he will never discover your secrets. — 
compter, v. ,m. 

We should discover more easily our faults, if we were not 
decouvrir, v. 

blinded by self-love.- He felt all the force of your 

amour-propre, m. sentir, v. 

arguments, but he would not own it. — We should die with- 

, m. avouer, v. 

out regret, or rather with joy, if we were real Chris- 

joie, f. vrai, adj. Chre- 

tiens. — He w r ould die with grief, if he knew what has hap- 

tien chagrin savoit, v. 

pened to his son. — When men feel the approach of death, 

approche, f. 

they ought to be resigned to the will of heaven. 

devroient,v. volonte, f. ciel, m. 

1 will offer him 1000 pounds for his house ; it is as much 

as any body will offer him. — They will cover the house 
tout autre 

with slate, not with tiles. We will set out next week for 

ardoise, f. tuile, f. 

France. — He felt it was his interest to study with appli- 

etudier, v. 
cation. — She would consent to marry him, if he were 

consentir, v. epouser, v. 
more sedate. — Never discover the secret of a friend. — — 

pose, adj. , m. 

I did not think they would offer such advantageous 

si, adv. 

terms. A good Christian does not resent the wrongs that 

condition, f. tort, m. 

are made to him. — Some men feel great arersion to soli- 



145 

tude, because they dare not listen to the reproaches of 

ecouter, v. 
their conscience. — He would die happy, he 6aid, if he 

saw the enemies of his country humbled. — He who 

voyoit, v. pays, m. humilie, pp. 

dies the victim of his duty, feels a consolation in 

mourir, v. e, f. devoir, m. 

dying, which a coward can never feel. — If you open the 

poltron 
cage, the bird will fly away. — He discovered the whole 

senvoler, v. 
plot before they had time to put it in execution. — 

complot, m. 

We would set off to-morrow, if our affairs were settled. — 

regie, pp. 
He offered him his house, but he did not accept it. — 

Though you were to offer me a hundred guineas for this 

2uand, adv. 

horse, I could not let you have it ; I have been offered 

one hundred and twenty before. — My brother set out 

last w r eek for the continent, and I will set out next 

dernier, adj. moi 

week.— -He will never consent to give his daughter in 

marriage to a young man who has nothing, and who 

mariase, m. 

possesses no talent whatsoever. 

ne„.ancun que ce soit, phr. 



H 



14t> 

SERVIR, TO SERVE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je ser, $, s, t, I serve, &c. 

Plur. Nous serv, ons, ez, ent, We serve, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je serv, is, is, it, I served, &c. 

Plur. Nous serv, imes, ites, irent, We served, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je serv, irai, iras, ira, I shall or will serve, &c. 
Plur. Nous serv, irons, irez, iront, We shall or will serve, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing. Ser, s, Serve (thou). 

Plur. Serv, ons, ez, Serve (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je serv, ois, ois, oit, I was serving, &c. 

Plur. Nous serv, ions, iez, oient, We were serving, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je serv, irois, irois, iroit, I should, &c. 

serve, &c. 
Plur. Nous serv, irions, iriez, iroient, We should, &c. 

serve, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje serv, e, es, e, That I may serve, &c. 

Plur. Que nous serv, ions, iez, ient, That we may serve, &c. 



147 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje serv, isse, isses, it, That I might 

serve, &c. 
Plur. Que nous serv, issions, issiez, issent, That we might 

serve, 8cc 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 

Servir, To serve 

Participle present. 
Servant, Serving, 

Participle past. 
Servi, e, Served. 

Its compound is Desservir, to do an ill office, and to 
clear a table also. 

This verb is used also as a reflective. 



SORTIR, TO GO OUT, 
Is conjugated like Sentir, as above. 



SOUFFRIR, TO SUFFER, 
Is conjugated like Offrir. 



TENIR, TO HOLD. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je t, iens, tens, tent, I hold, &c. 

Plur. Nous t 9 enons, enez, iennent, We hold, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je t, ins, ins, int, I held, &c. 

Plur. Nous t, inmes, intes, invent, We held, &c 

h 2 



148 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je t, iendrai, iendras, iendra, I shall hold, 

&c. 
Plur. Nous t, iendrons, iendrez, iendront, We shall hold, 

&c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense- 
Sing, t, iens, Hold (thou). 
Plur. t, enons, enez, Hold (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je ten, ois, ois, oit, I was holding, &c, 

Plur. Nous ten, ions, iez, oient, We were holding, -&c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je tiend, rois, rois, roit, I should, Sec. hold, &c. 
Plur. Nous tiend, rions, riez, roient, We should, &c. hold, 

&c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Que je tienn, e, es, e, That I may hold, 

&c. 
Plur. Que nous ten, ions, iez, tiennent, That we may hold, 

&c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje t, insse, insses, mt, That I might 

hold, &c. 

Plur. Que nous t, inssions, znssiez, inssent, That we might 

hold, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Tenir, To hold. 



149 

Participle present. 
Tenant, Holding. 

Participle past. 
Tenuy e> Held. 

The compounds of this verb are : 
S'abstenir, To abstain. Maintenir, To maintain. 

Apartenir, To belong. Obtenir, To obtain. 

Contenir, To contain. Retenir, To retain. 

Detenir, To detain. Soutenir, To sustain, & 

Entretenir, To entertain. used for to maintain. 



TRESSAILL1R, TO START. 
This verb is conjugated like Offrir, as above. 



JA1LLIR, TO JUT— TO JET OUT, in architecture, 
is conjugated in the same way; but is used only in the 
third persons of some tenses and its infinitive. 



SAILLIR, TO GUSH OUT, is regular, as BENIR. 



ASSAILLIR, TO ASSAIL; like TRESSAILLIR. 



VENIR, TO COME, 
And its compounds : — 
Convenir, To agree. Parvenir, To come up. 

Contrevenir, To act contrary to. Prevenir, To prevent, to 
Devenir* To become. prejudice, to anticipate. 

Intervenir, To intervene. Pruvenir, To proceed. 



* The English genitive, which follows commonly this verb, becomes 
its nominative ill French, as, What will become of you ? Que deviendrez- 
vous? 



150 

Revenir, To comeback. Subvenir, To supply. 

Se ressouvenir, To recollect. Survenir, To come una- 
Se Soytvenir, To remember. wares. 

They are all conjugated as Tenir. 



VETIR, TO CLOTHE. 

s 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je Q, ets, ets, it, I clothe, &c. 

Plur. Nous v, etons, etez, etent, We clothe, Sec. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je v, etis, etis, etit, I clothed, &c. 

Plur. Nous, v, e times, elites, etirent, We clothed, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je D y etirai, etiras, etira, I shall or will clothe, 

&c. 

Plur. Nousv,etirons, etirez, etiront,We shall or will 

clothe, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Time. 

Sing. T, ets, Clothe (thou). 

Plur. V, *etons, etez, Clothe (we and ye)* 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je v, etois, etois, etoit y I was clothing, &c. 

Plur. Nous v, etions, itiez, etoient, We were clothing, &c 



151 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je v, etirois, etirois, tiiroitj I should, &,c. 

clothe, &c. 
Plur. Nous v, ttirions, ttiriez, etiroietit, We should, &c, 

clothe, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que je v, tie, etes, ete> That I may clothe, 

&c. 

Plur. Que nous v, etions, etiez, etent, That we may clothe, 

&c. 

Past Tense. * 

Sing. Queje v, etisse, etisse, etit> That I might 

clothe, &c. 

Plur. Que nous v, etissions, etissiez, etissent, That we might 

clothe, &c, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Vetir, To clothe. 

Participle Present. 
Vetanty Clothing. 

Participle Past. 
Vetu> e, Clothed. 

The two compounds of this verb are : — 

Devetir, To divest. Revetir, To invest. 

The three persons singular of the present of the indica- 
tive are not in use in the primitive, but they are used in the 
compounds. 



152 



Exercises upon the preceding Verbs. 

He serves his friends when he" can do it. — Your tai- 
servir, v. pent, v. faire, v. 

lor does not use you well. — Some tradesmen serve their 

servir, v. ouvrier 

customers well at first, but when they think they are sure 
pratique, f. croient, v. 

of their custom, they often use them very ill. — Serve the 

dinner, and keep yourself ready to go out bye and bye 

tenir, v. tantot, adv. 

with me. — I would go out if the weather were fine.— 

sortir, v. 
I was coming out when he came up to me, and kept me 

sortir, v. tenir, v. 

an hour to talk about politics. — The servant will clear the 

politique, f. desservir, v. 

table when you have done. — My sister went out this 

• 
morning, and she w 7 ill return this evening. — Every body 
matin, m. revenir, v. soir, m. 

suffers, more or less, from war. — -We suffered much from 
souffrir, v. 

want after our shipwreck. — The infantry suffered 
besoin, m. naufrage, m. terie, f. 

much in that defeat. — If you suffer with patience, you 

defaite, f. 
will soon be cured.— — We will return as soon as 

bientot gueri, pp. revenir, v. 

we can, .but our friends will retain us perhaps. — If you 
pourrons, v. 
give me your attention, you will easily retain what I say 

retenir, v. 
Jo you.-— They detained the prisoner, and sent for the offi- 
detenir, v. prisonnier 



153 

cers of police to take him to prison. — I hope he will 

mener, v. f. 

keep his word, and come as he has promised me.— 

tenir y v. 

Knowledge often becomes fatal, if it be not accompanied 

with modesty. — I maintain, and will always maintain, that 

soutenir, v. 
it is impossible to be happy without virtue. — They came to 

surprise our troops, but the general prevented all their 

prevenir, v. 
designs. — We started with horror when we saw the 
dessein, m. tressaillir, v. 

state he was in. — They leaped for joy, when they found 
etat, m. s 

their old comrades, whom they had thought killed. 

ancien, adj. camarade, m. cru, pp. 

— I shall remember his name, if you tell me how it is 

retenir, v. tikies, v. 

spelt. — You will clear the table, and then you will 
epeler, v. cfcsse v vir, v. ensuite, adv. 

bring the wine. — This house formerly belonged to Mr. 

op ar tenir, v. 

D. , but he has sold it to Mr. R. for two 

vendu, pp. 
thousand uine hundred pounds. — I will go out this after^ 

apres 

noon if the weather does not turn to rain. — Mr. A. 

tnidii m. terns 

will come with me, because he is very fond of walking. — 

aimer, v. 
I wish he may come and see me next year, as he has 

prochain, adj. 
promised me. — Will you come to-morrow and tell me 

what has been decided ? — My brother maintains that 
ce qui, pro. soutenir, v. 

H 3 



154 

you owe him ten pounds more than you think. — We 

returned last week from the continent very much pleased 
revenir, v. satisfait, pp. 

with our excursion. — I am just come in, and I shall go 

voyage, m. Je nefais que de rentier, v. 
out again in an hour's time. — They detained them prisoners, 
<sr> retenir, v . 

because they had no passports. We went by the coach, 

passeport, m. 
and we returned by water. — We were just come out of the 

revenir, v. 
port when the wind began to blow with great violence. — 

I agree with you, that the public buildings are much finer 

convenir, v. 
in Paris than in London ; but you will agree with me, that 

the streets of London are far superior to those of Paris. — 
They assailed the enemy in their entrenchments, and re- 
turned loaded with booty. — He kept his word and came at 

butin, m. 
the time appointed. — You will not become learned if you 
nomme, pp. devenir, v. savant 

do not apply more than you have done hitherto. 

appliquer, v. jusqu'ici, adv. 

He would obtain the place, if he had a friend who 

obtenir, v. 
would speak in his behalf. — What would become of you, 

faveur, f. 
if you were to lose your parents ? — Does this house 

perdiez, v. 
belong to you ? — It will belong to you very soon, if 
appartenir, v. 

you choose, for it is to be sold. — Almost every disease 

vendre > v. 



155 

proceeds from cold. — He will obtain whatever terms 

condition, f. 
he pleases, for the enemy is not able to make any re- 

voudra, v. car, c. 
sistance. — We will go out all together to-morrow, and we 

will return before dark. — Do you think he will keep his 

unit, f. 
word, and come without being compelled to it? — Her mo- 
ther started at these words, and reproached her with 

tressaillir, v. 
her ingratitude. — He will become a good master who fol- 
lows a method of teaching which is founded on reason. — 

raison, f. 
Hold him fast till the officers come and take him to 

mener, v. 
prison. — They held him so fast that he could not escape. — 

put, v. 
His master came back sooner than he expected. — I was 

attendoit, v. 
maintaining that you would not come so soon, when I re- 
ceived the letter which announced your coming. — Those 

arrivee, f. 
who act contrary to the law shall be punished according 
contrevenir,\. selon, pr. 

to the law. — Attentive scholars retain easily the 

faci lenient, adv. 
explanations of their masters, especially when they are 
explication, f, surtout, adv. 

clear and short. — Did your mother come the day you 

expected her ? — No, but she has written to me that she 
attendiez,Y, 

would come next week without fail. — He clothed him 

faute, f. revetir, v. 



156 

from head to foot, and kept him two years in his service. 

d 
You prepossessed me in your favour the first time I saw 

prevcnir; v. 
you. — His friends will interpose in his favour, and lie will 

inttrvenir, v. 
be acquitted. — You would suffer much from the heat, if 

ahsous, pp. souffrir, v. 

you were to go on foot. — This house would suit me 

a pied, adv. convenir, v. 

very well if it were larger. 

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION 
ENDING IN OIR. 

ASSEOIR, TO SEAT. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. J'assie, ds, ds, d, I seat, &c. 

Plur. Nous assey, ons, ez, ent, We seat, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. J'ass, is, is, it, I seated, &c. 

Plur. Nous ass, imes, ites, irent, We seated, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. J' assey, erai, eras, era, I shall or will 

seat, &c. 

Plur. Nous assey, erons, erez, eront. We shall or will 

seat, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing, jfssie, ds, Seat (thou). 

Plur. Assey, ons } ez, Seat (we and ye). 



157 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. J'assey, ois, ois, oit, I was seating, &c. 

Piur. Nous assey, ions, iez, oient, We were seating, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. J'assey, erois, erois, eroit, I should, &c. 

seat, &c. 
Plur. Nous assey, erions, eriez, eroient, We should, &c. 

seat, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que fasse, ie, ies, ie, That I may seat, &c. 

Plur. Que nous assey, ions, iez, ient, That we may seat, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Que jass, isse, isses, it, That I might 

seat, &c. 

Plur. Que nous ass, issions, hsiez, issent, That we might 

seat, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Asseoir, To seat. 

Participle Present. 
Asseyant, Seating. 

Participle Past. 
Assis, e, Seated. 

Thus are conjugated s'asseoir, to sit down, and se r as- 
seoir, to sit down again, except the three first persons sing, 
and third plural. From seoir, to fit, which is obsolete, 
and from which remain only 

Irid. Pres. // sied, ils sieent, It fits, they fit. 
Fut. II siera, ils sitront, It or they will fit. 



158 

Opt. Past. II seyoit, Us seyoient, It was fitting, &c. 
Fut. II sieroit, Us sitroient, It would fit, &c. 

The rest of the verb is never used. 

Participle Present. 

Seant, fitting. 

Participle Past. 

Sis, e, only used in the sense of situate. 



SURSEOIR, TO SUPERSEDE, used only in law. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je surs, ois } ois, oit, I supersede, &c. 

Plur. Nous surs, oyons, oyez, oient, We supersede, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je surs, is, is, it, I superseded, &c. 

Plur. Nous surs, imes, ites, irent, We superseded, 8cc. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je surseoi, rai, ras, ra, I shall supersede, &c. 

Plur. Nous surseoi, rons, rez, ront, We shall supersede, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Surs, ois, Supersede (thou). 

Plur. Surs, oyons, oyez, Supersede (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je sursoy, ois, ois, oit, I was superseding, &c. 

Plur. Nous sunoy, ions, iez, oient, We were superseding, &c ■ 



Hi 



159 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je surseoiy rois, rois, roit, I should, &c. su- 

persede, &c. 

Plur. Nous surseoiy rions, riez, roient, We should, 8cc. su- 
persede, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje stirs, eoie, eoies, eoie, That I may su- 

persede, &c. 

Plur. Que nous sursoy, ions, iez, oient, That we may su- 
persede, &c. 

Past Tense. 

I Sing. Queje surs, isse, isses, it, That I might 

supersede, &c. 
Plur. Que nous surs, issions, issiez, issent, That we might 

supersede, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Surseoir, To supersede. 

Participle Present. 
Sursoyant, Superseding. 

Participle Past. 
Sursisy e } Superseded. 



CHOIR, to fall, is used only in the infinitive. 
He let himself fall, II s'est laisse choir. 



DECHOIR, TO DECAY. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je dechy oiSy ois, oil, I decay, &c. 

Plur. Nous deck, oyons, oyez, oient. We decay, &c 



160 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je deck, m, us, ut, I decayed, &c. 

Plur. Nous deck, umes, utes, urent, We decayed, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je deck, errai, erras, erra, I shall decay, &c. 
Plur. Nous dtch y err oris, errez } erront. We shall decay, &c. 

The Imperative Mood is wanting. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

The Past is wanting. 
Future Tense. 

Sing. Je deck, errois, errois, erroit, I should de- 

cay, &c. 

Plur. Nous deck, errions, erriez P erroient, We should de- 
cay, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje deck, oie, oies } oie, That I may de- 

cay, &c. 

Plur, Que nous deck, oyions, oyiez, oient, That we may de- 
cay, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje dech, usse, usses, usse r That I might 

decay, &c. 

Plur. Que nous deck, ussions, ussiez, ussent, That we might 

decay, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Dechoir, To decay. 

Participle Present is wanting. 



161 

Participle Past. 
Dechu, e, Decayed. 



ECH01R, to fall out, like DECHOIR, except the 
third person sing, of the present of the indicative, il echet, 
it falls out. 

The participle present is, echeant, falling out. 



MOUVOIR, TO MOVE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je meu, s, s, t, I move, &c. 

Plur. Nous mouv, oris, ez, meuvent, We move, &c» 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je m, us, us, ut, I moved, &c. 

Plur. Nous m, umes, utes, urent, We moved, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je mouv, rai, ras, ra, I shall move, &c. 

Plur. Nous mouv, rons, rez, ront, We shall move, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Meu, s, Move (thou). 

Plur. Mouv, oris, ez, Move (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je mouv, ois, ois, oit, I was moving, &c. 
Plur. Nous mouv, ions, iez, oient, We were moving, &c. 



162 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je mouv, rois, rois, roit, I should move, &c. 

Plur. Nous mouv, rions, riez, roient, We should move,&c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje meuv, e, es, e, That I may 

move, &c. I 

Plur. Que nous mouv, ions, iez, meuvenf, That we may 

move, &c. 

Past Tense, 

Sing. Queje m, usse, usses, ut, That I might 

move, &c. 

Plur. Que nous m, ussions, ussiez, ussent 9 That we might 

move, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Mouvoir, To move. 

Participle Present. 
Monvant, Moving. 

Participle Past. 
Mu, e, Moved. 



POUVOIR, TO BE ABLE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je puis or p, eux, eux, eut, I am able, &c. I can 

and may, &c. 

Plur. Nouspouv, ons, ez, peuvent, We are able, &c. we 

can and may, &c. 



163 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je p, us, us, ut, I was able, &c. and I 

could, &c. 

Plur. Nous p, umes, utes, urent, We were able, &c. and 

we could, Sec. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je pour, rai. ras, ra, I shall be able, &c. 

Plur. hous pour, tons, rez, rout, We shall be able, &c. 

No Imperative Mood. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Jepouv, ois, ois, oit, I was able, &c. and 

could, &c. 

Plur. Nous pouv, ions, ie%, oient, We were able, &c. and 

could, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je pour, rois, rois, roit, I should be able, &c. 

Plur. Nous pour, rions, riez, roient, We should be able, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Que Je pit, isse, isses, isse, That I may be 

able, &c. 
Plur. Que nous pu, issions, issiez, issent, That we may be 

able, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Queje p, usse, usses, tit, That I might be 

able, &c. 
Plur. Que nousp, ussions, ussiez, ussent, That we maybe 

able, &c. 



164 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pouvoir, To be able. 

Participle Present. 
Pouvant, Being able. 

Participle Past. 
Pu 7 Been able. 



8AV0IR, TO KNOW (Mentally). 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je s, ais, ais, ait, I know, Sec, 

Plur. Nons sav, ons, ez, ent. We know, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je s, us, us, ut, I knew, &c. 

Plur. Nous s, umes, utes, urent, We knew, &c. 

Euture Tense. 
Sing. Je sau, rai, ras, ra, I shall know, &c. 

Plur. Nous, sau, rons, i*ez, ront, We shall know, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Sadie, Know (thou). 

Plur. Sack, ons, ez, Know (we and ye). 

OPTATTVE MOOD, 

Paet Tense. 
Sing. Je sai), ois, ois, oit, I was knowing, &c. 

Plur. Nous sav, ions, ie%, oient, We were knowing, &c* 



165 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je sau, rois,* rois, roit, I should know, &c. 

Plur. Nous sau, rions, riez, roient, We should know, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje sack, e, es, e, That I may know, &c. 

Plur. Que nous sack, ions, iez, ent 9 That we may know, 8cc. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje s, usse, usses, ut, That I might 

know, &c. 

Plur. Que nous s, ussions, ussiez, ussent. That we might 

know, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Savoir, To know (mentally). 

Participle Present. 
Sachant, Knowing. 

Participle Past. 
Su, e> Known. 






VALOIR, TO BE WORTH. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je v, aux, aux, aut, I am worth, &c. 

Plur. Nous veil, ons, ez, ent, We are worth, &c. 



* This tense is not unfrequently used in French instead of the present 
>f the verb pouvoir, 



J 66 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je val, us, us, tit, I am worth, Sec. 

Plur. Nous val, umes, utes, went, We were worth, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je vaud, rai, ras, ra, I shall be worth, &c. 

Plur. Nous vaud, rons, rez, ront, We shall be worth, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Vaux, Be worth (thou). 

Plur. Val, ons, ez, Be worth (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je val, ois, ois, oit, I was worth, &c. 

Plur. Nous val, ions, iez, oient, We were worth, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je vaud, rois, rois, roit, I should, &c. be 

worth, &c. 

Plur. Nous vaud, rions, riez, roient, We should, &c. be 

worth, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 3 . 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje v, aille, allies, aille, That I may be 

worth, &c. 

Plur. Que nous v, alions, aliez, aillent, That we may be 

worth, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje val, usse, usses, ut, That I might 

be worth, &c. 

Plur. Que nous val, fissions, tissiez, ussent, That we might 

be worth, &c. 






167 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Valoir, To be worth. 

Participle Present. 
Volant, Being worth. 

Participle Past. 
Valu, e, Been worth. 

PREFALOIR, to prevail, the only compound of this 
verb makes in the present of the subjunctive. 

Sing. Queje preval, e, es, e, That I may prevail, &c. 
Plur. Que nous preval, ions, iez, e/?£,That we may prevail,&c. 



VOIR, TO SEE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je v, ois, ois, oit, I see, &c. 

Plur. Nous voy, ons, ez, voient, We see, &c» 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je v, is, is, it, I saw, &c. 

Plur. Nous v, imes, ites, irent, We saw, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je ver, rai, ras, ra, I shall or will see, &c. 

Plur. Nous, ver, rons, rez, ront, We shall or will see, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 

Sing. V, ois, See (thou). 

Plur. Voy, ons, e%, See (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je voy, ois, ois, oit, I was seeing, &c. 

Plur. Nous voy, ions, iet, oient, We were seeing, &c. 



168 

Future Tense. 

Sing, Je ver, wis, rois, roit, I should, &c. see, &c. 
Plur. Nous ver, rions, riez, roient, We should see, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje v, oie, oies, oie, That I may see, &c. 

Plur. Que nous voy, ions, iez, voient, That we may see, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Queje v, isse, isses, it, That I might see, 

&c. 
Plur. Que nous v, tssions, zssiez, issent, That we might see, 

&c. 

TNF1NITIV& MOOD. 

Voir, To see. 

Participle Present. 
Voyant, Seeing. 

Participle Past. 
Vu, e, Seen. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Entrevoir, to have a glimpse. Prevoir, to foresee. 
Revoir, to see again. Pourvoir, to provide. 

N. B. The future of the indicative, and that of the opta- 
tive of Prevoir, are formed regularly from the indicative. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je prevoi, rai, rets, ra, I shall or will fore- 
see, &c. 

Plur. Nous prtDoi, rons, rez, font, We shall or will fore- 
see, &c. 



109 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je prevoi, rois, rois, roit, I should, Sec. fore- 
see, &c. 

Plur. Nous prevoi, rions, riez,roient, We should, 8tc. fore- 
see, &c. 



POURFOIR makes in the past of the indicative, 
Sing. Je pourv, us, us, ut, I provided, &c. 

Plur. Nous pourv , umes, utes, urent, We provided, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je pourvoi, rai, ras, ra, I shall provide, &c. 
Plur. Nouspourvoi, rons, rez, ront, We shall provide, &c 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je pourvoi, rois, rois, roit, I should provide, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous pourvoi, rions, riez, roient, We should pro- 
vide, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Que je pourv, asse, usses, ut, That I might 

provide, &c. 

Plur. Que nous pourv, ussions, ussiez, ussent, That we might 

provide, &c. 



VOULOIR, TO BE WILLING. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je v, cux, eux, eut, I will, &c. 

Plur. Nous voul } ons } ez, veuhnt, We will, &c. 



170 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je voul, us, us, ut, I would, &c. 

Plur. Nous voul, umes, utes, urent, We would, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je voud, rai, ras, ra, I shall be willing, &c. 
Plur. Nous voud, rons, rez, ront, We shall be willing, &c. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je voul, ois, ois, oit, I was willing, &c. 

Plur. Nous voul, ions, iez, oient, We were willing, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je voud, rois, rois, roit, I should be willing, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous voud, rions, riez, r oient, We should be wil- 
ling, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje v, euille, euilles, euille, That I may be 

willing, &c. 

Plur. Que nous voul, ions, iez, v, euillent, That we may be 

willing, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje voul, usse, usses, ut, That I might be 

willing, &c. 

Plur, Que nous voul f ussions, ussiez,ussent, That we might be 

willing, &c. 



171 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING VERBS AND 
THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Good morning, Sir ; I come to fetch your brother.-— 
Bon jour 
We are to go together to Croydon ; will you come 

vouloir, v. 

with us ? — My sister will be of the party. We shall go 

partie, f. 

in a boat, and we will return by the stage. 

bateau, m. revenir, v. voiture publique. 

Wheu will you come to see our new house ? — You never 

saw a more delightful spot. -We see daily the ships 

en droit, m. 

entering the port. 1 wish you may come soon. 

entrer, v. , m. bientot, adv. 

I shall be able to receive you comfortably. 1 have been 

commo dement, adv. 
able to obtain the information I wanted. — The judgment 

avoir besoin 
has been superseded. — We should be able to finish it, if we 

would. — We could not go out on account of the rain. 

d cause phie, f. 

I shall provide a good horse for each of us. — We shall see 

what he means to do. Yesterday I saw two officers 

vouloir, v. /aire, v. 
arrive from the army, they were exhausted with fatigue. 

armee, f. epuise, pp. 

— Who could foresee such 2 a 1 change! 3 — Do you know 

what has happened to my brother, when he was in the 

est, v. 
West Indies ? — We shall soon know what will 

occidental, adj. bientot, adv. 

i 8 



172 

become of us. — Let us provide for the safety of all. — 

devenir, v. S alut, m. 

I knew it in time. —Your house would be worth much 

d 
more, if it were better situated. — Corn was worth so 

valoit, v. 
much last year. — He is much fallen off from his preten- 
s m dechoir, v. preten- 

sions. — We will not come before you call us. — He has not 
tion, f. 
been able to come before seven o'clock. — If you come 

avant, pr. 
next 2 Saturday, 1 you will see all my drawings finished, — 

Samedi, m. dessein, m. 

It becomes every body to be polite. — He wishes as much 
sied, v. 

as we that you may succeed in your projects. -If you 

projet, m. 
knew my motive, you would not blame me. — Know that 

I shall not forgive you any more after this time. — He 

pardonner, v. 
knew this lesson yesterday, and he does not know it 
hier, adv. 

to-day. Have you seen the House of Lords ? — I am 

aujourdHiui, adv. chambre Pair, m. 

to see it next 2 week. 1 — The first time I came here, I could 

find nobody who would go with me to my cousin's. — 

chez, pr. 
It is better to be unfortunate than criminal.— When your 

valoir, v. 
father comes to know it, he will be angry with you. — 

centre, pr. 
Your horse is worth a hundred guineas ; mine is not worth 

more than fifty. — Did you know that Mr. B. was gone to 



173 

die East Indies ? — I knew that he was to go ; but I 

devoir, v. 

did not know that he was gone. We saw your brothers 

parti, pp. 
in the Park. — You foresee nothing, because you reflect 

on nothing. — You could not come more seasonably. 

a, pr. d-propos, adv. 

The best cloth is worth two guineas a yard. — All the finest 

talents united are not worth one virtue. — Had I foreseen 
talent, m. 

what has happened since, I could have prevented it. 

empecher, v. 

Severity and rigour may excite fear, but not love. 

pouvoir, v. 

If you would believe me, you would not set off so late. 

tard, adv. 
If you wish for that book, I can lend it to you for three 

or four days. — We could have been back an hour sooner, 

if we had known that we should have met you. — —- 

rencontre, pp. 
I have written to my brother, that you would be glad to 

ecrit, pp. 
see him.— I hope he will come for a few days at 

quelque, adj. 
least. — You would never see him again, if you suffered 

laisser, v. 
him to go. — The first time you see your sister, present my 

respects to her.— When will you come to see me ?— I can- 

not tell you ; but I shall come as soon as I can. — The last 

time I was in the Park, I could not discern the Prince. 

dans, pr. 



174 

on account of the crowd ; I had only a glimpse of him.— 

This house would suit me very well, if it were not so dear. 

— I did not think that they would come so soon.— We saw 

with pleasure that he would succeed. — If you chuse, my 

cousin will come and fetch you, and you shall go together 

to see the panorama of Paris. — I would have come 

yesterday ; but I received a visit from an old school-fellow, 

camarade 
whom I had not seen for several years.— Do you know 
depuis, pr. 

where Mr. B. lives ? —Yes, and I see him pass before 

demeurer, v. 
my house every morning.— I shall have the pleasure of 

seeing some friends next week, who returned lately from 

revenu, pp. 
America.— Come and see a beautiful picture, which 

tableau, m. 
my nephew bought yesterday at a sale for seventy guineas. 

vente, f. 
He saw there a violin, which was worth twenty pounds at 

l eas t. — When will your niece return from the boarding- 

niece revenir, v. 
school ? — You will know to-morrow if Mr. C. has received 

the letter which he was to receive from his partner, who 

associe 
set off last year to Jamaica.— — We will come to see you 

Jamaique, f. 
the first opportunity. — With what a pleasure I should see 
occasion, f. «* 



175 

my old friends ! — He will receive your letter before 

anciens, adj. 
mine. — If I had known that he was going to Rome, I 

su, pp. 
would have given him a letter of introduction to my cousin, 

who would have been of very great service to him. — Will 

you have the kindness to speak of my affair to the Lord 
bonte, f. Grand 

Chancellor, when you see him ? I wish to have his opi- 
Chancelier 
nion in so intricate a case. — He would do it, though 

embrouille, pp. 
he knew it was against the law. Black is the colour 

which best becomes old people. — White suits the 

seoir, v. viellards, pi. 

young best. — What will become of his sister, when she re- 
ceives the news of the death of her beloved brother ! — A 

cheri, pp. 
learned man is worth his weight in gold. — You may 

pesant, m. 
speak to Mr. P. when you please ; but I cannot take that 

liberty. — Do you know that Mr. A. is to marry Miss C. ? 
— Yes, I do ; but I will not tell my brother of it. — Seve- 
rity and rigour may make hypocrites and fools, mildness 
and persuasion alone can make good pupils. — People can- 
not learn well, unless they make use of their understanding. 



176 



IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGA- 
TION, ENDING IN RE. 

ABSOUDRE, TO ABSOLVE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD* 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Tabs, ous, ous, out, I absolve, &c. 

Plur. Nous abs, olvons, olvez, ohent, We absolve, &c. 

The Past is wanting. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Tabsoud, rat, ras, ra, I shall or will ab- 

solve, &c. 
Plur. Nous absoud, rons, rez, ront, We shall or will ab- 
% solve, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Absous, Absolve (thou). 

Plur. Absolv, ons, ez, Absolve (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. J'absolv, ois, ois, oit, I was absolving, &c. 

Plur. Nous, absolv, ions, iez, oient, We were absolving, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. J 'absoud, rois, rois, roit, I should, &c. ab- 

solve, &c. 

Plur. Nous absoud, rions, riez, r oient, We should absolve, 

&c. 



177 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Quefabs, olve, ohes, olve, That I may ab- 
solve, &c. 

Plur. Que nous absolv, ions, iez, ent, That we may ab- 
solve, &c. 

The Past is wanting. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Absoudre, To absolve. 

Participle Present. 
Abso/vant, Absolving, 

Participle Past. 
Absous, te, Absolved. 

SOUDRE, to solv^; this primitive verb is only used in 
the infinitive. 

DISSOUDRE has the same tenses wanting as absoudre. 

RESOUDRE, the other compound, makes in the parti- 
ciple past resolu. The past of the indicative is, (for it has 
all its tenses) 

Sing. Je resol, us, us, ut, I resolved, &c. 

Plur. Nous resol, umes, utes, urent, We resolved, &c. 

The Past of the Subjunctive is, 
Sing. Queje resol, usse, usses, ut, That I might 

resolve, &c. 
Plur. Que nous resol, ussions,ussiez } u$sent, That we might 

resolve, &c. 

ASTREINDRE, to subject, 
ATTE1NDRE, to attain, to reach, 

are conjugated like Craindre, hereafter* 

i 3 



178 



BATTRE, TO BEAT.' 

INDICATIVE MOOD* 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je b, ats, ats, at, I beat, &c. 

Plur. Nous batty ons, ez, ent, We beat, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je batt 9 is, is, it, I beat, &c. 

Plur. Nous batt, imes, ites, irent, We beat, 8cc. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je batt, rai, ras, ra, I shall or will beat, &c. 
Plur. Nous batt, rons, rez, ront, We shall or will beat, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Bats, Beat (thou). 

Plur. Batt, oris, ez, Beat (we and ye). * 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je batt, ois, ois, oit, I was beating, &c. 

Plur. Nous, batt, ions, iez, oient, We were beating, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je batt, rois, rois, roit> I should beat, Sec. 

Plur. Nous batt, rions, riez, roient, We should beat, &c, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje batt, e, es, e, That I may beat, &c. 

Plur. Que nous batt, ions, iez, ent, That we may beat, &c 



179 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje batt, isse, isses, it, That I might 

beat, &c. 

Plur. Que nous batt, issions, issiez, issent, That we might 

beat, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Battre, To beat. 

Participle Present, 
Battant, Beating. 

Participle Past. 
Battn, e, Beaten. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Abattre, to pull down. Rabattre, to abate, or to beat 

Combattre, to fight. down. ^ 

Dcbattre, to debate. Rebattre, to beat again. 
Se debattre, to struggle. 



BOIRE, TO DRINK. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je b, ois, ois, oit, I drink, &c. 

Plur. Nous b 9 uvons, uvez, oivent, We drink, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je by us, us, ut, I drank, &c. 

Plur. Nous b, umes, utes, urent, We drank, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je box, rai, ras, ra, I shall or will drink, &c. 

Plur. Nous box, rons, rez, ront, We shall or will drink, &c. 



J 80 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Bois, Drink (thou). 

Plur. Buv, ons, ez, Drink (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je buv, ois, ois, oil, I was drinking, &e. 

Plur. Nous buv, ions, iez, oient, We were drinking, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je boi, rois, rois, roit, I should drink, &c. 

Plur. Nous boi, rions, riez, roient, We should drink, &c 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje b, owe, owes, owe, That I may drink, 

&c. 

Plur. Que nous b, uvions, uviez, oivent, That we may drink, 

&c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje b, usse, usses, ut, That I might 

drink, &c. 

Plur. Que nous b, ussions, ussiez, ussent, That we might 

drink, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Boire, To drink. 

Participle Present. 

Buvant, Drinking. 

Participle Past. 

Bu } e, Drunk. 



181 

BRAIRE, TO BRAY. 

This verb is used only in the following instances: 

Indicative present. 11 brait, ils braient, He brays, they 

bray. 
Future. II braira, ils brairmt, He and they 

will bray. 



BRU1RE, TO ROAR, is never used. 



CEINDRE, to gird, and its compound, Enceindre, to 
enclose, are conjugated like Craindre, to fear, lower down. 



C1RCONCIRE, to circumcise, is conjugated like Con- 
fire ; see lower down ; but its participle past ends in is, 
instead of it. 



CONCLURE, TO CONCLUDE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je conclu, s, s, t, I conclude, &c. 

Plur. Nous conclu, ons, ez, ent, We conclude, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je concl, us, us, ut, I concluded, &c. 

Plur. Nous concl, umes, utes, urent, We concluded, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je conclu, rai, ras, ra, I shall conclude, &c. 
Plur. Nous conclu, rons, rez, rant, We shall conclude, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Conclu, s, Conclude (thou). 

Plur. Conclu, ons, ez, Conclude (we and ye). 



132 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je conclu, ois, ois, oit, I was concluding, &c. 
Plur. Nous conclu, ions, iez, oient, We were concluding, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je conclu, wis, rois, roit, I should conclude, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous conclu, rions, riez, roient, We should conclude, 

&c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje conclu, e, es, e, That I may con- 

clude, &c. 
Plur. Que nous conclu, ions, iez, ent, That we may con- 
clude, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje concl, usse, usses, ut, That I might 

conclude, &c. 

Plur. Que nous concl, ussions, ussiez, ussent, That we might 

conclude, &£. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Conclure, To conclude. 

Participle Present. 
Concluant, Concluding. 

Participle Past. 
Conclu, e, Concluded. 



EXCLURE is conjugated after the same manner, ex- 
cept the participle past, exclus. 



183 

CONDUIRE, TO CONDUCT. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je condu, is, is, it, I conduct, &c. 

Plur. Nous condu, isons, iset, isent, We conduct, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je condu, isis, isis, isit, I conducted, &c. 

Plur. Nous condu, isimes, isites, xsirent, We conducted, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je condu, irai, iras, ira, I shall conduct, &c. 
Plur. Nous, condu, irons, irez, iront, We shall conduct, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Condu, is, Conduct (thou). 

Plur. Condu, isons, isez, Conduct (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je condu, isois, isois, isoit, I was conducting, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous condu, isions, isiez, isoient, They were conduct- 
ing, 8cc. 
Future Tense. 

Sing. Je condu, irois, irois, iroit, I should con- 

duct, &c. 

Plur. Nous condu, irions, irie%, iroient, We should con- 
duct, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje condu, ise, ises, ise, That I may con- 

duct, &c. 
Plur. Que nous condu, hions, isiez, isent, That we may con- 
duct, &Q. 



184 

Past Tense, 

Sing. Queje condu, isisse, isisses, isit, That I 

might conduct, &c. 

Plur. Que nous condu, istssions, isissiez, isissent, That we 

might conduct, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Conduire, To conduct. 

Participle Present. 
Conduisant, Conducting. 

Participle Past. 
Conduit, e, Conducted. 

Its compounds are Econduire, to lead out; and Recon- 
duire, to lead again. Several other verbs are conjugated 
after this last, as, 

Cuire, To cook. Nuire, To annoy, 

Deduire, To deduct. Produire, To produce. 

Instruire, To instruct. Reluire, To shine bright, 
Luire, To shine. Seduire, To seduce. 

And several compounds of these. 



CONFIRE, TO PRESERVE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je conf, is, is, it, I preserve, &c. 

Plur. Nous conf isons, isez, isent, We preserve, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je conf, is, is, it, I preserved, &c. 

Plur. Nous conf, imes, ites, irent> We preserved, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je conf, irai, iras, ira, I shall preserve, &c. 
Plur. Nous conf irons, ire% } iront, We shall preserve, Sec. 



J 85 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing. Conf y is, Preserve (thou). 

Plur. Confj isons, isez, Preserve (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je conf> isois, isois> isoit, I was preserving, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous confj isions, isiez, isoient, We were preserv- 
ing, &c. 

Future Tense, 

Sing. Je confj irois, irois, iroit, I should preserve, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous conf, irions, iriez, iroient, We should pre- 
serve, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje conf 9 ise 9 ises, ise, That I may pre- 

serve, &c. 

Plur. Que nous conf, isions, isiez, isent, That we may pre- 
serve, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje conf> isse, isses, it, That I might 

preserve, &c. 

Plur. Que nous conf, hsions, issiez, issent, That we might 

preserve, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Confire, To preserve, 



186 

Participle Present. 
Conf, isant, Preserving. 

Participle Past. 
Confit, e, Preserved. 



CONNOITRE, TO KNOW (Experimentally). 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je conn, ois, ois, oit, I know, &c. 

Plur. Nous conn, oissons, oissez, oissent, We know, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je conn, us, us, ut, I knew &c. 

Plur. Nous conn, umes, utes, urent, We knew, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je conn, oitrai, oitras, oitra, I shall know, &c. 
Plur, Nous conn, oitrons, oitrez, oitront, We shall know, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Conn, ois, Know, (thou). 

Plur. Conn, oissons, oissez, Know (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je conn, oissois, oissois, oissoit, I was knowing, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous conn, oissions, oissiez, oissoient, We were know- 

ing, &c. 



187 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je conn, oitrois, oitrois, oitroit, I should know, 

&c. 

Plur. Nousconn, oitrions, oitriez, oitroient, We should know, 

&c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje conn, oisse, oisses, oisse, That I may 

know, &c. 
riur. Que nous conn, oissions, eissiez, oissent, That we may 

know, &c. 
Past Tense. 

1 Sing. Queje conn, usse, usses, ut, That I might 

know, &c. 
Plur. Que nous conn, ussions,ussiez,ussent, That we might 

know, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Connoitre, To know. 

Participle Present. 
Connoissant, Knowing. 

Participle Past. 

Conna, e, Known. 

The compounds of this verb are : 

Meconnoitre, To know Reconnoitre, To acknowledge, 
no more. to know again. 



CONSTRUIRE, TO CONSTRUCT, 
Is conjugated like Conduire. 



CONTRAINDRE, TO CONSTRAIN 
Is conjugated like Craindre, hereafter. 



188 
COUDRE, TO SEW. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je cou, ds, ds, d, I sew, &c. 

Plur. Nous cou, sous, sez, sent, We sew, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je cou, sis, sis, sit, I sewed, &c. 

Plur. Nous cou, sirnes, sites, sirent, We sewed, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je cou, drai, dras, dra, I shall sew, &c. 

Plur. Nous cou, drons, drez, dront, We shall sew, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Time. 

Sing. Cou, ds, Sew (thou). 

Plur. Cou, sons, sez, Sew (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tensew 

Sing. Je cou, sois, sois, soit, I was sewing, &c. 

Plur. Nous cou, sions, siez, soient, We were sewing, &€• 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je cou, drois, drois, droit, I should sew, &c. 
Plur. Nous cou, drions, driez, droient, We should sew, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing, Queje cou, se, ses, se, That I may sew, 8cc. 

Plur. Que nous cou, sions, siez, sent, That we may sew, &c„ 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje cou, sisse, sisses, sit, That I might 

sew, &c. 

Plur. Que nous cou, shsions } mssie% } sissent, That we might 

sew, &c. 



180 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Coudre, To sew. 

Participle present. 
Cou, sant, Sewing. 

Participle past. 
Cousu, e } Sewed. 

Its compounds are : 
Decoudre, To unsew. Recoudre, To sew again. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING VERBS AND THEIR 
COMPOUNDS. 

Do you know Mr. A. i Yes, we do know him well, 

and he is one of our best friends. — Do not beat your dog ; 

he is the most faithful animal I ever saw. — Will you go 

and take a walk before dinner? — I know a very fine 
faire un tour 

walk. — I know one too. Which is it? — The Re- 

promenade, f. aussi, adv. 

gent's Park, — I knew that was the one you meant. — My 

brother would resolve this problem, if you asked it of him. 

e, m. 

— The enemies will beat us, if we are not on our guard. — 

If they were combating for a good cause, they would be 

invincible. — Reach this book for me, if you please. 1 

vouloir bien 
could reach it, if I were a little taller. — My brother reached 



190 

it last evening with great ease. — The rain will bring down 

abattre 
the wind. — What will you drink at dinner ? — I shall drink 

diner, m. 
wine and water. — You drink too much at once. — It is more 

wholesome to drink less at once and oftener. — Do you 

sain, adj. 
drink tea ? — The French drink more tea than they used to 

do, 1 acknowledge my error.— You will acknowledge 

faire, v. 

that I was in the right, when I wanted to persuade you 

not to see that man. — Do you know how to sew ? — I sew 
very well. — Will you sew this for me ?— I shall sew it to- 
morrow ; for if I did not sew up my gloves to-day, my 

governess would scold me. — This tailor does not sew 

gouvernante tailleur 

well : give him this coat and waistcoat, that he may sew 

them again. — He is a prudent young man ; he will conduct 

himself properly. — —One must beat the iron when it is 

comme ilfaut. II faut 
hot. — We conducted him to his brothers. — They filled 

their glasses, and drank the General's health. — I knew 

your brother again as soon as I saw him come in. — We 

beat the enemy twice, and compelled them to fly. — Who 

runs best of you three ? — Let us see if you run better than 



191 

your brother. — You would run better than him, if you 
were not so fat. — I have run all day for an important 
affair, and I must run again to-morrow. — Have you con- 
cluded your bargain ? — Not yet, and I will not conclude it, 
mar die, m. 

if I cannot abate fifty pounds. Why do you run so 

livre, f. sterling. 
fast ? — Because I am in a hurry ; if I do not run, I shall 

be too late. — My brother saw the stag run across the fields, 

and the dogs were running very fast after him ; I doubt if 

they will be able to overtake him. — What do you conclude 

from what he has told you ? — The jury resolved to acquit 

dit, pp. 
him, because they saw that he was not guilty of the crime 

which his enemies wished to impute to him. — Mr. N. will 

construct a ship next year. — I want to unsew this 

vouloir, v. 

seam, because it is not well sewn. Unsew it; but 

couture, f. cousu, pp. 

take care in unsewing it, not to cut the muslin. — Will 

garde, f. 
you preserve some fruit this year ? — Yes, I will preserve 

confire 
some ; and I would preserve more, if the season were not 

(so far) advanced. — When I lived in the country, I 

si demeurer d 

used to preserve a great quantity every year. — Do you 



VJ2 

drink your lea very hot ? — Not very hot. — You are right ; 

those who drink it too hot, often suffer for it after wards. — If 

boire ' en dans la suite. 

you abate something of your demand, we shall soon conclude 

our bargain. — Run to the physician, and beg of him to 

medecin 
come immediately. — You run the risk of being taken, 

sur le champ risque, m. pris,pp. 

if y.ou advance too far in the enemy's country. — I have re- 
solved to sell my horse, if I can find another that may suit 
me better. — He knows no longer his old friends after so 
long an absence. — I would know the man again, if I saw 

him among a thousand.— He construes his sentences with 

entre, pr. phrase, f. 

much taste and elegance. — We drank last evening some 

Champaign of the year one thousand eight hundred and 

eleven, which is reckoned superior to that of any other 

tout 
year.—- Reverses are the best means of pulling down the 

pride of ambitious men.— A small rahv brings down the 
greatest wind. — His dogs led him to the spot where the ac- 
cident had happened.— 1 will conclude the bargain as soon 
as I can. — The English drink more coffee than they used 

to do, — The more a drunkard drinks, the more he wants 

vouloir, v. 



193 

to drink. — You do not sew neatly enough. — 

coudre, v. proprement, adv. 
Acknowledge that you are in the wrong not to attend 

/aire attention 
to what one tells you. — We will abate nothing of our 

s rabattre, v. 
demands, because they are moderate. — — My tailor sews 

moderee, pp. 
very well, for my clothes never unsew. — He construed a 

whole page of his author, without making a single fault.— 

If you construe properly, you will find but few difficulties 

in the Latin authors. 



CRAINDRE, TO FEAR. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je crai, ns, ns, nt, I fear, &c. 

Plur. Nous crai, gnons, gnez, gnent, We fear, &c« 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je crai, gnis, gnis, gnit, I feared, &c\ 

Plur. Nous crai } gnimes, gnites, gnirent, We feared, 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je crain, drai, dras, dra, I shall fear, &c. 

Plur. Nous cram, drons, drez, dront, We shall fear, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Crai, ?is, Fear (thou). 

Plur. Crai, gnons, gnez, Fear (we and ye). 

K 



104, 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je crai, gnois, gnois, gnoit, I was fearing, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous crai, gnions, gniez, gnoient, We were fear- 
ing, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je crain, drois, drois, droit, I should fear, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous crain, drions, driez, droient, We should fear, 

&c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje crai, gne, gnes, gne, That I may 

fear, &c. 

Plur. Que nous crai, gnions, gniez, gnent, That we may 

fear, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje crai, gnisse, gnisses, gnit, That I 

might fear, &c. 

Plur. Que nous crai, gnissions, gmssiez, gnissent, That we 

might fear, 8cc. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Craindre, To fear. 

Participle Present. 
Crai, gnant, Fearing. 

Participle Past. 
Craint, e, Feared. 



195 

CROIRE, TO BELIEVE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 

Sing. Je cr ois, cr ois, cr oil, I believe, &c. 

Plur. Nous croy, oris, yez, croient, We believe, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je cr, us, us, ut, I believed, 8tc. 

Plur. Nous cr, times, uies, urent, We believed, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je croi, rai, ras, ra, I will believe, &c. 

Plur. Nous croi, rons, rez, rout, We will believe, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Crois, Believe (thou). 

Plur. Cro, yons, yez, Believe (we and ye), 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense* 
Sing. Je cro, yois, yois, yoit, I was believing, &c. 
Plur. Nous cro, yions,yiez,yoient, We were believing, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je croi, rois, rots, roit, I should believe, &c. 
Plur. Nous croi, rions, riez, roient, We should believe, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje cr, oie, oies, oie, That I may be- 

lieve, &c. 
Plur. Que nous cr, oyions, oyiez, oient, That we may be- 
lieve, &c. 
k 2 



196 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje cr, m*> usses, ut, ^^e^ 

Plur. Que nous cr, ussions, Assiez, usseni, That we might 

believe, etc. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Croire, To believe. 

Participle Present. 
Croyant, Believing. 

Participle Past. 
Cru, e, Believed. 



CROITRE, TO GROW, 

and its compounds 

Accroitre, to accrue, Decretive, to decrease, 

Recroltre, to grow again, 

are conjugated like Connoitre. 

CUIRE.TO COOK, 
and its compound Reeuire, to cook again. 

DEDUIRE, to deduct, and DETRUIRE, to destroy, 
are conjugated like Conduire. 

DIRE, TO SAY. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je d, is, is, it, }™y, &c ^ 

Plur. Nous d, isons, ties* isent, We say, &c. 



197 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je d, is, is, it, I said, &c. 

Plur. Nous d, imes, ites, irent, We said, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je di y rai, ras, ra, I shall say, &c. 

Plur. Nous di, rons, rez, rout, We shall say, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. D, is, Say (thou). 

Plur. D } isons, ites, Say (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je dis, ois, ois, oit, I was saying, &c. 

Plur. Nous dis, ions, iez, oient, We were saying, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je di, rois, rois, roit, I should say, &c. 

Plur. Nous di, rions, riez, roient, We should say, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje d, ise, ises, ise, That I may say, &c. 

Plur. Que nous d, isions, isiez, isent, That we may say, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Queje d, isse, isses, it, That I might 

say, &c. 
Plur. Que nous d, hsions, issiez, issent, That we might 

say, Sec. 



the indicative and imperative, and Maudire takes a double s through 
the whole verb, as nous maudissons, issez, issent, &c. 



198 

INFINITIVE MOOD* 

Dire, To say. 

Participle Present. 
Disant, Saying. 

Participle Past. 
Dit, e, Said. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Contredire, to contradict. Interdire, to interdict. 

Dedire, to say against. Pre dire, to foretel. 

Medire de, to speak ill of. JRedire, to say again, 
Maudire, to curse. 



ECLORRE, TO HATCH. 

This verb is used only in the third persons of the follow- 
ing tenses, and in the infinitive mood and participle past. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 

Sing. 11 eclot, It hatches. 

Plur. lis eclosent, They hatch. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. II eclorra, It will hatch. 
Plur. lis eclorront, They will hatch* 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. II eclorroit, It would hatch. 

Plur. Ih eclorroient, They would hatch. 



199 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Qu'il eclose, That it may hatch. 
Plur. Quils eclosent, That they may hatch. 

This verb is applied in French to flowers as well as to 
c gg s * probably on account of the resemblance of the bud 
with an egg. 

The primitive is clorre, to close ; besides, enclorre, to 
inclose a piece of ground* 



ECRIRE, TO WRITE, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. J'ecr, is, is, it, I write, &c. 

Plur. Nous ecriv, ons, ez, ent, We write, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. J'ecriv, is, is, it, I wrote, &c. 

Plur. Nous ecriv, imes, lies, irent, We wrote, &e. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. J'ecri, rai, ras, ra, I will write, &c. 

Plur. Nous ccri, rons, rez, ront, We will write, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Ecr, is, Write (thou). 

Plur. Ecriv, oris, ez, Write (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. J'ecriv, ois, ois, oit, I was writing, &c. 

Plur. Nous ecriv, ions, ie% } oient, We were writing, &c, 



200 

Future Tense. 
Sing J'ecri, rois, rois, roit, I should write, &c. 

Plur. Notts ecri, rions, riez, roient, We should write, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Quefecriv, e, es, e, That I may write, 

&c. 
Plur. Que nous ecriv, ions, iez, ent, That we may write, 

&c. 
Past Tense. 

Sing. Quefecriv, isse, isses, it, That I might 

write. &c. 

Plur. Que nous ecriv, issions, issie%, issent, That we might 

write, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Ecrire, To write. 

Participle Present. 
Ecrivant, Writing. 

Participle Past. 
Ecrit, e, Written. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

JDecrire, to describe. Proscrire, to proscribe. 
Inscrire, to inscribe. Souscrire, to subscribe. 
Prescrire, to prescribe, Transcrire, to transcribe. 



ENDUIRE, TO DO OVER, 
is conjugated like Conduire. 

ETEINDRE, TO EXTINGUISH 
is conjugated like Craindre. 



201 

EXCLURE, TO EXCLUDE, 

is conjugated like Conclure. 

Its participle past is exclus, and the feminine exctue. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING VERBS AND, THEIR 
COMPOUNDS, 

I fear every thing for you, if you do not avoid dangerous 
tout 
company. — Fear God and honour the king. — Do you be- 
lieve the news of the day ? — He fears no body — We can- 
not believe a liar, even when he speaks the truth. — We 

merit eur 
ought to fear dangers only when our duty does not re- 
quire that we should despise them. — I believe all that your 
brother tells me, but I shall never believe you, because 

you have deceived me once. — Mr. A. has told Mr. 

B. that he had seen you in the Park, and that he 

thought it was your cousin who was with you. — When will 
you write to your father ? — I shall write to him (the day) after 

to-morrow, and I shall send the letter by the post, in order 

qfin, adv. 
that he may receive it before next Sunday. — I would write 

Dimanche 
to him myself if I had time. — You write better than you 

did last year. — You will write better than your brother, 

k 3 



202 

if you continue to apply yourself to your writing. — Poste- 

Acriture, f. 
rity will inscribe his name on the list of great men as a 

reward for his virtues. — Describe a circle in this square 

cercle, m. quarre, m. 

with your compass. — These trees would grow much better 

compas, m. arbre, m. 

if they were planted at a greater distance from each 

other. — I shall put out the light, when I have sealed my 

cachete 
letter. — The water has put out the fire. — Do you wish 

eteint, pp. 
me to put out the light ? — Cover this wall with fine 

subj. lamiere fin, adj. 

mortar. — The wicked will be excluded from the number 
mortier nombre, m. 

of the elect, — If I had water I would drink some of it.— I am 

elu, m. 
afraid you will come too late. — Who would believe such a 

subj. 
a story. — The meat is not done enough. — He deducted 

conte, m. cuit, pp. 

five per cent, for his trouble. — Time destroys all the works 

par peine, f. 

of men. — They will exclude all suspicious characters from 

suspect, adj. per sonne, f. 
their society. — He foretold them what would happen.— 

We will forbid him our company if he does not act more 

prudently. — They wrote yesterday a long letter to their 

father. — Mr.F. has written to me that he would 

come here very soon. — Eggs are hatched by dint of heat. — 

a force chakur,f. 



203 

We thought he was gone, and he was waiting for us in 

parti 
the library. — The Vandals destroyed all the fine monu- 

bibliotkeque, f. 
ments of art, when they penetrated into Italy. — He told it 

to whoever would listen. — If I write to him I hope he 

will answer me. — They will proscribe all who oppose their 

measures. — He was transcribing the act when you came in. — 

They would subscribe for your work, if they were in town. 

— His pusillanimity extinguished the ardour of his troops.— 

When do you think these eggs will be hatched? — They will 

be hatched before next week. — You always say the same 

thing over again. — Why do you contradict me, when I 

Pourquoi 
tell you a thing which I know to be true ? — I will conclude 

this chapter by this useful remark : it is a great breach of 

defaut, m. 
politeness to contradict any one at every word he says. 



FAIRE, TO DO or TO MAKE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Jef, ais, ais, ait, I do, &c. 

Plur. Nousf } ai$o?is, aites, ont, We do, &c. 



204 

Past Tense, 
Sing. Jef, is, is, it, I did, &c; 

Plur. Nousf, imes, ites, irent, We did, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Jefe, rai, fas, ra, I shall or will do, &c. 

Plur. Nousfe, rons, rez, ront, We shall do, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Fats, Do (thou) or make. 

Plur. F, aisons, aites, Do (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Jefais, ois, ois, oit, I was doing, &c. 

Plur. Nousfais, ions, iez, oient, We were doing, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Jefe, rois, wis, roit, I should, would, or 

could do, &c. 
Plur. Nousfe, rions, riez, roient, We should do, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Quejef, asse, asses, asse, That I may do, 

&c. 

Plur. Que nousf, assions, assiez, assent, That we may 

do, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Quejef, isse, isses, it, That I might 

do, &c. 

Plur. Que nousf, issions, tssiez, issent, That we might 

do, &c. 



205 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Faire, To do or to make. 

Participle Present. 
Faisant, Doing. 

Participle Past. 
Fait, e, Done. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Contrefaire, to counterfeit, Redefaire, to undo again. 

to mimic. Satisfaire, to satisfy. 

Defaire, to undo. Surf aire, to overcharge. 
Refaire, to do or make again. 



FEINDRE, TO FEIGN, 
is conjugated like Craindre. 



FRIRE, TO FRY. 

This verb is used only in the infinitive, being always pre- 
ceded by the verb faire. 

Its participle past is frit, e. 



INDUIRE, TO INDUCE, 

INSTRUIRE, TO INSTRUCT, 

INTRODUIRE, TO INTRODUCE, 

are conjugated like conduire. 



JOINDRE, TO JOIN, 

and its compound Enjoindre, to enjoin, are conjugated 
like Craindre. 



206 
LIRE, TO READ, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je /, is, is, it, I read, &c. 

Plur. Nous I, isons, isez, isent, We read, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je /, us, us, ut, I read, &c. 

Plur. Nous I, umes, utes, urent, We read, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je H, rat, ras, ra, I shall read, &c. 

Plur. Nous H, rons, rez, rout, We shall read, &c« 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Lis, Read (thou). 

Plur. Lis, ons, isez, Read (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je I, isois, isois, isoit, I was reading, &c. 

Plur. Nous I, isions, isiez, isoient, We were reading, &c* 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je H, rois, rois, roit, I should read, &c. 

Plur. Nous It, rions, riez, roient, We should read, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje /, ise, ises, ise, That I may read, Sec. 

Plur. Que nous I, hions, isiez, isent, That we may read, &c a 



207 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje I, usse, usses, iit, That I might 

read, &c. 

Plur. Que nous /, ussions, thsiez, ussent, That we might 

read, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Lire, To read. 

Participle Present. 
Lisant, Reading, 

Participle Past. 
Lu, e, Read. 

Its compounds are, 
Elire, to elect. Retire, to read again. 



LUIRE, TO SHINE, 

and its compound Reluire, to glitter, are conjugated like 
Conduire; but suppress the t of the participle past, hri, 
shined. 



METTRE, TO PUT. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je m, ets, ets, et, I put, &c. 

Plur. Nous m, ettons, ettez, ettent, We put, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je m, is, is, it, I put, &c. 

Plur. Nous m> imes 7 ites } irent, We put, &c. 



208 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je m, ettrai, ettras, ettra y I shall put, &c. 

Plur. Nousm, ettrons, ettrez, ettront, We will put, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. M, ets f Put (thou). 

Plur. M, ettons, ettez 9 Put (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je m, ettois, ettois, ettoit, I was putting, &c. 
Plur. Nous m, ettions, ettiez, ettoient, They were putting, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je m 9 ettrois, ettrois, ettroit, I should put, &c. 
Plur. Nous m> ettrions, ettriez, ettroient, We would put, 

&c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje m, ette, ettes, ette, That I may put, 

&c. 

Plur, Que nous m, ettions, ettiez, ettent, That we may put, 

&c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje m, isse, isses, it, That I might put, 

&c. 

Plur. Que nous m,issions,tssiez,is$ent, That we might put, 

&c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Metire, To put. 



209 



Participle Present. 
Mettant, Putting. 

Participle Past. 
Mis, e, Put. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Admettre, To admit. Promettre, To promise 

Comrnettre, To commit. 
Compromettre, To compro- 
mise. 
Demettre, To turn out. 

Omettre, To omit. 

Permettre, To permit. 



Remettre, To remit, to 
deliver up, to put back 
to recollect. 

Soumettre, To submit. 

Transmettre, To transmit, 



MOUDRE, TO GRIND. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je m, ous, ous, out, I grind, &c. 

Plur. Nous m, oulons, oulez, oulent, We grind, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je m, oulus, oulus, oulut, I ground, &c. 

Plur. Nous m } oulumes, oulutes, oulurent. We ground, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je m } oudrai, oudras, oudra, I shall grind, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous m, oudrons, oudrez, oudront, We will grind, 

&c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. M, ous, Grind (thou). 

Plur. My oulons, oidez> Grind (we and ye), 



210 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je m 9 oulois, oulois, ouloit, I was grinding, 

&c. 
Plur. Nous m } oulions y ouliez, ouloient, We were grinding, 

&c. 
Future Tense. 

Sing. Je m, oudrois, oudrois, oiidroit, I should 

grind, &c. 

Tlur. Nous m, oudrions, oudriez, oudroient, We should 

grind, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje m, oule> oules, oule, That I may 

grind, &c. 
Plur. Que nous m y oulions, ouliez, oulent, That we may 

grind, &c. 
Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje moul, tisse, usses > ut y That I might 

grind, &c. 

Plur. Que nous moul, ussions, iissiez, ussenl, That we might 

grind, &c. 

IMFINITIVE MOOD. 

Moudre, To grind- 

Participle Present. 
Moulanty Grinding. 

Participle Past. 
Mouhy e, Ground. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Emoudre, To sharpen. Remoudre, To grind afresh* 



211 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING VERBS AND 
THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

What are you doing there, Miss ? — 1 am only copying the 

sums which you requested me to write out in my copy- 

au net, adv. e-- 

book. — Undo this sewing; it is very badly done. — You 
hier, m. 
shall sew it again after dinner ; and if you do not do better, 

you shall undo it again, until it is sewed properly. Never 

commeilfaut, adv. 
mimic any one ; it is a very bad practice. — You always 

feign not to hear what I say to you. — Do not believe him ; 

he will induce you unto error. — You will fry this fish for 

our supper. — Put it upon a chafing-dish ; it is quite cold. 

rechaud, m. 
—They always promise, but they never keep their word. 

tenir, v. 

You will pretend to know nothing of it. 1 will in- 

faire semblant his- 

form your father of your conduct. — You will put the 
truire, v. 

brush in the press. 1 will introduce you to Mr. B. the 

foosse, f. ar moire, f. 

I next time I go to pay him a visit. — Read a chapter of 
) -end-re, v. 
the Bible. — You read too fast ; you do not pay atten- 

fuire, v. 

tion to the stops. 1 do not like to buy from ptople who 

point, ni. gens, m. 

ask too much for their goods. Mr. C. never asks too 

surf aire, v. marchandise, f. 



212 

much. — The sun shone the whole of yesterday,— —I hope 

journee, f. 
it will shine to-day, — He instructed him in all the learning 

scienc . f. 
of the ancients. — He will instruct you likewise, if you are 

desirous to learn, — I would w r ait for you, if you would 
promise me to come with us, — He joins prudence to va- 
lour. — If I were in your place, I would enjoin him to con- 
form himself to the rules of the house, — The cook has 

fried the whitings too soon, and has served them up quite 

merlait, m. 
cold.— We introduced your cousin to our friend Mr. F» 

chez, pr. 
and he received him very kindly. — The aldermen will elect 

echevin 

a new mayor next month. We would admit him to our 

maire mois, m. 

society, if he were not so troublesome. — They joined their 

forces with those of their allies, and put their enemies to 

the route. 1 shall remit your money to Mr, A. as soon 

deroute, f. 
as I see him. — I shall put back every book in its place.— 

remettre 
Deliver this letter to your father as soon as you can, that 
Remettre, v. 
he may know that I have not neglected his commission. — 

Why do you promise, if you do not intend to keep your 

avoir intention 
word? — Whatever merit a master has, he cannot succeed 



213 

in the art of teaching, if he does not join practice with 

theory. — Those who promise too easily, are subject 

facilement, adv. 
to break their word. — The moon shone all night, 

manquer de, v. hi ire, v. 

and we travelled more agreeably than during the day-time, 

— He charged him to write without delay, that they 
enjoindre, v. 

might receive the answer by the next post. — I will in- 

ordinaire, m. 
troduce you to my best friend. — He mimicks every 

chez, pr. conirefaire, v. 

body, and makes himself thereby more ridiculous than 

rend, v. 
those he wishes to ridicule. — -We read and read over again 

with the same pleasure the works of the great masters, be- 
cause, as in a fine painting, we discover always new beau- 
ties in them. They will elect a new member for the 

y 

county of B., to fill the place vacant by the death of Mr, 

P. — Undo all that you have done, and you shall do it again 

to-morrow morning. — What a bustle the children make 

vacarme, m. 
in the next room ; the master cannot hear what they 

voisin, adj. 
read. — He delivered the letter to me, and set off without 

remettre, v. 
waiting for an answer. — My uncle has invented a mill 

repome, f. 
which grinds very fast. — He says it will grind double the 



214 

quantity of his other mill, in the same space of time.— » 

espace,m. 
They read the letter, and pretended not to understand the 

feindre, v. 
meaning of it. — If you listen to the advice of the wicked, 
sens, m. 
they will lead you from error to error. — I would in- 

induire, v. 
struct him with a great deal of pleasure, if he were atten- 
tive. — Put your trust in God rather than in men ; for they 
readily promise, but they seldom keep their word. — If they 

will believe me, they will compromise this affair, and 

compromettre, v. 
avoid a law-suit. 
eviter, v. 



NAITRE, TO BE BORN, TO RISE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je n, ais, ais, ait\ I am born, &c. 

Plur. Nous n, aissons, aissez, aissent, We are born, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je n, aquis, aquis, aquit, I was born, &c. 

Plur. Nous n, aquimes, aquites, aquirent, We were born, 

&c. 

Future Tense* 
Sing. Je n, aitrai, aitras, aiira, I shall be born, &c. 
Plur. Nous, n, aitrons, aitrez, aitront, We shall be born, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. N, ais, Be born (thou). 

Plur. N, aissons, aissez, Let us be born — be born( we and ye)* 






215 

OPTxVTIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je n, aissois, aissois, aissoit, I was born, &c. 

Plur. Nous n, aissions, aissiez, aissoient, We were born, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Jen, aitrois, aitrois, aitroit, I should be born, 

&c. 
Plur. Nous n } aitrions, aitriez, aitroient, We should be 

born, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje n, aisse, aisses, aisse, That I may be 

born, &c. 

Plur. Que nous n } aissions, aissiez, aissent, That we may be 

born, &c. 
Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje n, aquisse, aquisses, aquit, That I 

might be born, &c. 

Plur. Que?iousn, aqiussions, aquissiez, aquissent, That we 

might be born ; &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Naitre, To be born. 

Participle Present. 
Naissant, Being born. 

Participle Past. 
Ne, e, Born. 

The compound of this verb is : 
Renaitre, To be born again, 



216 

NUIRE, TO ANNOY/ 

Is conjugated like Conduire, but the participle past drops 

the t, being nui. 



OINDRE, TO ANOINT. 
This verb, seldom used, is conjugated like Craindre. 



PAITRE, TO GRAZE. 

PAROITRE, TO APPEAR, 

And its compounds, 

Comparoitre, To appear Disparoitre, To disappear, 

against one. Reparoitre, To re-appear. 

Are conjugated like Connoitre. 



PEINDRE, TO PAINT. 

PLAINDRE, TO PITY. 

Are conjugated like Craindre. 



PLAIRE, TO PLEASE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je pi, ais, ais, ait, I please, &c. 

Plur. Nous pi, aisons, aisez, aisent, We please, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je pi, us, us, ut, I pleased, &c. 

Plur. Nous pi, umes, utes, urent, We pleased, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je pi, airai, airas, aira, I shall please, &c. 
Plur. Nouspt, airons, airez, airont, We will please, &c. 



217 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Plaisy Please (thou). 

Plur. PI, aisons, aisez, Please (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD, 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je pi, aisoiSy aisoiSy aisoit, I was pleasing, &c. 
Plur. Nous, ply aisionSy aisiez, aisoienty We were pleasing, 

&c. 
Future Tense. 

Sing. Jeply airoiSy airois, airoit, I should please, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous pl } airionsy airiez } airoienty We should please, 

&c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que jeply aise y aises, aise, ^That I may 

please, &c. 

Plur. Que nous pi, aisions, aisiez, aisenty That we may 

please, &c. 
Past Tense. 

Sing. Que jeply usse, usses, tit, That I might 

please, &c. 

Plur. Que nous ply Assionsy ussiez, ussenty That we might 

please, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Plairey To please. 

Participle Present. 
Plaisanty Pleasing. 

Participle Past. 
Pluy e, Pleased. 

L 



218 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Completive, To humour. Deplaire, To displease. 



PRENDRE, TO TAKE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je pr, ends, ends, end, ' I take, &c. 

Plur. Nous pr, enons, enez, ennent, We take, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je pr, is, is, it, I took, &c. 

Plur. Nous pr, imes, ites, irent, We took, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je pren, drai, dras, dra, I shall take, &c. 

Plur. Nous pren, drons, drez, dront, We shall take, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Pr, ends, Take (thou). 

Plur. Pr, enons, enez, Take (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je pr, enois, enois, enoit, I was taking, &c. 

Plur. Nouspr, enions, eniez, enoient, We were taking, &c, 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je pren, drois, drois, droit, I should take, &c. 
Plur. Nous pren, drions, driez, droient, We should take,&c. 



219 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Quejepr, enne, ennes, enne, That I may take, 

&c. 
Plur. Que nouspr, enions, eniez, ennent, That we may take, 

&c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Quejepr, isse, isses, it, That I might 

take, &c. 

Plur. Que nous pr, hsions, tssiez, issent, That we might 

take, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Prendre, To take. 

Participle present. 

Prenant, Taking. 

Participle past. 
Pris, e, Taken. 

The compounds of this verb are : 

Apprendre, To learn. Meprendre, To mistake. 

\Comprendre, To comprehend. Reprendre, To take again. 
Desapprendre, To unlearn. Surprendre, To surprise. 

Entreprendre, To undertake. 



PRODU1RE, TO PRODUCE. 

RED UIRE, TO REDUCE. 
Are conjugated like Conduire. 



RESTREINDRE, TO RESTRAIN, 

Is conjugated like Craindre, 
L 2 



220 



RIRE, TO LAUGH. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je ri y s, s, t, I laugh, &c. 

Plur. Nous riy ons 9 ez, ent, We laugh, &c. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je riy s, s, t, I laughed, &c. 

Plur. Nous ri) mes, tes, rent. We laughed, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je riy rai y ras } ra y I shall laugh, &c. 

Plur. Nous riy rons, re% 9 rout. We shall laugh, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing. Ri 9 Sy Laugh (thou). 

Plur. Riy oris, ez. Laugh (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je riy ois f ois, oit, I was laughing, &c. 

Plur. Nous riy ions, iez } oienty We were laughing, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing, Je riy rois 9 rois, roit, I should laugh, &c. 

Plur. Nous riy rions, riez, roient, We should laugh, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje ri } e, es 9 e, That I may laugh, &c. 

Plur. Que nous ri } ions, iez } ent, That we may laugh, &c. 



221 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje r, isse, isses, it, That I might 

laugh, &c. 

Plur. Que nous r, issions, tssiez, issent, That we might 

laugh, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Hire, To laugh. 

Participle Present. 

Hi, ant, laughing. 

Participle Past. 

Hi, laughed. 

The compound of this verb is Sourire, to smile. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING VERBS AND 
THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Men are born subject to all sorts of infirmities and 
naitre 
accidents. — Those who shall be born after us will scarce- 
ly credit the revolutions that have taken place in our 

age. — Wicked people annoy the good as much as they 

siecle, m. gens de bun 

can, at least, with impunity. — We shall rise again one 

renaitre, v. 
day to be judged according to our deeds.— — These two 

selon, pr. ceuvres, pi. f. 

children were born on the same day, and seem likely to 

paroitre devoir, v. 

live. The ass was grazing in a corner of the field when 

vivre, v. 



222 

the wolf came and threw himself upon him. — I take plea- 
sure in listening to the warbling of this little songster. — 

ramage, m. chantre 

My father was born on the eighth of January, one thou- 
sand seven hundred and sixteen ; and I was born on the 

twenty-fourth of February, of the year one thousand seven 

Fevrier, m. 
hundred and sixty-six. Flies disappear entirely to- 
wards the end of October ; and they re-appear about the 

spring time. — La Bruyere and La Fontaine represent men 

depeindre, v. 
such as they are. — A virtuous man injures nobody, not even 

his bitterest enemies. — Spirituous liquors injure the health, 

nuire, v. 
and ought to be regarded as slow poison. — The reading 

lent, adj. 

of all sorts of novels injured his morals. His conduct 

roman, m. moeurs, f. pi. 

appears rather that of an infidel or a Jew than of a Chris- 
tian. — We can retain long only what we comprehend well ; 

therefore, in learning a language, we must endeavour to 
c y est pourquoi devoir 

comprehend the true meaning of each word. — The comet 

sens, m. comete, f. 

which appeared in one thousand eight hundred and eleven, 

was visible for above four months, and disappeared at last 

enfin 
in the west. — When I heard of his accident, I pitied him 

Quest, m. apprendre> v. 



223 
very sincerely. — I pity a youth who does not know how to 
employ his time usefully. — Death surprises all men, even 
the old, who never think themselves arrived at the term of 
their existence. — A certain farmer pretends to have disco- 
vered, by experience, that trees stripped of their bark 

depoirille, pp. ecorce, f. 

produce more fruit than others. — A mild disposition pleases 

caractere, m. 
every body, whereas rough manners displease uni* 

tandis que , adv . manieres, f. pi. 

versally. — He always was a wicked man, and would still do 

harm if he could. — You would appear taller, if you w 7 ere 

not so lusty. 1 will do every thing you please to com- 

gros, adj. vouloir, v. 

mand me to do, if it lies in my power. — He painted the bro- 
ther and sister in one picture, in the character of a shep- 

ber- 
berd and shepherdess. — Objects appear always smaller 
ger bergere 

at a great distance. — I will take care of your book, if you 

will be so kind as to lend it to me. — You will learn the 
French with facility, if you use a proper method. — There 

are countries where the land yields two crops in one 

produire, v. recolte, f. 
year. — He reduced his enemies to silence by the able man- 
ner with which he pleaded his own cause. — The ministers 



224 
appeared quite surprised when the king accepted their re- 
signation. — A man who laughs at every thing, can only 

please fools like himself. — At these w T ords, he resumed a 

reprendre 

serious air, and left him abruptly.* Your repri- 

quitter, v. brusquement, adv. 

mand produced the best effect upon your son, and reduced 

him to silence.— Miss A. smiles with a peculiar grace. 

particulier, adj. 
— A love for his country restrained Ulysses, and prevented 

restreindre, v. 
him from falling into the snares of the Syrens. — I would 

piege, m. 
laugh heartily, if his wicked designs turned to his disgrace* 

de bon cceur 
— We laughed much at the simplicity of his answer.-^Do 

not laugh so much. — Mr. D. laughed so much the other 

day, that he was ill through it. — Your brother would 

mala.de en 
laugh heartily, if he knew what happened to you the other 

day at the ball 



SEDUIRE, TO SEDUCE, 
is conjugated like Conduire. 



SUFFIRE, TO SUFFICE, 

is conjugated like Conjire; but the participle past loses 
the t 9 being svffi. 



225 

SXJ1VRE, TO FOLLOW. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je suis 9 tu suis, il suit, I follow, &c. 

Plur. Noussuivons.voussuivez,ils suivent, We follow, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je suivis, tu suivis, il suivit, I followed, &c. 
Plur. Nous suivimes, ites, irent> We followed, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je suiv, rai, ras, ra, I shall follow, &c. 

Plur. Nous suiv, rons, rez, ront y We shall follow, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Suis, Follow (thou). 

Plur. Suiv, oris, ez, Follow (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je suiv, ois, ois, oit y I was following, &c. 

Plur. Nous suiv, ions, iez, oxent, We were following, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je suiv, rois, rois, roit, I should follow, &c. 
Plur. Nous suiv, rions, r iez, roient, We should follow, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje suiv, e, es, e, That I may follow, &c. 

Plur. Que nous suiv, ions, iez, ent, That we may follow, &e. 

l3 



226 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje suiv, isse, isses, it, That I might 

follow, &c. 

Plur. Que nous suiv, issions, tssiez, issent, That we might 

follow, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Suivre, To follow. 

Participle Present. 
Suivant, Following. 

Participle Past. 
Suivi, e, Followed. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
S'e?isuivre, to ensue. Poursuivre, to pursue* 



TAIRE, TO KEEP SECRET, 
is conjugated like Plaire. 

TEINDRE, TO DYE, 
is conjugated like Craindre* 

TRADUIRE, TO TRANSLATE, 
is conjugated like Conduire. 



TRAIRE, TO MILK, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 



Sing. Je trais, trais, trait, I milk, &c. 

Plur. Nous trayons, trayez, traient, We milk, &e. 

The Past is wanting. 



227 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je trai, rai, ras, ra, I shall milk, &c, 

Plur. Nous trai> rons, rez, ront, We shall milk, &c, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Sing. Trais, Milk (thou). 

Plur. Trayons, trayes, Milk (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je tray, ois, ois, oit, I was milking, &c. 

Plur. Nous tray, ionsyiez, oient, We were milking, &c, 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je trai, rois, rois, roit, I should milk, &c. 

Plur. Nous trai, rions, riez, roient, We should milk, &c> 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje traie, traies, traie, That I may 

milk, &c. 

Plur. Que nous trayions, trayiez, traient, That we may 

milk, &c. 
The Past is wanting. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Abstraire, to abstract. lientraire, to darn. 
Distraire, to distract. Soustraire, to subtract, 

Extraire, to extract. 



VAINCRE, TO VANQUISH. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, - 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Je vain, cs, cs, c, I vanquish, &c. 

Plur. Nous, vain, quons, quez } quent, We vanquish, &c» 



228 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je vain, quis, quis, quit, I vanquished, 

&c. 

Plur. Nous vain, quimes, quites, quirent, We vanquished, 

&c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je vain, crai, eras, era, I shall vanquish, &c. 
Plur. Nous vain, crons, crez, eront, We shall vanquish, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Vain, cs, Vanquish (thou). 

Plur. Vain, qaons, quez, Vanquish (we and ye). 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je vain, quois, quois, quoit, 1 was van- 

quishing, &c. 

Plur. Nous vain, quions, quiez, quoient, We were van- 
quishing, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je vain, crois, erois, croit, I should van- 

quish, &c. 

Plur. Nous, vain, crions, criez, croient, We should van- 
quish, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Que je vain, que, ques, que, That I may 

vanquish, &c. 

Plur. Que nous vain, quions, quiez, quent, That we may 

vanquish, &c. 



229 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje vain, quisse, quisses, quit, That I might 

vanquish, &c. 

Plur. Que nous vain, qiussions, issiez, issent, That we might 

vanquish, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Fain, ere, To vanquish. 

Participle Present. 
Vain, quant, Vanquishing. 

Participle Past. 
Vaincu, e, Vanquished. 

The compound of this verb is, 
Convaincre, To convince. 



VIVRE, TO LIVE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Je vis, vis, vit, I live, &c. 

Plur. Nous viv, ons, ez, ent, We live, 8tc. 

Past Tense. 
Sing. Je vec, us, us, tit, I lived, 8cc. 

Plur. Nous vec, umes, utes, urent, We lived, &c. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Je viv, rai, ras, ra, I shall live, &c. 

Plur. Nous viv, rons, rez, ront, We shall live, Sec. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Vis, Live (rhou). 

Plur. Viv, ons, ez, Live (we and ye), 



230 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je viv, ois, ois, oit, I was living, &c. 

Plur. Nous, viv, ions, iez, oient, We were living, &c. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je*viv, rois, rois, roit, I should live, &c. 

Plur. Nous viv, rions, riez, roient, We should live, &c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Queje viv, e, es, e, That I may live, &c. 

Plur. Que nous viv, ions, iez, ent, That we may live, &c. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje vie, usse, usses, ut, That I might 

live, &c. 

Plur. Que nous vec, ussions, ussiez, ussent, That we might 

live, &c. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Revivre, to revive. Survivre, to survive. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING VERBS AND 
THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Oftentimes the prospect of pleasure seduces young 

Souvent, adv. perspective, f. 

men, and makes them forget their most important 

oublier, v. 
duties. — — Like the Syrens, she seduced all hearts by the 
devoir, m. 
ravishing sound of her voice,*— His revenue does not suffice 



231 

to pay the debts he has contracted by gaming. — ►The largest 

treasures would not suffice to him who cannot set bounds 

to his desires. — I shall follow the advice you give me, for 

I am convinced it is for my own advantage. — I saw two 

men behind me, who followed me pretty close, and who 

seemed willing to attack me ; but I pursued my journey 

vouloir, v. 
so fast, that they could not come up with me. — As I crossed 

atteindre, v. 
the field, I passed by a man who was milking his 

d cote de traire, v. 

cows. — I shall subtract this sum from the first, and we 
vache 
shall see what the result will be. — Do not that ; you would 

divert too much the attention of your brother. — Your 

distraire, v. 

sister darns her handkerchief very neatly. He is a 

rentraire, v. proprement, adv. Ce 

very clever man ; he will convince you, if you do not 

habile, adj. convaincre, v. 

shut your eyes against truth. — Your dog follows me; if 

d suivre, v. 

you do not call him back, he will perhaps lose himself. 

perdrc, v. 
— You will never overcome your passions, if you do not 

combat them courageously. — — Example convinces more 

than reasoning in point of religion. — They pursued the 

fait, m. 
enemy all night, and killed a prodigious number of them, 



232 

— Do not follow me as you do ; I am going a great way 

bien loin, adv. 
off.— You would not convince him, though you were to 

shew him the letter which you received last evening.-— I 

would follow your advice if I could, but I cannot overcome 

the difficulties which overpower me. — He lives mostly on 

accabler, v. 
iish and vegetables, on account of the bad state of his 

health. — They who live soberly, always live the longest, 
and enjoy, besides, the best state of health. — Do what you 
will, you will never convince a drunkard that he injures 
both his soul and body ; or if he be sensible of it, his pas- 
sion prevails over his reason. — A spendthrift always sur- 

prodigue 
vives his fortune, and is never convinced of his folly but 

when it is too late. — Mountebanks live at the expense of 

Charlatan 
the fools who listen to them. — Follow the advice of a good 

sot 
physician when you can have it ; but nature will oftentimes 

overcome the disease. — Though you were to use the elo- 
quence of Cicero, you would not convince me of the ne- 
cessity of altering my opinion on this subject. — I always 
pity the old people who survive all their friends ; their onty 



233 

consolation can be, that they will soon follow them.— 
These children will follow the example of their father, and 
become great men. — If you choose to set off first, he will 
soon follow you. — Your brother translates better than you, 
because he studies more, and endeavours to overcome the 
difficulties by a continual attention to the explanations of 
his master. — You will never convince me that you are de- 
sirous of learning, as long as you do not listen to what I 
say to you. — He who conquers his passions, conquers his 
greatest enemies. — His father lived to the age of ninety, 
but there is no likelihood that he will live to that age. — 

The wicked live to die, and the righteous die to 

vitre, v. mourir, v. 

live. — I doubt if he will survive such uncommon and 

extraordinaire, adj. 
unexpected disasters. 
inattendu, pp. 



CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE VERB. 
SE FLATTER, TO FLATTER ONESELF. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing, Je meflatte y I flatter myself. 

Tu teflattesj Thou flatterest thyself. 

II sejiatte, He flatters himself. 



234 

Plur. Nous nous flat tons, We flatter ourselves. 
Vous vousflattez, You flatter yourselves. 

Ih seflattent, They flatter themselves. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je meflattai, I flattered myself. 

Tu teflattas, Thou flatteredst thyself. 

11 seflatta, He flattered himself. 

Plur. Nous nousflattames, We flattered ourselves. 
Vous vousflattates, You flattered yourselves. 
lis seflatterent, They flattered themselves. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je meflatterai, I shall flatter myself. 

Tu te flatter as, Thou wilt flatter thyself. 

II seflattera, He will flatter himself. 

Plur. Nous nous flatter ons, We will flatter ourselves. 
Vous vous flatter ez, You will flatter yourselves. 
lis seflatteront, They will flatter themselves, 

IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Flatte-toi, Flatter thyself. 

Plur. Flattons-nous, Let us flatter ourselves. 

Flattez-vous, Flatter yourselves, 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Je meflattois, I was flattering myself. 

Tu teflattois, Thou wast flattering thyself. 

11 seflattoit, He was flattering himself. 

Plur. Nous nous flat t ions, We were flattering ourselves. 
Vous vpusflattiez, You were flattering yourselves. 
lis seflattoient, They were flattering them- 

selves. 



235 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Je me flatter ais 9 I should flatter myself. 

Tu teflatterais) Thou wouldst flatter thyself. 

17 seflatteraiSy He would flatter himself. 

Plur. Noas nousflatterionSy We would flatter ourselves. 
Vous vousflatteriezy You would flatter yourselves. 
lis seflatteroienty They would flatter themselves. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Queje meflatte. That I may flatter myself. 

Que tu teflattesy That thou mavest flatter thy- 

self. 
Qu'il seflatte, That he may flatter himself. 

Plur. Que nous nousflattionSyTh&t we may flatter ourselves. 
Que vous vousflattieZy Thatyou may flatter yourselves. 
Quils se flat tent , That they may flatter them- 

selves. 

Past Tense. 

Sing. Queje meflattassey That I might flatter myself. 
Que tu teflattassesy That thou mightest flatter thy- 
self. 
Qu'il seflattaty That he might flatter himself. 

Plur. Que nous nousflattas- That we might flatter our- 
sionSy selves. 

Que vous vous flatten That you might flatter your- 

siezy selves. 

Quits seflattassenty That they might flatter them- 
selves. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Se flatter. To flatter oneself. 

Participle Present. 
Seflattanty Flattering oneself. 

Se . .flattey e } Flattered oneself. 



236 

All reflective verbs like the above, differ from the active 
verbs of every conjugation, only in the use of the objective 
pronouns, direct or indirect, which precede the verb, and 
make, as it were, one idea with it : the same reasoning ap- 
plies to the reciprocal verbs, of which we will give an in- 
stance, by conjugating such a verb through its moods and 
tenses, but with the three persons plural, the only one of 
which it is susceptible, as has been already remarked. 



CONJUGATION OF A RECIPROCAL VERB. 
SE BATTRE, TO BEAT EACH OTHER. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Plur. Nous nous battons, We beat each other. 
Vous vous batteZy You beat each other. 
J/s se battent, They beat each other. 

Past Tense. 

Plur. Nous nous battimes, We beat each other. 
Vous vous battites, You beat each other, 
lis se battirent, They beat each other. 

Future Tense. 

Plur. Nous nous battrons, We will beat each other. 
Vous vous battrez, You will beat each other. 
lis se battront, They will beat each other. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Plur. Bat tons-nous , Let us beat each other. 

Battez-vous, Beat each other. 



237 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

Plur. Nous nous battions, We were beating each other. 
Vous vous battieZy You were beating each other. 
lis se battoient. They were beating each other. 

Future Tense. 

Plur. Nous nous battrions, We would beat each other. 
Vous vouz battriez, You would beat each other. 
lis se battroient, They would beat each other. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Plur. Que nous nous battions, That we may beat each other. 
Que vous vous battiez, That you may beat each other. 
Quils se battent, That they may beat each other. 

Past Tense. 

Plur. Que nous nous battis- That we might beat each 
sionSy other. 

Que vous vous battk- That you might beat each 

sieZy other. 

Quils se battissenty That they might beat each 

other. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Se battre. To beat each other. 

Participle Present. 
Se battanty Beating each other. 

Participle Past. 
Se . . . battUy Beaten each other. 

N. B. All the compound tenses, or, more properly, the 



238 

perfect voices of all verbs reflective or reciprocal, are inva- 
riably formed with the verb tire, to be, instead of the verb 
avoir, to have, as is the case in English. 



EXERCISES UPON THE REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL 
VERBS OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 

How do you do, # Sir ? — I am very well, Sir ; I hope you 
se porter, v. 
are well also. — I am much better since I have lived a little 

way from town. — Do you rise early every morning ? — I 

rise generally about seven o'clock. — You do not rise so 

early as I do. — Perhaps not ; but you do not go to 

bien, adv. 
bed so late as I do. — I seldom go to bed before midnight, 

se conclicr 
and I do not awake before seven o'clock. — Do you repent 

having bought your house r— No, I do not complain of 

se plaindre 
the bargain which I have made. — I find myself lodged 

mar die, m. 
comfortably.— — 1 am very glad that you feel yourself com- 
commodement, adv. . se plaire 

fortable in this neighbourhood ; I hope that we shall see one 

se voir 
another pretty often. — Do you think that you would be bet- 
assez 



* The French, instead of the verb, do, to express the state of health* 
make use of the reflective verb, se porter, which is literally, To carry 
oneself) — which proves, in some degree, the state of health. 



239 

ter pleased with living in the country ? — No, I prefer the 

se p la ire se p la ire, v. 

neighbourhood of a great town. — Sitdown, if you please, Sir, 

voisinage, m. S'assoir, v. 

and rest yourself ; you have fatigued yourself by coming so far. 

— Did you expect to see me so soon ? — No, I did not 

satttndrc 
expect it. — Do you often ride on horseback in the park ? — 

se promener d cheval 
I ride almost every day, and I find myself the better for 

en 
it. — Will you stay dinner with me ? — No, I am going 

home, for I expect to find my sister returned from the 

saitendre, v. 
country. — I remember to have heard you say that you were 

Se ressouvenir 
better, since you took more exercise. — I am not surprised 

setonner 
at it, since it provokes insensible perspiration, which is 

transpiration j f. 
the only means of being well. — A good heart always re- 
joices at the good which happens to others. — If a man 

bien, m. 
behaves as he ought, he is sure to acquire friends. — 

Will you walk out to-day in the park ? — I do not mind it ; 

se soucier, v. 
I think the weather will not keep up until dark. — The peo- 

se soutenir, v. nnit, f. 

pie who occupy themselves too much with the affairs of 

others, often neglect their own. — I would make use of 

se servir, v. 
your horse if you would lend it to me. — He who sincerely 






240 

repents for what he may have done wrong will certainly amend 

—The days follow, but they do not resemble each other. 

— He will remember your message, for he is a very at- 

commission, f. 
tentive servant. — Men have always complained, and will 

always complain, of the present times : it is a weakness 

incident to human nature.— Let us comfort ourselves by 

attache, pp. 

the consideration that our state might be worse, and we 

reflexion, f . 
will not complain any more. — I perceived my mistake, but 

it was too late to repair it. — The thieves escaped from 

prison, and hid themselves in a wood at some distance 

se cacher, v. 
from the town. — Never sit down upon the grass unless it 

s y asseoir, v. 

be very dry. Why do you go away so soon ? let us enjoy 

seche, adj. 
your company a little longer. — Ill-gotten money generally 

mal.. acquis, pp. 
goes as fast as it came.— There is no liar but his 
s y en aller, v. 
falsehoods betray him one time or other. — If it be true 

that they repent of their faults, you will perceive it by 

their actions. — Never meddle with the afifeirs of any 

one, unless it be- by his own desire you do so. — » 

Have you applied yourself to the French language 

as you intended to do when I saw you last? — — 

se proposer 






241 

Did you remember to ask your brother for the book which 

he borrowed of me ? — Let us submit without murmuring 

to the decrees of Providence, if we wish to be happy in 

the next world. — Your bird will fly away some day, 

s'envoler, v. 
if you leave the cage so often open. — I would not have you 

go away in such weather as this, you would expose yourself 

s'en aller, v. ^ 

to be shipwrecked. — He inquired about his old friends, and 

faire naufrage, v. 
remembered very well their names, one after the other.— 

Have you been well all the time you were absent?— 
The English have signalized themselves in the last cam- 
paign by an undaunted courage. — The French thought 

intrepide, adj. 
themselves capable of overthrowing their enemies ; but 

they at last perceived their error, and fled in the ut- 

s'enfuir, v. 
most confusion. — You would never have perceived your 

mistake, if I had not told you of it. — When I have walked an 

hour or two in the park, then I will rest \ but not before.-* 

You would have been much diverted if you had come 

with us. Your servant and mine quarrelled together for 

an hour, and then fought ; but they have made it up at 

se raccommoder, v. 
M 



242 

last. — Why did you exhaust yourself with running as you 

s'epuiser, v. 
have done ? — They would have found themselves in a very 

critical situation, if they had not retired immediately. — 
critique, adj. 



OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Every verb is, or becomes impersonal, when the agent is 
not directly alluded to, and the verb has for its grammatical 
nominative one of the two pronouns on or il, one or it ; 
or ce, this ; in which case the verb is conjugated through 
its tenses and moods with the third person singular only. 

The verb avoir, when used impersonally, is always pre- 
ceded by the adverb of place y, there, as : II y a, corres- 
ponding in sense with the English, there is, &c. 

CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB 
Y AVOIR, THERE TO BE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
II y a, There is. 

Past Tense. 
II y eut 9 There was. 

Future Tense. 

II y aura. There will be. 

[No Imperative Mood.] 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Past Tense. 

II y ctvoit, There was. 



243 

Future Tense. 
II y auroit, There would be. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Quil y ait, That there may be. 

Past Tense. 
Quil y cut, That there might be. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Y avoir, There to be. 

No Participles Present or Past in this sense. 



EXERCISES UPON THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Is there any fire in the parlour ? — No, Sir, there is not 

Y avoir, v. feu, m. salle, f. 

any ? — There are very few young people who know the 

peu, adv. 
value of time. — It is very cold since the wind has been north ; 

and it will be cold as long as it continues in that quarter. — 

cote, m. 
They say there will be another congress of the allies, to 



settle all the interests of the different powers upon a 

puissance, f. 
solid basis. One can hardly depend upon a long peace 

! where there are so many interests opposed to each other. — 

; It is the lot of man to be constantly in a state of warfare. — 

guerre, f. 

M 2 



244 

There were magnificent illuminations last year on account 

of the general peace. — It much concerns young people to 

acquire good habits early. It does not lighten so often 

de bonne heure tonner, v. 

here as on the continent, because it is not generally so 

warm. — There was no passing in the Strand yesterday for 

the crowd, and I thought some tumult would have arisen. 

— — There is no understanding what he says, for he 

always speaks too fast.— If it be fine weather next week, I 

shall go down into the country ; but, if it be bad weather, 

I shall not go. — The weather is as cold as if it froze, and 

yet it certainly thaws. — It becomes no one to be proud of 

his talents, but they ought to be directed for the good of 

society. — One cannot persuade him who will not listen to 

reason, — I have been told that your sister is going to be 

married ; is it true ? — You have been told the truth ; she 

is to marry Mr.Y.— It will rain before night, for the 

pleuvoir, v. 
clouds are gathering fast. — It is better for you to set off 

se rassemblent, v. 
now, than later, for it will snow by and bye. — It was ne- 

tantot, adv. 
cessary for him to repair to his regiment at the appointed 
rendre, v. fixe> pp. 



245 

time— He does not know the court, who relies upon the 

promises of courtiers.- It matters little whether our life 

courtisan, m. 
be long, provided it be spent in doing good. —He renders 

himself despicable, who exerts his talents in corrupting the 

morals of the people by licentious writings. — Have they 

' ecrit, m. 
discovered the authors of the atrocious murder that was 

committed some time since in the park ? — I must shew 

fallow, v. 
you the letter which I have received from my sister.-— 

It would be better to lose our fortune than our honour.— 

.It was necessary for him to depart before he could see his 

friends. — He is his greatest enemy who prefers the voice of 

flattery to the advice of sincere friendship. — Did it not rain. 

when you were out ? — Yes, Sir, it rained very hard. It 

fort, adv. 
matters little whether you go or not, but it is proper, at least, 

that you should write. — Had he not been gone four months 

when we heard of his death ? — How long is it since the two 

playhouses were burnt down r — It is at least four or five 

years since. — He is the same man whom we saw an hour ago. 

— How long had you been absent from France when you went 



240 

last summer ? — It was twenty-four years since I had left it, 

and I found great changes in it.— — What do you want be- 

y> adv. 
fore I go out ? — I shall want pens, ink, and paper, to write 

a letter to my father. — It is a week since I heard this news 

from a very good quarter, and yet people would not believe 

part, {. on, pro. 

it.— As we were at sea, there arose a violent storm, which 

nearly sunk our ship. — There happened a great acci- 

engloutir, v. 
dent last night, to which I was a witness.- Reports 

are often spread about, without any foundation, merely to 

fill up the newspapers. — There will not remain in France 

many of the monuments plundered by Buonaparte in his 

campaigns. — It often happens that we meet with enemies 

from the quarter we least expected them. — Let there be 

danger or not, he always will travel by night. — It does not 

matter whether it be you or I who write to him — People 

remember longer the wrongs they have suffered than the 

benefits they have received. — We must not judge people by 

appearances ; if we do, we shall often be mistaken. — It is 

not prudent to speak ill of anybody, but it is the highest 



247 

pitch of ingratitude to speak ill of benefactors. — Much 

talent and simplicity of manners are requisite to please 

every one. There is not a more pleasing reflection for an 

old man than the remembrance of the good he has done. — 

vie! lard 

I have been told that there will be a concert to-morrow at 

the Opera. — It is true, but it will be very difficult to get 

tickets, because the prince and princess will be there, or 

billets, ra. 

at least, it is thought so. 



CHAPTER VI. 

OF ADVERBS. 

The adverb is to the verb, expressed or implied, what the 
adjective is to the substantive, expressed or implied. Ad- 
verbs are formed from various parts of speech ; the most 
common, in English, are those. formed from adjectives, to 
which are added the termination ly ; they correspond with 
those, in French, ending in meat, as : — sagement, wisely ; 
prudemment, prudently ; formed equally from adjectives, in 
French, by two different ways ; either using the feminine 
ending of the adjective, which is the more general way, or 
by changing the letters, final nt y from adjectives so ending 
into an m, as in prudemment, prudently. 

As such adverbs present little or no difficulties to the 
learner when they correspond, we shall subjoin only a list 
of such adverbs as have none that correspond with them, 
in French, in order to shew what other expressions may be 



248 

substituted to them, and they are arranged alphabetically, 
that the learner may easily recur to them when wanted; 
but it is necessary for him to be reminded, that these ex- 
pressions, being but substitutes for the English adverbs, 
have a meaning of their own, which it is necessary to un- 
derstand well by decomposing them, in order to feel the 
propriety of the application. 



AN ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ENGLISH ADVERBS THAT 
HAYE NO CORRESPONDING ONES IN FRENCH. 

A. 

Abed, au lit, couche. 

About, fa et la. 

Above, en haut, la haut. 

Abreast, de front. 

Abroad, sur le continent. 

Abruptly, brusquement. 

Abstemiously, sobrement. 

Accidentally, par hasard. 

Acutely, Jinement. 

Afar off, au loin. 

Afterwards, ensuite, dans la suite. 

Again, encore ; oftener expressed by the syllable re 

at the beginning of the French verb. 
Ago, Agone, (passe) not rendered in French. 
Alike, egalement. 
Along, le long. 
Aloud, tout haut. 
Already, deja. 
Amazingly, singulierement. 
Amicably, a Vamiable. 
Amiss, mal. 
Anew, de nouveau. 
Angrily, en colert. 



249 

Any more, davantage. 

Apace, a verse. 

Apart, apart. 

Apparently, evidemment . 

Aptly, apropos. 

Artfully, avec art ou malice, Jinement. 

Ashore, a terre. 

Aside, de cote. 

As much. ..as, autant...que. 

Astride, a califourchons. 

At first, d'abord. 

Audibly, a voix intelligible. 

Away, en. 

Awhile, quelque temps. 

Awry, de travers. 

Ay, si fait. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS.* 

I went this morning to see my brother, but he was yet 
abed. — Do not always go about, but keep in one place.— 
Do you know if Mr. R. be out ? — No, he is above. — 
Somebody told me that your son will go abroad next sum- 
mer ; is it true ? — He went away abruptly, without saying 
a word to anybody. — The French usually harness to their 
stage-coaches three horses abreast. — A man who has al- 



* It may not be improper to observe, that these adverbs, having 
no corresponding ones, in French, their meaning can be rendered only 
imperfectly, and suit such phrases as are here laid down as examples. 

M 3 



250 

ways lived abstemiously, generally enjoys good health in his 

old age. — I met him accidentally as I was crossing the 

vieillesse, f. 

Park; he passed by me on horseback. — He answered 

very acutely all the questions which were put to him. — I 

cannot discern objects afar off, for I am short-sighted. — 

When a youth is known to be a liar, nobody will believe 

jeune ho?nme 
him afterwards. — In a well-governed country the law is 

alike for the rich and the poor. — We will walk along the 

canal, where we shall best enjoy the cool of the evening. 

- 9 m . soiree, f . 

-—I have already told you not to trust yourself to him. 

— This youth has grown amazingly since I saw him last. — 

It is much better to settle things amicably than to go to 

law, for it is running the risk of being ruined. — If you do 

any thing amiss, you must expect to be scolded for it. — 

The church is to be pulled down and built anew, with stone. 

on a larger scale.— He looked angrily at him and bade 

plan, m. 
him to withdraw from his presence. — If a man speaks to 

a woman in improper language, she ought not to speak to 

indecent, adj. 
him any more.~As I crossed the Park, on coming here, 



251 

it rained apace, and I was wet through, for I had taken 

pleuvoir,v. trempe, pp. 

no umbrella. — He has put these books apart for you, and 

parapluie, m. 
those for your sister. — They made him great offers of ser- 
vice, but it was apparently the better to deceive him after- 
wards. — Few people answer aptly the queries made in 

question, f. 
the plainest terms, for want of proper attention. — The 

faule & 

conspiracy to recal the usurper to a throne that he 

tion, f. remettre, v. pateur 

had deliberately abdicated, was carried on very art- 

de propos delibere conduit, pp. 

fully. — After having been tossed several days together by 

balotte, pp. de suite 

the waves, we came ashore in a desert island. — If you 

do not take these books with you, put them aside on 

emporter, v. 
that table. — Of these two houses, one is worth as much as the 

other. — Children are fond of riding astride on a stick. — 

I did not know your brother at first. — When we read for 

others, we ought always to read audibly. — They waited for 

him awhile, but, tired of waiting, they went away. — 

Was not her cap awry on her head ? — Ay, so it was; the 

gossip was rather tipsy. 

commere unpen gris, adj> 



252 



B. 



Back— generally expressed in French by the syllable 

re prefixed to the French verb. 
Backward, a reculons, en arrttre. 
Badly, mal. 
Barely, simplement. 
Before, auparavant. 
Before-hand, d'avance. 
Behind, par derriere. 
Behind-hand, en arriere. 
Below, en bas. 
Besides, d'ailleurs. 
Betimes, de bonne heure. 
Better and better, de mieux en mieux. 
Briefly, en deux mots. 
Briskly, vivement. 
But little, ne....gueres. 
By and by, tantot. 



C. 

Calmly, posement. 
Cheap, a bon marche. 
Classically, dans le dernier gout. 
Cleanly, proprement. 
Close by, tout pres. 
Clumsily, maladroit ement. 
Consistently, consequemment. 
Contemptibly, dHune maniere meprisable. 
Contemptuously, avec mepris. 
Contrariwise, en sens contraire. 
Cojfiously, abondamment. 
Craftily, avec malice. 
Cunningly, avec finesse. 



253 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS. 

If you do not come back in time, I will go and fetch 

revenir, v. chercher, v. 

you. — If you walk backwards, you run the risk of falling 

upon your back. — He behaved very badly to a man who 

a la renverse 
was his benefactor. — Far from making a fortune by this 

undertaking, he barely gets mouey enough to defray his 

expenses. — If you choose to do it, do it as you did before. 

depense, f. 

— If you wish to be well used, never pay before hand. 

scrvi, pp. 
— He stabbed him behind, as he was walking unarmed, 

poignardcr, v. 
and suspecting nothing. — They are behind-hand in the 

payment of a sum which they promised to pay me long 

ago. — Do you hear the noise which they make below ? — 

Were I to send you, you could not find the place ; be- 

sides, it is too late now. — If you are taught a science by a 

good method, you are sure to understand it better and 

better as you go on. When you set off on a long journey, 

avancer, v. 
it is always better to set off betimes, than to suffer yourself 

to be overtaken by the night. — I shall repeat to you briefly 

what he has told me. — We pursued the thieves briskly, and 



254 

caught one of them, whom we sent to prison. — There is 

but little comfort in teaching idle youths who are not fond 

agrementj m. 
of instruction.— Your sister told me that she would go out 

by and by ; are you to go with her ? — Consider the thing 

calmly, if you wish to have a correct idea of it. Any 

juste, adj. 
thing that is not good, cannot be said to be cheap. 

— He is a very great artist : all his works are classically 
executed. — Do your work cleanly, or do not meddle with it. 
Do you know where Mr. C. — lives ? — He lives close by. 

He who has not learnt his trade well when young, 

generally works clumsily. — A man who speaks a great deal, 
seldom speaks consistently. — The man who slanders ano- 
ther, acts contemptibly. — No man has a right to treat ano- 
ther contemptuously.— -If a man and his wife do not act in 
concert, they may be said to pull contrariwise. — When the 
surgeon had opened a vein, he bled copiously. — It is un- 
pleasant to have to deal with people who act craftily. — 
With such people it is necessary to act cunningly. 



255 



D. 



i 



Daily, tons les jours. 
Dastardly, en poltron. 
Deliberately, murement. 
Deservedly, a juste titre. 
Desperately, a corps perdu. 
Determinately, resolument. 
Directly, sur le champ. 
Disgracefully, honteusement. 
Down, bciSy a bas, en has. 
Downwards, en descendant. 
Dutifully, avec soumission. 

E. 

Eagerly avidement. 
Early, dc bon matin. 
Earnestly, serieusement. 
Empty, a vide. 
Ere long, sous pen. 
Especially, surtout. 
Ever, jamais. 

Ever so little, tant soit pen. 
Every way, de tous les sens. 
Every where, par tout. 
Exquisitely, parfaitement bien. 
Externally, en dehors. 



Fairly, <7e bonjeu. 

Far and wide, au loin et au large. 

Feelingly, avec sensibilite. 

Fervently, avecferveur. 

First, premierement. 



256 

Fluently, couramment. 
For ever, a jamais* 
Formerly, autrefois. 
Freely, librement. 
Friendly, en ami. 

EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS. 

We daily meet with people who complain of hard times, 
gens pleindre, v. 

and yet spend money foolishly. A commander, who 

sottement, adv. 
sees his troops in jeopardy, and does not stand to the last 
danger tenir bout 

with them, acts dastardly. — Before you undertake an affair 

of consequence, weigh deliberately the advantages and dis- 
advantages that may result from it. — He suffers deservedly 
who has sacrificed his duty to his interest without remorse. 
— The troops rushed desperately upon each othei*, and va- 
lour at last overcame despair. — A good man follows rfe- 

homme de bien 
terminately the party he has embraced, from conviction 

convaincu, pp. 
of his doing what is right. — A child who does not do directly 

what he is told to do, deserves to be scolded, and even pu- 
nished. — He who, pretending to serve another, betrays him, 

acts disgracefully. — The clock has not struck the last hour ; 

sonne, pp. 
certainly it is down. — Down with the seditious speaker, 

orateur 



257 

cried the assembly with one voice. When you cast up a 

bill, prove it again by reckoning downwards, He is a 

youth who always behaved dutifully to his parents and 

masters. — Do not eat so eagerly; people would think you 

have not tasted food these two days. — If you wish to 

improve fast in your studies, rise early y and your 

faire des progres 

ideas will be clear. — I recommend to you very earnestly to 

attend to the dictates of your conscience. — The coach went 

full of passengers, but it returned empty. — Ere long we 

revenir, v. 
shall know the decision of the house on this subject. — It is 

very agreeable to walk along the water, especially in 

se promencr, v. 
hot weather. If ever you see him, tell him I am very 

angry with him. — If you give the child some wine, give 

contre, pp. 
him ever so little. — I questioned him every way, and I had 

a great deal of trouble to get the truth from him. — If you 
have a mind to buy this book, you may find it every where 
in town. — I never saw a piece of workmanship so exqui- 
sitely finished. — Such a strong remedy cannot be applied but 

que 
externally. — It is wrong to play a deep game, because people 
Ou a tort, m. gros 



258 

may thus be tempted not to play fairly \ — The news of his 

defeat was soon spread far and wide, — He spoke to me 

very feelingly of the loss you sustained last year in your 

trade. — How can we expect to be heard in our prayers, if 

exance, pp. 
we do not pray fervently? — First, or in the first place, I 

lieu, m. 
must tell you that it is not in my power to do it. — It is not 

enough to speak a language fluently; we must endeavour 

langue devoir, v. 

to speak it correctly. — The elect of God will be for ever 

happy in the next world. — Formerly manners were not 

autre, adj. 
perhaps so refined, but there was more sincerity. — Pardon 

me, if I speak so freely. We always acted friendly 

to him, and did what we could for him. 

mvers, pr. 



CONTINUATION OF THE ADVERBS. 

G. 

Genteely, comme ilfaut. 
Gently, doucement. 

H. 

Half, a demi. 

Hardly, a peine. 

Hardly ever, presque jamais. 

Haughtily, avec hauteur* 

Heartily, de bon caur. 



259 

Helter skelter, pele-mcle. 

Hence, d'ici. 

Hereabouts, dans ces environs-ci. 

Hereafter, par la suite. 

Hereby, par la presente. 

Henceforth, desormais. 

Henceforward, dorenavant. 

Heretofore, ci-dtvant. 

Hither, ici. 

Hitherto, jusquici. 

Hourly, a toute heure. 

How ? comment ? que ! comme ! 

However, cependa?it 9 toutefois, 

How far ? jusqu oil ? 

How long? combien de terns? 

How long since ? combien y a t-il? 

How many times? combien defois? 

How much ? combien l i 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS. 

A young lady who behaves genteely, will always command 

demoiselle s'attirer, v. 

regard from every body. — We were hardly arrived when we 

egards 

received a fresh order to march immediately. — He has so 

much business out of doors, that he is hardly ever at 

au- dehors, adv. 
home. — It becomes not any one, not even a king, to speak 

haughtily. — We laughed heartily at his fall, when we knew 

he was not hurt. The conquerors and the conquered 

b I esse, pp. 
entered the town helter skelter. — He set off from hence 9 



260 

without speaking a word to any body. — T here must 

dire, v. personne, pro. 

be a great deal of game hereabouts. — As we have been 
gibier, m. 

imposed upon, we shall be on our guard hereafter. 

gardes, pi. 
I hereby wish to acquaint you with the sale of the goods 

you sent me to dispose of. — Henceforth learn to hold your 
tongue when you are not spoken to. — Henceforward you 
shall apply to me when you want any thing. — Heretofore 
we did not know the man, but we shall not be so easily 
his dupes now. — Come hither, if you will not have me 
fetch you. — Hitherto 1 have no fault to find with him ; he 
does his duty. — I expect my brother hourly from the con- 
tinent, from his letter. — How you have grown since 
* d'apres, pr. grandi, pp. 

I saw you ! — Hozvever, do not blame me if you should not 

succeed ; I told you not to trust him. — How far do you 
think he will come to meet us ? — How long have they been 
coming from Edinburgh here ? — How long is it since you 
heard of your brother, who is in the East Indies ? — How 
many times have I told him that he would repent of it ? — 
How much did you pay for these gloves ? — I do not recol- 
lect how much they cost me. 



261 

CONTINUATION OF THE ADVERBS, 
I. 

Idly, dans Voisiveti. 

Ill, mal. 

Impiously, en impie. 

Indeed, en veritL 

Indiscriminately, sans distinction. 

Ineffectually, sans un succes compl 

Ingenuously, naivement. 

Ingloriously, dans Foubli. 

Inhospitably, en barbares. 

Inoffensively, de maniere a n' qffenser penonne. 

Insidiously, en traitre. 

Instantly, a P instant. 

Instead, an lieu. 

Intensely, excessivement. 

Intentionally, avec intention. 

Intentively, profondement. 

Internally, interieurement. 

Invidiously, par malignite* 

Inwardly, en dedans. 



Just, precisement. 
Just so, tout de meme. 
Just now, dans le moment* 
Just as much, tout autant. 
Justly, a bon droit. 

K. 

Keenly, subtilement. 

Kindly, civilement. 

Knavishly, enfripon. 

Knowingly, avec connoissance de cause. 



262 

EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS. 

Youth idly spent will seldom fail to bring sorrow in old 
age. — He behaved so /// to them, that they desired him not 
to come again. — What advantage can a man derive from 

speaking impiously ? None, but pity and contempt, — 

pi tie, f. mepris, m. 

Indeed the thing happened as I told you. — The enemy car- 
ried away all they could lay hold of indiscriminately. — It is 
better not to undertake a thing than to do it ineffectually. 
— As he urged her to declare her sentiments, she told him 
very ingenuously that she did not like him. — That man, 
after having spread terror through Europe, seems doomed 
to finish his career ingloriously. — Far from assisting them 
in their researches, they received them very inhospitably. 
He who passes his life inoffensively, is the happiest of 
mortals. — The wicked man, on the contrary, who acts 
insidiously 7 lives always in fear. — They could not w r ait for 
you ; they were ordered to set off instantly. — Instead of 

coming yourself, why did you not send a line by your 

billet, m. 
servant? — It is intensely cold; but I hope there will 

domestique, c. g. 



263 

be soon a change in the weather. — If I have offended you, 

I assure you I did not doit intentionally. — Archimedes 

applied so intentively to his studies, that he did not 

know what passed in the town. — A disorder which preys 

mal, m. gagner 

internally, is the most dangerous of all. — One author should 

never speak invidiously of another ; but he must not dis- 
guise truth from a motive of civility. — He died by having 
taken inwardly, a remedy intended to be used externally. — 
We had just the same thoughts upon this subject. — The 
thing happened just so as he has reported it. — I cannot 
give you the book just now, but I will send it to you soon. — - 
He has returned to me just as much as I had lent him ; he 
owes me nothing more. — He suffered death justly, for 
having set his house on fire designedly. — He answered very 
keenly the objections which they started against his system. 
— We should always speak kindly to every body, even to 
our enemies. — I never could have thought him capable of 
acting knavishly. — A man is more excusable in committing 
a fault, if he does not commit it knowingly. 



264 



L. 



Lastly, en dernier lieu, enfin. 

Lately, nagueres, dernier ement. 

Lavishly, en prodigue. 

Lazily, enparesseux. 

Long, longtems. 

Long ago, il y a longtems. 

Loudly, hautement. 

M. 

Meanly, bassement. 

Meetly, convenablement. 

Merely, purement. 

Monthly, tons les mois, par ?nois. 

More and more, de plus en plus. 

Most commonly, le plus souvent. 

N. 

Narrowly, belle for bellement. 

Nearly, apeupres. 

Neatly, proprement. 

Never, ne . . .jamais. 

Nicely, delicatement. 

No more, ne . . . plus. 

Not, ne . . .pas, non pas, where there is no verb, 

Not at all, point du tout. 

Nothing, ne . . . rien. 

Now a-days, de nos jours. 

Now and then, de terns en terns. 

No where, nutle part. 

O. 

Off, with a verb, en, and a la hauteur. 
Once, unefoisyjadis. 



26> 

Once more, encore unefois. 
Only, he . . . que, settlement. 
Opportunely, a propos. 
Over, passe, fini. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS. 

After he had discoursed upon various topics, he expa- 
tiated lastly upon the immortality of the soul. — That man 

who lately towered like the eagle to the skies, is now 

s'elever, v. nue, f. 

moping like an owl, driven on a barren rock. — -When I met 
ruminer, v. 
him lately, he appeared to me quite altered. — It is tho 

• failing of unexperienced youth to squander money lavishly. 

|| — I found him stretched lazily on a sofa, offering a true 

, m. 

picture of indolence personified. — If you set off for France 

next month, will you be long gone? — I knew long ago 

, that his affairs were so deranged, that he could not keep up 

se soutenir 
I long. Those who complain loudly are not generally 

] the greatest sufferers. — He behaved so meanly in that 

affair, that they will not see him any more. — Being chosen 

an umpire, he settled things meetly for both parties. — — 

parti, m. 

N 



266 

Whatever be our pursuits, we ought never to act merely 
occupation, f. 

from interest. When he engaged his lodging, he said 

louer, v. 
he would pay monthly. — As men grow older, they are ge- 
nerally more and more attached to life. — Most commonly 
those who boast much of courage are those who have least. 
- — We escaped narrowly being drowned the other day by 

the aukwardness of the boatman. — The physician found his 

mal adresse, f. b atelier 

patient nearly in the same state as he was the day be- 
fore.— You have copied these songs very neatly. — I never 
could have thought that you would have succeeded so well. 

Old Mr. F. is celebrated for painting heads very 

nicely. — We shall meet in the next world, said she, as she 
expired, to part no more.— I will not have you come with 
me, if you do not walk better.— He assured me he was not 
at all angry at the letter you wrote to him ; but, on the 
contrary, that he esteemed you the more for it. — I shall say 
nothing to him of it, because he cannot keep a secret.-— 
The precepts of the gospel are very little attended to now- 
a-days. — I shall come now and then, to see what progress 



267 

you make in your learning. — In vain do I look for my 

book; it is no where to be found. — They went off as soon as 

they had settled their affairs together. — We were off Cape 

Verd when we espied the enemy, who sheered off as soon 

virer de Lord 
as he saw us. — I saw your brother once after he returned 

from the West Indies. — Once I could walk for a whole 

day ; but now I get old, I cannot. — Once more, if you do not 

devenir, v. 
hold your tongue, I cannot proceed with my writing. — Spend 

only a small portion of your time at play ; for time is too 

valuable to be wasted. 1 should be satisfied if he paid 

dissipe, pp. 
me now only the half of what he owes me. — We were 

wishing for you ; so you could not come more opportunely* 
— There is no likelihood that the rain will be soon over.— 
— The battle was not yet over when he dispatched a cou- 
rier to the capital, to tell them of his great success. 



Parsimoniously, avec epargne. 
Partly, en partie.* 
Peculiarly, particular ement. 
Perceptibly, a vue d'cciL 
Perspicuously, clairement. 
N 2 



268 

Pertly, apropos. 

Plainly, simplement. 

Presently, tout a Vheure. 

Privately, secrettement. 

Promiscuously, confusement. 

Propitiously, favorablement. 

Prosperously, heureusement. 

Providentially, par an effet de la providence. 

Purposely, de propos delibere. 

Pursuant, Conformement. 

Q. 

r^ U1 - C i \ c vite 9 bien vite. 
Quickly, J ' 

Quite, tout a fait. 

R. 

Rashly, temerairement. 

Rather, plutot. 

Rationally, avec jugement. 

Readily, prompt ement. 

Reluctantly, a contre caur. 

Right, bien. 

Rightly, a bon droit. 

Right or wrong, a tort et a tracers. 

Roughly, rudement. 

Round, en rond. 

Round about, tout a Ventour. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS. 

A man who has but a small income ought to live parsi- 

revenu, m. 
moniously. — We effected our journey, partly by land 

voyage, m. 
and partly by water. — Children are peculiarly fond of 

amateur 



269 

marvellous tales.* There is an age when youth grows 

conte, m. 
almost perceptibly. — New systems require to be ex- 

demandev, v. 
plained very 'perspicuously. She has answered pertly to 

the questions put to her. Truth, to gain partisans, re- 
quires only to be presented plainly. If you will be so 

good as to wait a little for me, I will come presently. 
— The gospel tells us that God will reward publicly the 
good actions which men may have done privately. — The 
fable of Cupid and Death, who threw down their arrows 

promiscuously, is a very ingenious one in my opinion. — 

selon, pr. moi, pro. 
The Lord listens propitiously to the prayers of an humbled 

econter, v. priere, f. 

heart ■ I wish you may go on as prosperously as you 
cceur, m. 
have begun. — We had so narrow an escape, that we may 

well say w r e escaped providentially. He who does a 

thing purposely to aggravate another, betrays a very 

mettre en colere 
wicked spirit. -A man cannot be tried legally but pur- 
car actcre, m. 
suant to laws existing at the time of the offence. — If you do 

not return quickly, you will not find me at home. — The 

man who had been run over was quite dead when they took 



270 

him away. — If you will act so rashly, you will incur the 

blame of every sensible man. — A virtuous man would 

sense, adj. 
rather suffer death, than be induced to do what he 

deems criminal. There are very few men who act ra- 

jugcr, v. el, adj. 

tionally at all times. — The dog is a most faithful animal, 

he obeys readily the voice c of his master.— -They made 

him abdicate a second time, though reluctantly. — You 

will do very right not to believe what he may say to you. — 

They suffer rightly, who intended to make others suffer.-— 

A babbler always speaks right or wrong, without minding 

songer, v. 
what he says. — If you handle this fruit so roughly, you will 

spoil it, for fruit does not bear much handling.-— They 

turned round so long, that they were quite giddy. — We 
tourner, v. etourdi, adj. 

went round about in search of the fox, but could not dis- 
ci, pr. pouvoir, v. 
cover his hiding place. 

S. 

Safely, en surete. 

Scarce, 7 > 

c f a peine. 

bcarcely, J r 

Seasonably, apropos. 
Securely, sans crainte* 
Sedately, posement. 
Severally, separemenU 



271 

Sharply, avec aigreur. 

Shyly, avec reserve. 

Shortly, sous peu. 

Shrewdly, jinement. 

Significantly, d\in air expressif. 

Singly, un-a-un. 

Smartly, vivement. 

Soundly, comme ilfaut. 

Softly, doucement. 

So much, ), . 

bo many, j * 

So much the better, tant mieux. 

So much the worse, tant-pis. 

Sooner or later, tot ou tard. 

Speedily, promptement. 

Still, encore. 

Stoutly, fort etferme. 

Straight along, tout droit. 

Submissively, d'une maniere soumise. 

Suddenly, tout a coup. 

Suitably, conv enablement. 

Sullenly, d y un air sournois. 

Supinely, nonchalamment. 

Swiftly, rapidement. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS. 

Have you recommended to him to place his money 

safely before he left the house ? — Scarce had I men- 

quitter, v. 
tioned his name, when he entered the room, and surprised 

us all. — There was scarcely a house in the town that did 

not suffer from the explosion of the powder magazine.— 



272 

I am happy to see you ; you could not come more 

bien aise, adj. 
seasonably. — The virtuous man sleeps securely , because he 

places his trust in God. — We were walking very sedately, 

marcher, v. 
he and I, when we heard the report of a gun in the 
lui, pro. mot, pro. bruit, m. fusil, m. 

wood. — The thieves were caught together, and thrown 

severally into dark cells.— -4 person who is in the habit of 

cachot, m. 
speaking sharply, makes enemies to himself of those he 

speaks to. — If your intentions be upright, why do you act 

droit, adj. 
so shyly? — I met your brother, who told me that you 

will be married shortly; I wish you joy, Miss, and 

your lover also. — She replied very shrewdly to his ques- 

amant 
tions, without giving a positive answer. — He parted 

cathegorique, adj. 
from her quite affronted, and testified his displeasure very 

significantly. — Their names were all put down singly, 

without omitting one of them. — He answered him smartly 

that this affair did not concern him, and closed his mouth. 

regarder, v. fermer, v. 

— If parents would beat their children soundly the first 

time they steal, there would not be so many little rogues. 
derober, v. coquin 

—The preacher spoke so softly, that I lost a great part 



273 

of his sermon. — He has lost so much money at play, 

jeu, m. 
that he is nearly ruined. — We hear of so many accidents 

happening by fire, that every one ought to be very careful. — 

Sterne says, in his Sentimental Journey, that so much the 

worse and so much the better are the two hinges of French 

* pivot, m. 

conversation. — A wicked man will be punished sooner or 

later for his crimes. — Give me all the information you can, 

that I may speedily send them an answer. — —My brother 

is still in the country, but I expect him every day. — He 

fought stoutly against three men, who attacked him in the 

night. — Go straight along; were you blind- folded, you 

could not miss your way. A courtier behaves submissively 

to his masters, but haughtily to his inferiors. — We were 

envers 

roused suddenly by the report of guns fired from the 

alarme, pp. 

windows of the houses. — The inhabitants received the 

prince suitably to his rank. — He looked sullenly at me, as 
if I were the cause of his disgrace. — Shepherds are repre- 
sented by the poets supinely reclining on the grass. — The 

stag ran swiftly over the lawn, and struck into the 

plain?, f. s'enfoncer, v. 
wood. N S 



274 

T. 

Tamely, tranquillement. 

Tauntingly, avec insolence. 

Then, alors, ensuite. 

Thence, de la. 

Thereabouts, dans ces environs la* 

Therein, la dedans. 

Thither, y, Id 

Thoroughly, a fond. 

Thrice, troisfois. 

Through and through, d 'outre en outre. 

Tightly, forme. 

To-day, aujourd'hui. 

To-morrow, demain. 

Too, I . 

Too much, \ tT °V* 

Twice, deuxfois. 

U. 

Unawares, a Yimproviste. 
Underneath, par dessous. 
Unexpectedly, inopinement. 
Unfairly, malhonnetement. 
Unfriendly, sans aucuns egards. 
Ungenteely, d J une maniere pen civile. 
Unkindly, durement. 
Unknown, a Cinsu. 
Unluckily, malheureusement. 
Unmercifully, impitoyablement. 
Unnecessarily, sans necessite. 
Unprofitably, inutilement. 
Unseasonably, mal a propos. 
Unwarily, inconsidere merit. 
Unweariedly, sans relache. 
Up, debout. r 
Up and down, fa et la. 



275 

Usually, ordinairement. 
Utterly, entitrement. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS. 

France bore tamely a despotic yoke, because it was 

. joug, m. 
under a military tyrant.-— The armies spoke tauntingly of 

their neighbours, and boasted incessantly of their prowess : 

prouesse, f. 
therefore it is not to be wondered at if they incurred the 

hatred of all the other nations. — He wrote several letters 

in a hurry, and then set off for the country. — Thence he 

will go to the continent to buy pictures. The last time 

tableau, m. 
I travelled that road, I lost my spectacles in Upton, or 

thereabouts. — I cannot see what you can find so enter- 

amu- 
taining therein. — If I go to France, will you go thither 
sant, adj. 

with me ? — I had rather go thither than to Spain or Por- 
tugal. — A teacher ought to understand thoroughly what he 

maitre 
professes to teach. — Thrice happy is he, who lives con- 
tented with the lot Providence has assigned to him. — As he 
was riding, a ball pierced his body through and through, 
and killed another man behind him. — Hold tightly, for if 



276 

you let go your hold, we shall most certainly lose your 

lacker, v. prise, f. 

labour ; and the rogue will escape from us, and laugh at us, 
peine, f. coquin 

— If I do not go there to-day, you may be assured that I 

will go to-morrow. — He is too hasty, and has too 

emporte, pp. 
much pride, to listen to an explanation. — I went twice to 

his house, but I could not find him ; he was out. We 

sorti, pp. 
expected no company ; we were taken unawares ; but we 

soon provided for them all. — Tell the man not to drag 

trainer, v. 
this piece of furniture, but to lift it underneath* His 

friends thought him dead abroad, when he arrived unex- 
pectedly. — A man who gets another's property unfairly, is 
as bad as a highway robber. — Is there any thing worse 

than to behave unfriendly to a man who has proved 

se montrer, v. 
himself your friqnd. — I did not think they would have 

acted so ungenteely to them* A person who treats 

envers, pr. 
unkindly his servants, must expect to be badly served. — 

He disinherited his daughter for having married unknown 

to him. — His brother fell unluckily from his horse, and 

broke his arm,— The robbers beat him unmercifully, and 



277 

left him almost dead. — A person who spends his money, 

pour, pr. 
unnecessarily ', runs the risk of coming to want. — The time 

of youth being passed unprqfttably, brings repentance in 

old age. — He spoke very unseasonably ; he had better have 
meillesse, f. 

been silent. — A young person ought not to speak wi- 
se taire, v. 
zvari/y, especially before strangers. — If you wish to succeed 

in any thing, you must pursue your object unweariedly. — 

Do you think you will be up to-morrow morning at six 

o'clock ? — If you like, we will walk up and down in the 

fields for an hour or two. — We usually play at cards in the 

evening, when we cannot take a walk.— -He was utterly 

ruined when his house was burnt down, because he had 

neglected to pay in time the insurance money at the office. 

d, pr. assurance, f. bureau, m. 



w. 

Warily, avec precaution. 
Well and good, be-l et bon. 
Well nigh, Men pres. 
When, quand and lorsque. 
Whence, d'oii. 
Wherever, partout oil. 
While, 1. v. 
WhibtJ tem?w - 



278 

Wholly, entierement. 
Why, que and pourquoi. 
Wittily, spirituellement. 
Within, en dedans. 
Without, en dehors. 
Wretchedly, miser ablement. 
Wrong, 
Wrongfully, 



| a tort. 



Yet, encore, cependant. 
Yesterday, hier. 
Yonder^ la-bas. 

Z. 

Zealously, avec zele. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBS. 

It is necessary to proceed warily when you deal with 

strangers. — It is well and good ; but this will not satisfy 

me, I tell you. — He had zoell nigh spent all his money 

dire, v. 
before he had gone half of his journey.—- When you see 

voyage, m. 
him, you will tell him that I am much pleased with his 

letter. — Whence can proceed a report so injurious to his 

bruit, m. 
character? — ■ — Go wherever you will, you will not find 
reputation, f. 

a more respectable man than he is. — While you are 

lui, pro. 



279 

out, I shall write one or two letters for the country. — 

His time is wholly taken up in pleasure ; he neglects the 

most important affairs. — Why do not you come as soon as 

I desired you ; am I to wait for your pleasure ? — — 

devoir, v. commodite, f. 

Every time they questioned him, he answered them very 

wittily. — In the winter, the best mode of travelling is un- 
doubtedly within the stage ; in the summer, on the con- 
trary, it is more pleasant without. — He died wretchedly, 

after having been long a prey to the most cruel remorse. 

en, pr. 
— You blame him wrongfully, for he was not in the least 

concerned in that affair. — They would not believe him, 

and yet they could not convict him of falsehood. — I saw 

him, and I spoke to him yesterday, as he was walking in 

the Park. — I see something yonder, but I cannot discern 

what it is. — It is the duty of every man to take zealously 

the part of truth. 



2;:0 



CHAPTER VIL 



OF PREPOSITIONS. 

The proper use of prepositions is perhaps the most difficult 
part of a language ; because though they offer in theory very 
different images to the mind, yet custom has established, in 
different languages, modes quite opposite of viewing the 
same things ; and in this consists the difficulty, which \\e 
shall endeavour to clear up, as far as lies in our power. 
The better to attain our object, we shall divide the prepo- 
sitions into as many classes as there were cases in the ancient 
languages, which these prepositions are intended to sup- 
ply. 

Besides the two direct cases, common to all languages, 
viz. the nominative and the vocative, the ancients had four 
other cases, called oblique, ox indirect, which were the geni- 
tive, the dative, the accusative, and the ablative, designated by 
peculiar endings ; — now, modern languages, not admitting 
of such variations in the endings of their nouns, have sup- 
plied them by prepositions, which are : — 

Of, de, for the genitive, shewing the origin. 
To or at, a, for the dative, shewing the end. 
For, pour, for the accusative, shewing the passage. 
From, de, for the ablative, the departure and the rest. 

N. B. Besides, for, pour, every other preposition which 
denotes passage, physically or morally, may be said to re- 
present the accusative ; —those, on the contrary, that de- 
note rest, belong to the ablative. 

The preposition, of, de, is by far the most in use in the 
French lauguage ; besides using it before nouns, pronouns, 
participles, as has been seen, the French make very fre- 



281 

quent use of it before verbs in the infinitive mood, which 
then may be very properly considered as substantives in the 
genitive case, for they are merely the name or noun of the 
act spoken of, and are presented to the mind as the prin- 
ciple of the first substantive or verb, to which they 
become attached. It is used likewise after every active 
transitive verb in English, when turned by a reflective 
verb in French, and between two verbs in English, when 
the latter might be turned often consistently with reason by 
of, and the participle present in English ; again after a 
very great number of participles past, and all adverbs fol- 
lowed by a noun, and after the adverb, more, followed in 
English by than: and, lastly, instead of several prepo- 
sitions, such as, with, by y at, from ; as will be seen in the 
following exercises. 



Exercises upon the Preposition DE, OF, used 

INSTEAD OF THE PREPOSITIONS TO, AT, AND 
OTHERS, USED IN ENGLISH. 

Mr. A. has desired me to tell you that he would come 
prie 
next Friday to see you. — I was very much surprised to 

Vend re di, m. 
see him, as I had been told that he was on the continent. — 

They were very glad to hear that you were so well reco- 
rd - 
vered from your illness. — I advise you to endeavour rather 
bli, pp. mala die, f. 

to speak well than to speak much. — Have you ordered the 

coachman to be soon here with the carriage ? — We all 

cocker voiture, f. 
rejoice at the success of your brother in that affair. 



282 

We ought not to be so credulous as to believe every thing, nor 

credule, adj. 
so incredulous as to believe nothing. — We must endeavour 

to unravel the truth, often mixed with falsehood. 

debrouiUcr, v. menson^e, m. 

Do you remember to have seen him once at Mr. N.'s 

country house ? — I longed to see you, and to tell you what 

we had settled together, he and I. Is there any thing 

arret e, pp. lui, pro. moi, pro. 

more glorious and more desirable than to conquer our 

eux, adj. vainer e,w 

passions. — Give me leave to tell you that you do wrong not 

to apply more than you do? — We saw the prince last 

Thursday, he was accompanied by his brother, the Duke 
Jeudi, m. 

of York, and two generals. — I have permitted my ser- 

do- 
vant to go out for an hour, but he does not make haste 
mestique 
to come back. — It is useless to undertake to combat the 

©pinions of prepossessed people. — I wish I could per- 

prevenu, pp. gens, rn. pi. 
suade you that it is your interest to learn quick and to reason 

de, pr. 
well. — How long shall you be before you have finished 

writing your letters ? — It is impossible for me to tell you, 

for I have five or six more to write. — Bid the servant to 

de, pr. 
saddle my horse and to bring him to me. — Struck with 



283 

terror at the sight of the monster, his horses fled and 

dragged him along the shore. — It is time to set off, if you 

wish to be at home before dark. Mr. C. has more 

vouloir, v. chez vous nuit, f. 

books than he will be able to read, were he sure to live a 

hundred years. — I do not pretend to be so good a rider 

cavalier, m. 
as you who have learnt from the best masters. — I was 

afraid to come too soon, and not to find you up, We 

debout, adv. 
ought to rejoice as much at the good which happens to our 

neighbour, as if it had happened to us. — You will repent 
sooner or later to have lost so much time, — Childhood is 
the time to play, but youth is that of studying and acquir- 
ing knowledge. My cousin is to return from the coun- 

connoissances, pi. revenir, v. 

try next Saturday at farthest. — When the ship was wrecked, 

Samedi, m. 
there were more than sixty passengers who perished. — A 

few were saved, but they were more than half dead with 
fear. 



The use of the preposition «, corresponding with the 
preposition to, in English, is attended with little dif- 
ficulty; 1st, it is put after nouns, to shew the end or 
use of the first substantive, as has been seen in the begin- 



284 

ning of this work ; 'idly, after adjectives and participles 
past, as shewing the end of those affections of the mind, 
such as addicted to, &c. 

It happens not uncommonly, that the preposition to, 
though expressed in English, is not to be used in French; 
when before an infinitive mood used singly, or as nomi- 
native to another verb, or following certain verbs as their 
accusatives, or objects direct; such as after the verbs, 
oiler, croire, devoir, faire, oser, pouvoir, savoir, vouloir, 
penser, (when meaning to be alike) and the impersonal 
verb, ilfaut. 

The use of it, corresponding with at, is attended with 
a little more difficulty, and is often expressed by other pre- 
positions in English ; it is then used to shew a second sub- 
stantive as an accident attached to the first without affect- 
ing its nature, as, une table a tiroir, moulin a vent. 

To and at, followed by an 's, as to . . .'s and at . .'5, are 
rendered in French by the preposition chez, meaning the 
house, which is a pretty strong proof of this 7 s, in Eng- 
lish, being the abbreviation of the possessive pronoun, his 
or hers, with the word house understood, and of which 
stronger proofs might be brought in confirmation, were this 
the place to do it. 



Exercises upon the Preposition 
A, TO or AT. 

There are very few instances of men addicted to 
peu, adv. exemple, m. 
drunkenness having corrected themselves of that frightful 

affreax, did}. 
vice, — Children are apt to tell falsehoods when they have 

done wrong ; but they ought to think that they double their 



285 

first guilt. — We ought to learn how to subdue our passions, 

faute, f. u7» 

to conquer our desires, and to suffer patiently the most cruel 

vainer e 
reverses of fortune. — He who likes to acquire knowledge, 
revers, m. 
cannot fail of becoming learned, if he perseveres in this 

laudable desire. — To instruct, to please, and to move the 

passions, are the three great qualities requisite in an orator. 

— If you go to Mr. N.'s you will be able to see him, for he 

is returned from the country. — I am going to send a 

letter to my cousin, have you any thing to tell him by the 

same opportunity ? — You wish to buy a mahogany table 

occasion , f. acajou 

with drawers ; I know of a handsome one which is to be 

sold cheap. — Do your workmen work by the day or by 

journee, f. 
the piece? — Life is so short that we should employ all our 

days in preparing ourselves for the other world. — Do you 

begin to translate English into good French ? — When you 

know how to compose well, you will soon be able to speak 

well.— What more rational entertainment is there than to spend 

a part of ones time in reading the best authors ? Many 

young men pass their time either in doing nothing, or in doing 



286 
what they ought not to do. — Is there any thing more de- 
lightful to see than the return of spring, after a long winter ? 
— We ought always to be ready to serve our friends, when 

we can do it (with a safe) conscience. — They say, that in 

en, pr. 
Spain every thing is sold hy the weight, even cabbages, 

&c. — They knocked him down with sticks, and left him 

more than half dead. — When the distance is short, I like 

better to go on foot than to ride on horseback. — With 

alter d cheval 
regard to what you asked me last Saturday, I cannot yet 

give you an answer. — He went off, unknown to his family, 

twenty years ago, and has not been heard of since. — If he 

could do it, he would, on your account, for he has a great 

a 
regard for you, — The present mode of fighting with pistols 

has something more brutal than the old custom of fight- 
ing with swords. — When I was young I used to draw much 

» 
with crayon, but I have forgotten for want of practice. — 

pratique, f. 
He never walks without having a stick or an umbrella 

parapluie, m. 
in his hand. — You did it on purpose to know what I should 

dessein 
6ay, but I shall not satisfy you. — He is so absent that h« 



287 

often puts on his stocking or his waistcoat the wrongside 
outwards. 



THE PREPOSITIONS FOR THE ACCUSATIVE CASE 

ARE : 

About, environ. 

Above, turned by plus de. 

According to, selon. 

After, apres. 

Against, contre. 

Along, le long de. 

Among, parmi. 

Before, avant, alluding to time. 

Before, devant, alluding to place* 

Behind, derriere. 

Besides, outre. 

Between, entre. 

Concerning, touchant. 

Daring, pendant. 

Except, excepte, hormis. 

For, pour j meaning for the sake of one. 

Into, dans, when expressing a change of place; and 

en, shewing a metamorphosis, real or figurative. 
Near, pres, aup?es. 
Notwithstanding, malgrt, for non obstant, which is 

out of date. 
On, sur. 
Over, par dessus, when shewing passage; in the 

other sense, over is an adverb, turned diversely. 
Through, par, when shewing passage. 
Towards, vers, in a physical sense. 
Towards, enters, in a metaphysical sense. 
Upon, sur. 



288 



REMARKS UPON THE PRECEDING PREPOSITIONS. 

The preposition, for, after reflective verbs, or those ex- 
pressing thanks, or any particular affection of the mind, is 
turned in French by the genitive, of, de : 

I thank you for it, Je vous en remercie. 

On or upon : — this preposition is turned likewise by of, 
de 9 after the verbs, to depend, to live, to subsist, — after 
the verb, to play, applied to most instruments. 

When this preposition precedes any date, it is not ex- 
pressed in French. 

Ex. — --He lives upon milk, 11 vit de lait. 

He plays on the flute, Iljoue de la flute. 

I returned on the tenth of Je revins le dix du 

the same month, meme mois. 

When the preposition on is used before the words, on 
foot, on horseback ; it is expressed by at 9 as it has been 
seen under that preposition. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING PREPOSITIONS. 

We thank you most sincerely for the service you have done 

us. — It was about six months after I had seen him, that 

I heard of his death. — According to what you tell me, 

I cannot trust him any more. — We sailed for a hundred 

miles along the coast, but the savages would not suffer us 

to land. — — Your nephew is very thankful for the letter of 
debar quer, v. 



289 

recommendation you gave him. — Man does not live only 
upon bread, but upon the word that proceedeth from the 
mouth of God. — I play a little on the violin, and my bro- 
ther plays on the flute. — If they can set off on the first of 
the month, they will be able to return on the twenty-first 
at farthest. — An ungrateful son will be punished, sooner or 
later, for his ingratitude.— He has been gone above six 
months, and we expect him now every day. — It is about a 
year since I met your brother in the garden of the Tuilleries. 
— If you do not write your exercise before you go 

out, you will not have time on your return. — Do not stand 

se tenir 
before your brother; you hinder him from going where 

I wish him to go. — A prodigal man always finds his 
resources at an end, before he has run half his ca- 
reer. — He who lives upon plain food, generally speak- 

si?7iple, adj. 
ing, enjoys the best health. — She plays so well on the 

harp, that it would be difficult to find one to equal her. — 
We are to go to Richmond ; my brother and I on horse- 
back, but my mother and my aunt will go in the car- 

o 



290 

riage. — It is far preferable to rely upon one's own efforts 
than upon the protection of the great. — Do not run head- 
Jong into dangers without necessity, but face them boldly 

when they offer themselves.— Notwithstanding all that 

presenter, v. 
has been written against the true religion, it will out-live 

all the writings of its enemies*- — I have seen a horse leap over 

a gate, four feet high, several times successively. — Apollo 

de suite • n 

having had the misfortune of killing Hyacinthus with a 

the 

coit, changed him into the flower of that name. — They 

disque, m. 

passed through France on their journey to Italy.— L am 

very sorry for the accident which happened the other day to 

your brother. — I waited for you above an hour, thinking 

you would come as you had promised. Cain killed his 

brother Abel through envy and malice, for which he be- 

en punition de quoi 
came a wanderer on the earth. — We set off on our journey 

on the twenty-sixth day of July, one thousand eight hundred 
and fifteen, and we returned on the first of September fol- 
lowing. — Look towards the north, and you will see the 

star called the polar star, which serves as a guide at 
etoile,{. polaire,&dj. de,\>v. 



291 

sea.— We ought to be pious toward God, and charitable 

toward our neighbour ; that is, do to them all the good 

cest-d-dire bien, m. 

in our power. 



THE PREPOSITIONS FOR THE ABLATIVE CASE ARE: 

By, par. 

For pour, meaning in lieu of, &c. 

From, de and des, marking an early point of time. 

In, en, implying the manner of being. 

In, dans, shewing the position of an object. 

Save, saut. 

Since, depuis. 

Under, sous. 

With, avec. 

Without, sans. 

By, used with adjectives of dimension, in English, it 
rendered, in French, by sur, on. 

My table is five feet long Ma table a cinq pieds de Ion- 
by four wide. gueur sur quatre delargeur. 

The same preposition, when placed, in English, before 
a participle present, is turned very generally by en, the only 
preposition, in French, that is followed by a participle pre- 
sent, every other taking the infinitive mood after it. After 
the verbs, to sell, to buy, to work, and the like, by is ren- 
dered into French by the dative a, at. 

We buy every thing here by Nous achetons tout id & la 
the yard. verge. 

With is never used in French, but in the sense of along 
with: as, 

WilJ you come with me ? Voulez vous venir avec moi. 

o 2 



292 

In every other instance with is turned, in French, by the 
genitive de, of; which happens very frequently. 

From is sometimes expressed by de la part de, to de- 
sign the person who gave the message : — 

He came from my sister, II Dint de la part de ma saur. 

The preposition in is often turned by the dative, when 
expressing pain in any part of the body, and it is not ex- 
pressed before dates. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING PREPOSITIONS. 

The intended palace for Hanover is said to be seven 
projctte, pp. 
hundred feet long by four hundred deep, — It is not by playing 

that learning is to be acquired, but by studying diligently. 

— From the moment we were apprised of it, we began 

our march, and arrived unexpected by the enemy. — When 

we met him, he was accompanied by his brother and sister. 

— The workmen who are employed by the piece, do much 

more than those who work by the day. — When we thought 

he was in France, we heard he had been seen in America. 

— What can be done with a man who does not keep his 

word? — He deserves to be despised by every body. — Life 

is spent generally in sleeping, in eating, and in visiting, but 



293 

no part of it in studying oneself; hence it is, that so few 
people know themselves. — What have you done with that 
fine horse you bought three months ago? — Go from me to 
Mr. N. and tell him that I have heard of a house which 
will suit him very well.— Most people fancy that grammar 
is to be acquired only by reading books on that science, but 

they are mistaken. The best way of acquiring a sound 

sur, adj. 
knowledge of it is by reading and imitating the best au- 
thors. — My cousin broke his leg by falling from his horse, 

and remained senseless for an hour.-— We were all in 

pendant, pr. 
the room when she fainted, and we brought her to herself by 

opening the windows and letting her breathe the fresh 

respirer, v. grand, adj . 
air. — He would serve you zvith all his heart, if he could 

do it with a safe conscience. — Your father would be very 

en 
angry with you, if he knew that you do not employ your 

time better. — My nephew came yesterday from his mother 

to tell me that she wished to see me. — I feel a pain in my 

stomach every time I happen to eat meat that is not 

done enough.— I did it with an intention to oblige you, 

cuit, pp. 



294 

far from wishing to hurt you. — In the last engagement, 

nuire, v. 
my brother was wounded in the arm, and your son in the 

bras, m. 
leg. — --If you do not come in the morning, you will not 
jambe, f. 
find me at home, as I always take a walk in the afternoon. 

— If you will favour me with your company, we will pass 

/tonorer, v. 
the evening in talking of our old friends, — We are all very 

well pleased with the news we heard to-day. 

aujourd'hui. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OF CONJUNCTIONS. 



The Conjunctions, properly so called, are reducible to a 
very small number, concerning the use of which a few re- 
marks will prove sufficient. 

These conjunctions are, 

And, et. Since, puisque. 

As, comme. That, \ e 

Because, parceque. Than, S ' 

But, metis. Then, done. 



For, car. -JTIioush or t . 

If, si. Although, S * . 

Lest, de 
Nor, ni, 
Or, ou. 



Lest, depeur. Whether, que si and sort que. 

Nor, ni. Yet, cependant, toutefois. 



•295 

The conjunction as is frequently turned, in French, by 
that or than. — The word but is often turned by ne...que, 
meaning only. 

If which, of late years, is always followed by the sub- 
junctive, in English, is oftener followed by the indicative 
mood, in French, and always by the present, though it be 
in the future, in English, when beginning a sentence. 

JSor is always rendered by ni, as following neither. 

Or is always rendered by ou y as following either. 

The conjunction that, though often understood, in Eng- 
glish, cannot be left out, in French, between two verbs. 

Though is always followed by the subjunctive mood, in 
French, — and, before the future of the optative mood, it is 
always turned by the adverb, when, quand. 



EXERCISES UPON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

Grammar is not so difficult to be understood as it is ge- 
nerally thought. — It is but a month siuce my brother wrote 
to me that he had heard of her departure for France. — You 
expect your cousin in town ; if he come, tell him I shall 
be very happy to see him. — Every body agrees that the 
month of May is the most delightful of the year, because 
it is neither too hot nor too cold.— Do not keep these two 
books ; return me either the one or the other. — I do not 
think he will come so soon as you expect him, though he 



296 

told you so himself, because he was not aware of an ob- 

s'attendre, v. 
stacle that will oppose his returning so soon. — Though you 

could learn a thousand rules out of grammars by heart, they 

would never enable you to speak a language well. — I am 

langue, f. 
persuaded languages can never be learnt well, but by ana- 
lysing good authors and imitating their style. — Though a 
man be rich, he is not to be valued the more for it ; if he 

wishes to be esteemed, he must be a good man. — If 

homme de Hen 
you should see my brother, and he questions you about 

it, do not satisfy him. — Since you will not attend to what is 
said to you for your good, do as you please ; but, remem- 
ber my words, you will repent it one day. — Write to your 
father again, lest he should not have received your first 
letter. — Whether you are joking, or in earnest, never tell a 
falsehood ; it is a thing unworthy an honest man. — Though 

he was often reproved by his friends, yet he never Would 

reprimander, v\ 
reform. — I did not think he would have shewn so much 

fortitude in adversity. — Come then quickly to see your 

cousin, for he longs to see you. — Although you are old 
bruler, v. 



297 

enough to judge for yourself, yet ask often for the advice of 

a wise friend. — Nothing is more hated than pride, became 

it wounds self-love in others. — It is but too true that man 

is naturally inclined to evil ; that is, to gratify his pas- 

enclin, adj. 
sions, though contrary to the commands of God. — If he 

oppose, adj. 
is to be pitied, yet he is not to be blamed, for he did his 
plaindre, v. 

duty. My brother and my sister came to see us on 

devoir, m. 

Wednesday last, as they had promised us they would. 

Mercredi, m. 



CHAPTER IX, 



OF INTERJECTIONS. 

Interjections, as it has been said, express merely the 
sudden sensations of the soul, whether of joy, grief, admi- 
ration, surprise, &c. and are few in number. 

Alas ! Was ! 

Ay, marry ! ah> ouida ! 

Away! va-t-en! 

Bless me ! misericorde t 

Come ! allons ! 

Beware ! gave ! 

o 3 



298 

Hail! salut! 

Hem ! halloo ! hola ! ho ! 

Hist, hush ! paix, chut ! 

Lo, voila ! 

Oh, oh heaven ! O, oh del ! 

Woe! malheur! 



EXERCISES UPON THE INTERJECTIONS. 

Alas! what consolation can be afforded to an unre- 

ifnpe- 
penting sinner at his death-bed ? — Ay, marry! who could 
nitent, adj. 
have known you in this disguise. — Away, vile seducer ! and 

never presume to impose upon my credulity, — Bless 

me ! I am a ruined man, if some friend do not come to 

my assistance.— Come / let us make haste, or else we shall 

se depecher,v. 
be too late. — If you engage imprudently in this affair, be- 
ware of the consequences. — Fy ! can you hold such dis- 
course without being ashamed of it. — Hail! O Sun ! bright 

linage of thy Maker, who vivifieth every thing in nature ! — 

a?ii??ier,v. 
Hem ! I want to speak to you, can you oblige me to stop 

one moment. — Hush ! I think I hear the voice of some 



299 

men at a distance. — Lo ! two men came out of the forest, 
and told us they had been robbed. — O Heaven! have pity 
on these unfortunate creatures ! — Pish ! do not speak of 
such despicable characters. — Woe to you, ambitious men, 
who sacrifice the lives of thousands, to accomplish the 
designs of your unbounded ambition ! — Oh ! the fatal effects 
of bad company, of how many youths has it not caused the 
ruin ? — Woe to those who do not listen to the voice of 
religion and conscience ! they feed a worm that will never 
die. 



CHAPTER X. 



The following idioms, or modes of speaking, made of 
various parts of speech, form what may be properly termed 
Adverbial Expressions, to which have been attached those 
which approach nearest to them in sense in the French 
language. 

THESE EXPRESSIONS ARE! 

After the English manner, a I'Angloise, 

Against our will, a contre caw\ 

All at once, tout a coup. 

As far as that, jusque la. 

As to, quant a. 

As long as, tant que. 



300 

As usual, comme a Vordinaire. 

At the rate of, a raison de. 

At iny brother's, ckez mon frere. 

A year hence, dans un an d'ici. 

By word of mouth, de bouche, de vive voix. 

Even with the ground, a rez de chaussee. 

Ever so little, taut soit peu. 

Every other day, tons les deux jours, or de deux jours Vun. 

Every minute, a chaque instant. 

Every time, toutes les fois. 

Every way, de tous les sens. 

For the future, a Vavenir. 

For want of, &c. faute de. 

For your sake, pour I 9 amour de vous. 

In earnest, tout de bon. 

In order to, &c. qfin de, fyc. 

In proportion as, &c. a mesure que, fyc. 

In proper time, a temps. 

In the same way, de la meme maniere. 

In a trice, en morns de rien. 

In the day-time, dejour. 

In the meanwhile, &c. cependant, #c. 

In the first place, &c. en premier lieu, S$c. 

Instead of, &c. aulieu de, fyc. 

Into the bargain, par dessus le marche. 

Just as much, &c. tout autant. 

Much more so, &c. a plus forte raison, fyc. 

More than I want, plus qu'il ne mefaut. 

Not at all, point du tout. 

Now and then, de terns a autre, de terns en terns. 

On horseback, a cheval. 

On this side, &c. en defa, fyc. 

On your account, cl cause de vous. 

One after another, coup sur coup. 

Screened from, &c. a couvert de, fyc. 

Sheltered from, &c. a Vabri de, fyc. 



301 

So much the better, tant mieux. 

So much the worse, t ant pis. 

c . 4 , « X a plus forte raison, Ifc. 

bo much the more, &c. < y . J . , , o o 
7 { a autant plus, fyc. 

So that, &c. de sorte que, fyc. 

That excepted, a cela pres, Sfc,* 

The wrong way, de travers. 

The right way, comme ilfaut. 

The day after to-morrow, apres demain. 

The wrong side outwards, a Venvers. 

This way, par ici. 

That way, par la. 

For the time to come : 

This day se'nnight, d'aujourd'hui en huit. 
This day mouth, d'aujourd'hui en un mois. 

For the time that is elapsed, the French say : 

This day se'nnight, il y a aujourd'hui huit jours. 
This day month, il y a aujourd'hui un mois. 
To or at my cousin's (house), chez mon cousin. 
Two days after, &c. le surlendemain, fyc. 
Up and down, fa et la. 
Upon one's back, a la renver.se. 
With a good will, de plein gre. 
With all speed, au plus vite ; or, 

(if on horseback) a bride abattue. 
With regard to, &c. a V'tgard de } #c. 



EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING ADVERBIAL 
EXPRESSIONS. 

There are French people who like to live after the Eng- 
lish manner ; and there are English people who prefer to 



1 



302 
live after the French way. — We cannot expect much pro- 
gress from youths who learn a language against their wills \ 
we ought therefore to convince them first of its utility.—- 

They heard all at once a great noise, like that of th mi- 
l- 
der, and the earth trembled under their feet;— 1 do not 
nere, m. 
think you read so far as that ; you must have skipped two 

$a*s?r, v. 
or three pages. — As to what you tell me of his brother, I 

cannot believe it, because he always was a very honourable 

respectable, adj. 
man. — As long as I live, I shall not forget the service 

oubher. v. 
you have done me lately. — We visited the old recluse, who 

solitaire 
entertained us as usual with the stories he had read or been 

a witness of in his youth.— IF you choose to buy coals, 

char von) in. 
I will sell you very good ones at the rate of fifty-eight shil^ 

lings a chaldron. — When I am at my fathers, I often go 

la voie, f. 
and sport with some of his neighbours.— A year hence you 

voisin, adj . 
will have improved much, if you go on applying yourself as 

you do. — Instruction by word of mouth is far preferable to 
that attained by books.— In France the kitchens are gene- 
rally even with the ground., which is a great convenience* 



303 

i f 

— Many physicians are of opinion, that by drinking spirits, 

ever so little, men injure their health, and that in fact they 

are a slow poison. — To improve rapidly in the study of a 

language, it is necessary to take lessons every other day. — 

My mother has been out these two hours, but I expect her 

back every minute. — Every time you please to come 

p la ire, imp. 
and see me, I shall always be glad to see you and to hear 

of your success. — They questioned him every way, to get 

the truth out of him, but they never could — For God's 

sake assist an unfortunate man, who has been cast on your 

shores. For zcant of friends or patrons, men of talent 

parage, m. p)>tectsur 

have sometimes remained in obscurity during their whole 

lives. — When a man is once known to be a liar, he is not 

believed for the future, even if he speak the truth. — In 

order to obtain the knowledge of a language, it is necessary 

; to decompose it, and to know the use of every word in each 

sentence. — In proportion as we improve in the study of a 

phrase, f. 

science, we become more and more fond of it.— If I 

epris, adj, 
write to you before the end of the month, you will receive 



304 

my letter in proper time. — This problem is so easy, that 

you can solve it in a trice if you choose. — I like travelling 

in the day time, but I never travel in the night time, unless 

I be in a great hurry. — We had no hopes to escape the 

vigilance of our enemies ; in the mean time we attempted 

it, and we succeeded. — In the first place, I must tell you, 

that your conduct towards him astonishes me much. — In~ 

stead of spending your time at play, or in doing nothing, 

you ought to study much while you are young, — My cousin 

bought lately a good horse for eighty pounds, and even the 

chaise and harness were given him into the bargain*— He 

has just as much right to complain of her as she has to 

complain of him. — If it be natural to wish to be happy in 

this world, we ought much more to wish and make our 

best efforts to be happy in the next. — I had desired 

grand, adj. V autre 

you to bring me a few books ; but you have brought me 

more than I want. — My brother told me, he was not at all 

surprised at this news, and that he expected it for some 

time past. — We go now and then to spend a week or two 

passer, v. 



305 

in the country, at our uncle's, in the fine season. — It is 

much more wholesome to ride on horseback than to be 

shut up in a carriage. — My cousin lives on this side of 

Windsor, upon a hill, wheuce one can discern Windso? 

castle. — I have a friend, who lives beyond the obelisk, and 

chateau, m. que, m. 

I must go there soon, on account of the night coming on. — 

The soldiers were so thirsty, that they emptied three jugs 

altere, adj. crnche,f. 

of beer, one after another, between them. — The persons 

who occupy high offices, can never expect to be screened 

poste, m. 
from the shafts of envy. — These flowers are very tender ; 

trait, m. 
they ought to be sheltered from the sun. — If you apply to 

study when young, it will be so much the better for you ; 

but if you Jose your time, it will be so much the worse for 

you afterward. — If it be our duty to be kind to all men, 
dans la suite 

we ought much more to be so to our betters. 1 be- 

superieur, adj. 
lieve so much the more the news you tell me, as I expected 

things would turn so. — That excepted, there is no fault to 
be found in his conduct, which seems regulated by pru- 
dence. — People of a bad temper are apt to take things 

ear act ere, m. 



306 

the wrong way } whatever the intention of the speaker 

may be. — If you take the right way in doing any thing 

whatever, you do it with much more ease. The day 

facilitt, f. ^ 
after to-morrow I shall set out for a voyage, which will 

last at least a year. He is a man so absent, that he 

distrait, adj. 
often puts on his stockings, and even his waistcoat the wrong 

has, m. veste, f. 

side outwards. — The best plan for one of us to meet him 

is, for you to go this way, and for me to go that way. — 

This day se'nnight, if no misfortune befall me, 1 shall be 

in Marseilles, and this day month in Rome. — I was this 

day se'nnight in Amsterdam, and this day month in 

■ ■ — , m. 

Petersburgh. If you write to me before you hear of 

St. Petershourg 

me,- address your letter to my banker's in Paris, who will 

forward it to me. — We rested ourselves at Bourdeaux, and 

two days after we continued our journey for a week, tra- 

voyage, m. 
veiling night and day. — Children are particularly fond of 

running up arid down in the fields; an exercise favourable 

to their health. — As he was coming dozvn too fast 3 his foot 

slipt, and he fell upon his back and split his head opeu 



307 

upon a flint. — He did it with a good will, for nobody 

compelled him to it, as I have been told. — As soon as the 

accident took place, we sent with all speed for the surgeon, 

who came and dressed the wound. With regard to 

pan st r, v. blessure, f. 

the letters he sent to her, they prove him to be a madman. 

fou. 



CHAPTER XII. 



Containing an alphabetical list of English verbs, hav- 
ing none strictly corresponding with idiomatical expres- 
sions, requiring to be turned differently in French. 

A. 

To acquaint, faire savoir. 

To afford, procurer, causer. 

To ail, avoir vial. 

To apprize, prevenir, informer, faire savoir. 

To argue, raisonner, disputer, argumenter* 

To arraign, faire comparoitre. 

B. 

To be afraid, avoir peur. 

To be cold in the hands, &c. avoir froid aux mains, fyc. 

To be chargeable, etre a charge. 

To be disheartened, perdre courage. 

To be beforehand, prevenir, empecher. 

To be concerned, prendre inter et. 

To be conceited, s' en faire accroire. 

To be of good cheer, prendre courage. 



308 

p 

To be even, etre quittes. 

To be just arrived, venir d'arriver. 

To be just gone out, nefaire que de sortir. 

To be in the right, avoir raison. 

To be in the wrong, avoir tort. 

To be in good circumstances, etre bien dans ses affaires. 

To be in high favour with, &c. etre bien aupres de, fyc. 

To be in one's power, ne tenir qu'a, <Sfc. 

To be a housekeeper, tenir maison } fyc. 

To be hungry, avoir faim. 

To be more afraid than hurt, voir plus de peur que de 

mal, fyc. 
To be pleased with the sight, prendre plaisir a voir. 
To be so kind as to, &c. avoir la bonte de, Sfc. 
To be sure not, &c. se garder de, fyc. 
To be well, se porter bien. 

To be upon the brink of ruin, etre a deux doigts de sa perte. 
To be within gun shot, etre a la portee du canon* 
To be ship-wrecked, /aire naufrage. 
To beat to powder, reduire en poudre. 
To beckon to one, faire signe a quelqu'un* 
To bespeak, faire faire. 
To blink, cligner les yeux. 
To blow up, faire sauter en Vair. 
To blunder, commettre des bevues. 
To break into tears, fondre en larmes. 
To bring oneself into trouble, se faire des affaires* 
To bring about, venir a bout. 
To browbeat, regarder de mauvais ail. 

C. 

To cause to be done, faire faire. 

To check, tenir en bride. 

To chop, couper en morceaux f 

To come to, venir trouver, fyc. 

To come from, &c. venir de la part. 

To connive at, &c. fermer les yeux sur, fyc. 

To cope, faire tete. 



309 

D. 

To delight in, fee. prendre plaisir a, fyc. 

To depend upon, &c. compter, fa ire fond sur, fyc. 

To disappoint, manquer de parole. 

To do nothing but, &c. nefaire que, fyc* 

To do one's best, faire de son mieux. 

To do without, &c. se passer de, fyc. 

E. 

To endear oneself, &c. gagner Vamitie, fyc. 
To enjoy oneself, prendre du bon terns. 
To expatiate, s' etendre, discourir au long. 
To extricate oneself, se tirer d'un mawcais pas. 

F. 

To fence, faire des armes. 

To fetch a blow, porter urn coup. 

To find fault with, &c« trouver a redire. 

G. 

To get friends, se faire des amis. 

To go a great way, faire bien du chemin. 

To go halves, etre de moitie. 

To go another way to work, s 9 y prendre autrement. 

To go one's pace, alter son train. 

To go the right way, s 9 y bien prendre. 

To go to one, alter trouver quelqu 9 un. 

To go to meet, alter au devant, a la rencontre. 

H. 

To have the head-ache, avoir mat a la tete. 
To have the tooth-ache, avoir mat aux dents. 
To have occasion for, &c. avoir besoin de, fyc. 
To have had like, &c. avoir pense, fyc. 
To have a spite against, &c. en vouloir a, fyc. 
To head, &c. etre a la tete, commander, fyc. 
To hear of, &c. apprendre des nouvelles de. 
To have from good hands, tenir de bonne part, fyc. 



310 

To hint, &c. /aire entendre, fyc. 

I. 

To improve, faire des progres. 

To indulge in one's whims, souteniv dam ses caprices. 

To ingratiate oneself, gagner les bonnes graces. 

To intend, &c. avoir dessein de, fyc. se proposer de, fyc. 

To intrude every where, sefourrer partout. 

K. 

To keep company with, &c. frequenter, fyc. 
To keep one's word, tenir sa parole. 
To keep a house, tenir maison. 



To laugh at one, se moquer de quelqvUun. 

To lay the fault upon, &c. s'en prendre a, Sfc. 

To let one know, faire savoir. 

To lie in one's power, ne tenir qua. 

To look w r ell, avoir bonne mine. 

To look like, &c. avoir la mine. 

M. 

To make one of the party, etre de la partie. 

To make a fool of one, se moquer de quelquun. 

To make much of, accueillir bien. 

To make the best of a bad bargain, se tirer du mieux quon 

peut d y un mauvais pas. 
To make up the measure, combler la mesure. 
To make away with oneself, se detruire. 
To make to one, venir aborder quelquun. 
To man a ship, equiper un vaisseau. 
To mean, vouloir dire. 
To mean, avoir intention. 

To meet with an accident, eprouver un accident. 
To meet with losses, &c. essuyer des pertes. 
To mind, &c. avoir soin, prendre garde a, #c. 



311 

N. 
To nurse, &c. prendre soin de, &$c. 

O. 

To obtrude one's conceits, forcer ses opinions. 

To occur, se presenter, soffrir. 

To outwit one's rival, etre phis Jin que son rival. 

P. 

To part with, &c. se defaire de, fyc. 

To pretend, &c. faire semblant, tyc. 

To pine away, dessecher de chagrin. 

To play the fool, faire Vinsense. 

To point at one, montrer au doigt. 

To pore upon books, s absorber dans les livres. 

To pry into secrets, tacher de savoir les secrets. 

To put in mind, faire souvenir. 

To put about a report, faire courir It bruit. 

To put a stop to, &c. faire cesser, fyc. 

To put one out of countenance, faire perdre contenance. 

R. 

To rack one's brains, mettre son esprit a la torture. 

To ransack, fouiller partout. 

To rattle, faire grand bruit. 

To recollect, se remettre dans la memoire. 

To recruit one's strength, reprendre des forces. 

To remind, &c. se ressouvenir, #c. 

To repine at, &c. se tamenter, &c. 

To resort, s assembler. 

To respite a criminal, suspendre V execution dHun criminel. 

To retaliate, se revenger. 

To revive, faire revivre. 

To rout, mettre en deroute. 

To rue, se repentir. 



312 

S. 

To send word, &c. envoy er dire, fair esavoir, fyc. 

To set sm\, faire voile, mettre a la voile. 

To set up for a wit, faire le bel esprit. 

To sheath the sword, remettre Vepit, dans lefourreau. 

To side, prendre le parti. 

To smuggle, faire la contrebande. 

To stand, se tenir debout. 

T. 

To take a turn, se promener, faire tin tour. 

To take a great deal upon oneself, se donner des airs. 

To take kindly, savoir bon gre, prendre en bonne part. 

To take it ill, prendre en mauvaise part. 

To tread under foot, fouler aux pieds. 

U. 

To unbosom oneself, &c. ouvrir son cczur, Sfc. 

To undersell, vendre a meilleur marche. 

To unpin, oter les epingles. 

To unrig a ship, oter les agres d'un vaisseau. 

To unsheath, tirer Vepee dufourreau. 

To use, &c. avoir couiume, or avoir accoutume, Sfc. 

V. 

To value much, faire grand cas. 

W. 

To want, &c. avoir besoin de, fyc. 
To wish one well, vouloir du bien. 
To way-lay, tendre des embuches a, fyc* 
To wheel about, faire volte face. 



313 

-EXERCISES UPON THE PRECEDING VERBS AND 
IDIOMS. 

A. 

When I write to your father, I will acquaint him with 

your progress in languages, which will please him much. — 
If I hear that you behave well, it will afford me a greater 
pleasure than you can imagine. — When I saw him, he had 
caught a bad cold from being wet, and ailed in all his 
limbs ; but I hear he is better. — The spies apprized the 
enemy of our distressed state, and they came upon us un- 
awares, but we repulsed them. — We argued for two hours 
with him about politics, but could never make him sensible 

of his errors. — God arraigns every man at his bar, to 

tribunal, m. 
give an account of his actions, where there is no avoiding 

et alors, adv. 
his justice. 1 am afraid it will rain all day, for the 

weather is overcast, and the wind changing every instant 

del, m. 

denotes bad weather. — I am so cold in my hands, that 

temps, m. 
I can scarce hold my pen, and yet I want to write all 

my exercise before I leave off. 

B. 

Those that are poor through laziness, are chargeable 



314 
to society, and ought to be punished. — A young man 
ought not to be disheartened if he does not succeed 
to his wish, but strive the more; and success will 
sooner or later crowd his endeavours. — I know that his 
intentions are bad, but I will be before hand with him, 

and will hinder him from putting them in execution. 

J am much concerned in the success of a system, which 
promises to facilitate greatly the study of languages.— — 
When a man is conceited, he may be said to deceive 
himself, but he seldom deceives others. — Let us be of 
good cheer, said he to his companions in arms, and let us 

sell our lives dearly ; it is glorious to die for one's country. 

- 
— The enemy had beaten us the day before, but we beat 

them the next day, and so we were even. — He is just ar- 
rived, but intends to set off again very soon, for he is 
wanted at home. — You were just gone out when Mr. A. 

called here to offer to you to teach his daughters. — 

offrir, v. ,' 

None of us can always be in the right; if any one thinks 

otherwise, he is surely in the wrong. — He who is in good 

circumstances, ought to assist others, to enable them to 



315 

exert their industry.— It is better to be in, high favour with 

God than with princes. — It is in the power of every man to 

do some good to his fellow-creatures, each in his own 

sphere and according to his capacity. — He is a man well 

known in the neighbourhood ; he has been a house-keeper 

in it for these twenty years* — Eat something before we go 

out, or else you will be hungry before we return. — J)o 

not make so much noise ; you are more afraid than hurt. 

— I am pleased with the sight of the improvements you 

embellisseinent, m. 
have made on your estate ; they shew your taste. — He 

bien, m. 
was so kind as to write to me, to acquaint me with the par- 

Re- 
ticulars of that affair, which concerned me so much. — Be 
tail, m. 
sure not to tell any one what I have told you about this 

affair, else 1 should repent having told you. — Politi- 

autrement, adv. 
cians have long said that England was upon the brink of 

ruin ; but what has been the result of their predictions ? 

hitherto they have proved false. — If you are tolerably well, 

do not wish to be better ; often, by too much attention paid 

to our health, we make it worse. — The French generally 

p2 



316 

begin to fire at sea as soon as they are within gun shot ; 
but the English, on the contrary, wait till they are come 
close to the enemy. — According to the author of Telema- 
chus, this prince was shipwrecked on the coasts of the Isle 
of Calypso, whereby he begins his moral aud instructive 
poem. — After you have beaten all your ingredients to a 
powder, you will boil them for two hours together, \ 



when they can be used. — As I was passing without 

et alors, adv. 

noticing them, he beckoned to me that they were look- 

remarquer, v. 

ing at us. — I shall bespeak of my shoe-maker a pair of 



boots and two pair of shoes. — He is so tender sighted, that 

he always blinks when he looks at any thing. — The project 

oi blowing up the parliament house is looked upon now by 

many as a political trick, devised at that time to inflame the 

people. — The Irish are supposed to blunder more than other 

people, which proceeds perhaps from their having too quick 

an imagination. Horatius' sister hirst into tears when 

Horace 
she saw the spoils of her lover on her brother's shoulder, and 

loaded him with abuse. — He who meddles with every 

injure, f. 
body's affairs, will sooner or later bring himself into 



317 

trouble. — The object of this grammar is to simplify the study 

of languages ; the Public will decide whether the author 

has brought it about. — Indignant at his having dared to 

criticise his work, he brow-beats him every time he 
critiquer, v. 
passes by him. 

C. 
The prince caused a road to be made through that 

place lately. If you do not check your passions while 

you are young, they will master you when old, and make 

you unhappy. The cook has chopt the meat, and 

is to make a meat pie with it, if you like it so. — — 

pate, m. 
— When you have done what I have set you to do, come 

to me, and I will tell you what is to be done next. If 

ensuite, adv. 
parents connive at the bad conduct of their children, they 

partake of their guilt. — He is an accomplished comman- 
der ; nobody can cope with him in point of generalship. 

D. 

There are people who delight in speaking ill of 

every body; it is an odious failing. He depended 

upon the vain promises of courtiers; but he is now 

convinced of his error. Trades-people disappoint 

ouvrier, m. 



318 

you every day, without the least scruple ; but an honour- 
able man keeps his word. — When he was here, 

he was doing nothing but playing and idling his time 

away. Every man ought to do his best for his own 

interest and that of society, without envying others for 
their success, — Though a man has no fortune, yet he can 

do without it, provided he cultivates some talent to support 

cultiver, v. 
himself honourably. j ( 

E. 

Those who enjoy themselves too much in their young dayg, 

jcunesse, f» 
are likely to be left without resource in their old age. — 

vicillesse, f. 
If you begin to talk politics with him, upon that subject 

jaser, v. 
he will expatiate for two hours together.- — -A sensible 

de suite, adv. sense, adj. 
man will always extricate himself better than another, if 

he has had the misfortune to be ensnared by rogues. 

F. 

You will perhaps find fault with what I have done ; 

but I did it for the best. — You must be very skilful in the 

habile, adj. 
art of fencing, if you fence better than him. 

G. 

A well-bred youth is sure to get friends in the 

eleve, pp. 



31i> 

world, and to be welcome as long as he preserve* 

bien accueilli, pp. 
a good character. — We often go a great way to run after 

reputation, f. 
Fortune, and meet with disappointment at last. — If you 

will run the risk with me, we will go halves in it, loss 

perte, f. 

or gain. If this way does not succeed, we will go an- 

, m. voie, f. 

other way to zvork. — Whether you speak to her, or you do 

not speak, she mil go her ozvn way. -A person who 

goes the right way about doing any thing, always does it 

with much more ease. — Go to my brother's; tell him you 

come from me, and ask him if he has received my last 

letter. 1 went to meet my mother, whom I expected in 

town, but she had beon taken ill, and could not come. 

indispose, pp. 

H. 

The last time I saw him, he was not very well ; he had\ht 

head-ache and a pain in the stomach. You will have the 

mat, m. estomac, m. 
I tooth-ache if you walk in the cool of the evening, with your 

head uncovered. A friend of mine had like to have died 

dccouvert, pp. 

by baihmg when he was very warm. A truly philo- 

echanffe, adj. 
I sophic mind has no occasion for many friends and ac- 



320 

quaintances; he has all within himself. — The wicked 
often have a spite against the virtuous, merely because 
their conduct is a silent reproach to theirs, — You may rely 
upon this piece of nefos, for I have it from good authority. 
— The Marquis of Uxbridge headed the cavalry, when a 
bullet carried off his leg, which was a fortunate circum- 
stance for the General Buonaparte, who stood then in 
danger of being taken. — He had not heard of his son a 
month after the action, which made him very uneasy. 

I. 

You will improve very fast in French, if you follow the 

best method, that of analyzing the language, for it is the 

only way to acquire a sound knowledge of it. — — The 

solide, adj. 
General indeared himself to his soldiers by his humanity, 

his prudence, and his firmness ; qualities essential in a great 

captain. If you indulge him in his whims now, you 

capitaine 9 m. 

will repent it when it will be too late. — His manners were 

so affable, that he ingratiated himself with all the superior 

officers of the army. — They intend to spend the whole 



321 

summer on the continent, and to return next winter to 

revcnir, v. 
England. — Sycophants and parasites are the plagues of 

society ; they intrude every where without being asked. 

K. ' 
If a youth will form his manners well, he must keep com- 
pany rather with his betters than with people below 

audessous, adv. 
him. — He cannot be said to be an honest man who does not 

religiously keep his word with every body. Since he is 

married and keeps a house, he leads a much more regular 
life than before. 

L. 

Everybody laughed at him, and said he must be very 

bien, adv. 
narrow-minded, for having put himself in a passion for 

borne, pp. colere, f. 

such a trifle* When a man does not succeed, he 

often lays the fault upon Fortune, instead of acknow- 
ledging his want of prudence. — As soon as I hear from 

Jamaica, / will let you knozv, that you may take measures 

ique, f, 

to insure the payment of your bill. It lies in your 

memoir e, m. 
power to do me a signal service, and I hope you will not 

e,pp. 

deny me ; it is the first favour I ever asked of you. * 

p 3 



322 

Your sister looked remarkably well the last time I saw her ; 

her modesty gives a still greater lustre to her beauty. 

• ajouter, v. eclat, m. 

M. 

They said, they met a man in the wood, with a long beard 

and ragged clothes, who looked like a thief. — If you will 

voleur 
go and take a walk in the Park, and you have no objection, 

I will make one of your party. — If you think to make a fool 
of him, you are sadly mistaken ; without making a display of 
it, he has more sense than many people who have a high 
opinion of themselves. — When we visited them, they made 
much of us, and wanted to detain us a week at their coun- 
try seat. — If you have made a bad bargain, you must make 
the best of it ; it is of no use for you to lament now. — If 

this unpropitious weather last, it will make up the mea- 

defavorable, adj. 
sure of the distress of the poor, and will require sacri- 

exiger, v. 
fices from the rich. — Those who make away with them- 
selves must have lost their senses, or at least all sense of 

idee, f. 
religion. — We descried two men afar, who made up to us, 

and who asked their way to the next town, which we 



323 

shewed them. — They will man several ships, and send very 
soon a fleet against those African pirates who infest the 
Mediterranean. — It is not enough to speak a language so 
as to be guessed at ; we ought to aim at expressing pro- 
perly what zee mean; otherwise it is mere gibberish. A 

jargon, m. 
person who means to learn a language properly, must be 

anxious to know the meaning and proper application of 

sens, int. 
every w r ord. — They met with an accident as they came 

down the hill ; the horses set off at full speed, and over- 
turned the carriage ; all were hurt, but slightly. You 

legerement, adv. 
must expect to meet with losses, if you are ready to trust 

any body ; I hope this will put you on your guard for the 

future. — When you deal with a litigious man, mind 

avoir affaire, v. 
what words you use, for he will lay hold of the first word 

to take the law of you. 

N. 
When he was ill, his mother nursed him night and 

day, and would suffer none to share this kind office with 

her. 

O. 
In vain modern philosophy wishes to obtrude her wild 



324 

conceits on the world against the dictates of Conscience. — 
The idea never occurred to his mind, that he must die, 
and give an account of his actions in the next world. — — 
He was a cunning man, and outwitted all his rivals, whom 
he knew how to keep aloof, or to render odious to the people. 

P. 

I zoould not part with this horse, though you were 

to offer me double its value ; for he is an old servant 
of my father's. A man who pretends to be vir- 
tuous without combating his bad inclinations, deceives 
himself, and the public justly despises him. — She pined 
away after the death of her husband, and never was 
seen to smile since. — He played the fool, and amused 
the company at his own expense, without perceiving 
that they despised him. — Nothing is more unpolite than 

to point at people who pass in the street ; and young 

per sonne, f. 
people are often guilty of this fault. — Pore ever so much 
gens, m. 
upon books, you will not be the wiser for it, if you do not 

use your reason.— Those who pry into the secrets of others, 

are generally people who cannot keep a secret themselves* 



325 

■ — You mil put me in mind to call on the gentleman who 
left his address here last evening, for fear I should forget. 
— Somebody has put about this report, but it ought not to 
be credited too hastily, for fear it should prove false. — If 
you will put a stop to the slanderings of bad tongues, 
seem not to take the smallest pleasure in what they tell 
you. — He put him out of countenance, by proving to 
him that he was not ignorant of his manoeuvres, and then 

dismissed him from his presence. 

renvoyer, v. 

R. 

Though a man should rack his brains to solve such a 

problem, I question if he would succeed in the end. — -The 

coach went so fast, that it rattled upon the pavement so as to 

stun one's ears, and the coachman all the time was blowing 

with his horn to add to the concert. — At last he recollected 

cornet, m, 
the man as being the same who had robbed him of his 

pocket-book. — If you go, even for a short time, into the 
portc feuille, m. 

country, I hope you zoill recruit your strength. — He re- 
pined so much at the losses he experienced in trade, that 



326 

he fell into a decline, and died at the en^ of two years. 

consomption, f. 
— — In the fine season, people of fashion generally resort 

to Kensington Gardens and Hyde Park every Sunday. 

They respited the criminals, in hopes that they would make 

an important confession; but they could obtain nothing 

from them. — The Christian religion forbids a man not only 

to retaliate, whatever wrongs he has suffered from others, 

but, on the contrary, bids to return good for evil. — He is a 

good plain and unostentatious man, who, if he could, 

droit, adj. 
would revive the rigid manners of our forefathers. — After 

moeurs. pi. 
an obstinate conflict of ten hours, in which both parties 

gave great proofs of valour, our enemies were routed with 

a great loss. — If you waste your time when young, you will 

rue it the remainder of your life, and you will own 

reconnoitre, v. 
your folly too late* 

S. ' . 
By the servant I sent word to my tailor that I wished 
to speak to him ; he has not come yet ; but I expect him 
every minute, and then we will go out together.— 



327 

They wrote by the last mail, that they zvould set sail, for 

certain, on the Saturday following ; thus we may expect 

them soon. — There is not a more disagreeable character in 

society than a man who sets up for a wit, without having a 

great fund of it in store. — The nations of Europe, it should 

reserve, f. 
seem, have sheathed the sword, and, it is to be hoped, for 

many years, if ambition does not rekindle the torch of 

flambeau, m. 
w r ar. — As long as you behave well, I shall side with you, 

and will be a firm friend to you ; otherwise never expect 
that I should uphold you in your follies.— The people who 
live by smuggling must be unhappy, for they live in con- 
stant fear of being detected and fined.— Why do you stand 
here is a chair, sit down, and tell us the history of your 
voyage; we shall be highly gratified by hearing it 

T. 

If the weather keep fair, zee shall take a turn this af- 
ternoon, and be back at tea-time. You take a great 

deal upon yourself in pretending to dictate to others 
what they ought to do \ would it it not be belter for you to 



328 

meddle with your own concerns ? — A sensible youth takes 

affaire, f. 
kindly, any advice that is given to him, when he finds it to 

be prompted by a desire of serving him. — It is not so with 
ill-tempered young people ; every thing said to them for 
their good they take ill, because they want judgment to dis- 
cern right from wrong. — Those who have determined to 
gratify all their passions tread under foot all divine and 

human laws, and generally come to a bad end. 

faire, v. 

U. 

He seemed to me to be in great grief; but, seeing that 

I was concerned for him ; he unbosomed himself to me, 
and acquainted me with the cause of his sorrows. — The 
practice of those tradesmen, who undersell their neigh- 
bours, merely with a view to injure them, seems to be very 
base, and highly reprehensible. — Shall I unpin the parcel 
to see what your mother sends you; I presume they are 
very fine laces. — When we went to Gravesend, we saw a 
large seventy-four that had made many voyages, and the 

men told us it zms but lately unrigged. — He unsheathed his 



I 

329 

sword and rushed upon the enemy with a most undaunted 
courage, when he fell, a ball having passed through his 
heart. — Before I was taught by your method, I used to 

think the study of languages very hard, but I am now 

difficile, adj. 
convinced of the contrary. 

V. 

The generality of mankind value only what is in vogue ; 

but the sensible few will always judge for themselves. 

sense, adj. 

w. 

Tell the servant 1 shall want Mm in half an hour, to go 

and enquire if there are books arrived for me at the 

custom-house. — You wiil set off for Spain, you say, next 

douane, f. 
Friday ; I wish you good success in your undertaking ; 
Vendredi, m. 
No one can zcish you well so much as I do. — They knew 

he was to travel that way, so they way-laid him, and 

wanted to shoot him, but fortunately missed him.— They 

were about to be taken in iBank, but they wheeled about 

and began a brisk fire of musketry. 



330 

APPENDIX. 



There are idioms, it is true, hardly susceptible of a clear 
explanation, and which ought to occupy last, and perhaps 
least, the attention of the learner, as being least intelligible. 
All that can be done is, to content oneself with the gramma- 
tical mechanism of such sentences as the following : 

It is in vain for you, vous avez beau, fyc. 

Be sure not, riayez garde de, &c. 

To take kindly, savoir hongre, fyc. 

It will be all over with him, if, &c. e'en sera fait 

de lui, si, &$c. 
He longed, &c. il lui tardoit de, fyc. 
His life was at stake, il y alloit de sa vie. 
They nevertheless, &c. it ne laisserent pas de, #c. 
The question is, 8cc. Us s'agit de, fyc. 
To do without, &c. se passer de, fyc. 



EXERCISES ON THE APPENDIX. 

It is in vain for you to pretend to conceal the truth ; 

you will not succeed, we have discovered the whole 

manoeuvre. — Be sure not to listen to the allurements of 

complot, m. 

pleasure, if you wish to pass a comfortable and honourable 

life. — / shall take it very kindly of you if you will under^ 

take this affair for me, and shall be most thankful for it.— 



331 

If the ship, which he expected, and in which he had em- 
barked the best part of his fortune, be lost, it is all over 
with him, he is ruined. — When I saw your sister last, she 
told me she had not seen you for three years, and that she 
longed for your return. — It is very fortunate for him to 

have gained the trial, for his life was at stake, and his ene- 

proces, m.. 
lilies were very active. — They acquitted him of the capital 

punishment, but they nevertheless fined him ten thousand 
pounds. — The question is, to know, if a language can be 
better learnt by grammatical translations than by the usual 
method ; but experience proves already in favour of the for- 
mer ; for my part I am convinced, that, to become skilful 
in a language, it is impossible to do without them. 



CONCLUSION. 



1 he scholar having thus far learned the grammatical part, 
and in some measure the idiomatical part, of the language, 
must begin to feel confident in composing French from 
English authors ; but let it be observed, that all books are 
not equally fit, and that it is essential to choose authors of 
a pure but easy style. The writing correctly into a fo- 




/ 

reign language presents, it is well known, difficulties at 
every step, to those at least who wish to write or speak 
it with purity ; and what well-educated person does not ? 
therefore to add to these difficulties, by selecting a high- 
flown English style, would betray a want of discernment, 
whereas the translating into French a familiar and correct 
style, will enable the scholar to write with a purity hardly 
ever attained, but yet very attainable, if the following me- 
thod be attended to, viz. when an expression does not offer 
immediately for the English, instead of the dangerous prac- 
tice of searching dictionaries, which most generally in such 
cases mislead, let the scholar, in his own mind, change 
the English expression for another, nearly of the same im- 
port, though perhaps more general ; or, as far as he is able to 
judge, more approaching to the French ; thereby he will 
soon be enabled to solve most difficulties, and at last write 
correctly, nay, even with elegance. But of all styles fit for 
translation, the most appropriate, undoubtedly, is one's own ; 
therefore, the most useful practice is that of writing on the 
first subject that occurs, and then translating it into French, 
whilst the corrections, if made by an able hand, will strike 
more forcibly ; the reading of choice authors in French 
will be also very profitable provided we are not satisfied 
with the slight perusal of an author, in the way that novels 
are run over ; for, to derive much profit by a French au- 
thor, one ought, on the contrary, to read slowly, aud pre- 
serve the idiomatical turns throughout, were it ever so 
repugnant to the idiom of the mother tongue ; by acting 
otherwise, we read in reality nothing but English, though 
holding a French book in our hand ; a truth which we wish 
to press upon the mind of the reader. 

THE END. 



J. M'Creery* Printer, 
Black-Horse-Court, London. 



